Home

"service manual"

1. INPUT e Input coupling DC Offset OV Inversion Unchanged e Probe attenuation Unchanged Probe attenuation must be set before starting auto set up e Acquisition hold Unchanged 4 2 IM 701530 01E 4 2 Displaying Waveforms using the Auto Set up Function Auto set up settings related to the horizontal axis TIME DIV TIMEBASE Time axis is set so that the waveform with the longest cycle shows 2 to 4 cycles on the screen If this is not possible for any of the channel input signals set to 1ms div Set to INT Auto set up settings related to triggers MODE TYPE LEVEL SOURCE COUPLING POSITION DELAY HOLD OFF Set to AUTO Set to EDGE The trigger level is set to half the amplitude of the trigger source The Channel having the waveform with the longest cycle is selected as the trigger source The slope setting is set to Set to DC HF rejection remains unchanged Set to Odiv Set to Os Set to OFF Auto set up settings related to acquisition display conditions START STOP ACQUISITION Acquisition is started Set to NORMAL LENGTH for DL1540CL FILTER ZOOM DISPLAY DISPLAY FORM Unchanged Smoothing is set to OFF Band to FULL Mode is set to OFF and other settings remain unchanged Settings related
2. Q i which were in effect before the auto set up Note however that CALLE if you have performed any other settings it might be necessary to press the AUTO SETUP key once again AUTOSET UNDO EXEC Explanation Waveforms for which auto set up is effective Frequency Approx 40 Hz to 150 MHz Amplitude Approx 50 mV or higher when probe attenuation is 1 1 Type Repetitive but not complex waveform Auto set up settings related to the vertical axis CH1 to 4 Depending on whether input is applied or not the channels are automatically turned ON or OFF In case of an amplitude of at least approx 50 mV and probe attenuation is 1 1 the channel will be turned ON V DIV when one waveform is displayed Set to a value so that the peak voltage is between 1 6 div p p and 4 div p p when two waveforms are displayed Set to a value so that the peak voltage is between 0 8 div p p and 2 div p p when three waveforms are displayed Set to a value so that the peak voltage is between 0 4 div p p and 1 div p p when four waveforms are displayed Set to a value so that the peak voltage is between 0 4 div p p and 1 div p p POSITION Set as follows depending on the number of channels which are ON Single channel Two channels Three channels Four channels TONS CES IANH TN
3. m Soft keys a When displaying both the X Y waveform and the T Y waveform 3 3 Press the T Y amp X Y soft key 5 a C9 When displaying the X Y waveform only m 3 After step 2 has been completed press the X Y soft key O When displaying the T Y waveform only two cuts 3 After step 2 has been completed press the OFF soft key DISPLAY key Conto METCEN Y TVEY SINE ZEE 1771773 Explanation Assigning channels to the X axis horizontal axis and Y axis vertical axis The assignment has been pre determined as follows The CH1 input voltage is assigned to the X axis and the CH2 input voltage to the Y axis An X Y waveform can also be displayed for acquisition data loaded from a floppy disk In this case the trace No will simply be replaced by the channel No Selecting the display type The display type can be selected from the following three types OFF Displays only the V T waveform X Y Displays only the X Y waveform In case the zoom setting has been set to ZOOM the display will show the expanded waveform as specified in the zoom box T Y amp X Y Displays both the V T waveform and the X Y waveform The display depends on the zoom settings Refer to X X for more details Points to note when displaying an X Y waveform When displaying X Y waveforms only measurement of Integ1XY and Inte
4. Data Vertical control circuit Multiplex circuit processing circuit Acquisition memory P Acquisition memory Ts pd reae ec 3 Input coupling Pre circui ATT amplifier i AD 4 CH1 O gt gt gt e e Display lr dg WN buffer i pem CH2O0 gt L gt S Peal Color LCD display i Y lt _ gt i i Display CH3 O Aa T SN control Y pM circuit m Keyboard CH4 O1 gt SER LX bu gt Printer Optional eee ares ee f gt GPJ4B Y Timebase CRU Front end tigger Acquisition FDD control circuit k gge nirol circuit ru conroFeireu L O Half pitch interface connector External trigger input included the output External clock input Signal Flow for GO NO GO judgement gt O Trigger output A signal input via the input terminal is sent to the vertical control circuit The vertical control circuit consists of an input coupling circuit attenuator ATT and pre amplifier and it adjusts the voltage and amplitude of the signal according to the input coupling probe attenuation vertical sensitivity and offset voltage settings before sending the signal to the multiplex circuit The signal will then be sent to the A D converter matching settings such as time axis and so on The A D converter samples the signal at a sample rate of 100 MS s to convert it to d
5. 66 pese jH umm 3 5 POSITION J es key Used to shift from one digit to the cen ftd ocn pa Ace next of the value you are setting using mer REMOTELOCAL CAL MISC HISTORY STORERECALL COPY m We rotary Knob J 0 l KEYBOARD FILE MENU LEVER SOURCE key POSITION DELAY key Pages 6 17 6 18 Displays the trigger source selection Displays the trigger position trigger delay setting menu menu COUPLING key Page 6 16 HOLD OFF key Page 6 19 Displays the trigger coupling setting Displays the holdoff time setting menu menu Keys and Rotary Knob used for Setting Acquisition and Display Conditions m DISPLAY key Pages 7 7 to 7 13 Displays the waveforms for the sequential store and history f FILTER key Pago 7 8 Ps and the setting menu nierboon X Y and Displays the input filter setting menu accumulate settings The indicator above the key is lit when a band limit is set SHIFT DISPLAY DISPLAY FORM key Pages 7 14 to 7 16 Displays the display condition setting menu to make display interpolation graticule scale marker and intensity settings SNAP SHOT hace Csc RESET KEY T Resets the settings made using the r
6. SELECT key ESC key r Soft keys E i 14 l aaa F EE n IL Y Y Ji X ptt GO NO GO key keys Operating Procedure 1 Press the GO NO GO key to display the GO NO GO setting menu 2 Press the Mode soft key and select ON The GO NO GO top menu appears 3 Press the ZONE soft key The default setting is ZONE Mode GO NOGO Type R orr OU PRMIR Edit Setup EXEC When using the GO NO GO determination funtion the following settings selections can be specified Creating the determination zone refer to page 9 1 9 2 Saving the determination zone refer to page 9 3 Redrawing editing the saved determination zone refer to page 9 3 Setting up the determination conditions refer to page 9 4 9 5 trace conditions determination logic determination sequence action after determination Executing and aborting the determination function refer to page 9 5 Note Se The determination waveforms are saved in the internal memory Old determination waveforms which are already present in the internal memory will be overwritten when new ones will be saved An error message will not appear Therefore verify before saving whether or not determination waveforms already exist in the internal memory Refer to steps 18 to 20 Only below buttons can be operated when a zo
7. 1 Press the ZOOM key to display the zoom setting menu Displaying the pre zoom and expanded waveform 2 Press the MainZoom soft key of the ZOOM Mode setting The expansion rate and position selection menu appears ZOOM Mode BIN MAIN ZOOM IMainZoom s X I Setting the expansion rate and position 3 After having pressed the ZOOM soft key of the ZOOM Knob setting use the rotary knob to adjust the expansion rate Explanation ZOOM key ZOOM Mode OFF MAIN ZOOM ZOOM Knob POS H ZOOM x5 4 After having pressed the POS soft key of the ZOOM Knob setting use the rotary knob to adjust the position ZOOM Mode OFF MAIN ZOOM ZOOM Knob 00 ZOOM Displaying the expanded waveform only 2 After step 1 has been completed press the ZOOM soft key of the ZOOM Mode setting The expansion rate and position are as described in step 3 and 4 ZOOM Mode ZOOM Knob OFF MAIN ZOOM Mainzoom 00 POS Position 1fidiv H ZOOM Displaying the pre zoom waveform only 2 After step 1 has been completed press the MAIN soft key of the ZOOM Mode setting The expansion rate and position are as described in step 3 and 4 Exp
8. PQR 96705703 14 04 52 2 96705703 14 05 30 DEF 96705703 14 06 08 Deleting 6 Press the Delete soft key Protecting 6 Press the Protect soft key A Q symbol will be added before the file name of the protected file List Exec Func P P Protect Delete Disk Info To TopMenu Format Canceling protection 7 After step 4 has been performed use the rotary knob to select the file at the beginning of which a pf symbol is added POR 96 05 03 14 04 52 2 DEF 96 05 03 14 06 08 8 Press the Protect soft key and the protection will be canceled The g symbol before the file name will be deleted List Exec Func Disk To p p Protect Delete Forinat Info TopMenu Waveform data and setting parameters saved on a medium can be deleted one file at a time Protecting data A protection function is used to protect saved data from being deleted by mistake If an attempt is made to delete protected data an error message will be displayed and the data will not be deleted A g symbol is displayed before the names of protected files to distinguish them from un protected files IM 701530 01E 13 17 ysiq pJer euJeiu eui Jo e91 8q ISOS 9y w014 eyeq Duipeo pue Bunes 13 8 Deleting and Protecting Saved Data CAUTION Selecting the data list Change Data List File lists are displa
9. Selecting the data list Change Data List The file list used to specify the data to be copied is displayed according to the data format Select from the following P P ACQ SETUP e 2C HPGL e PS e TIFF BMP Displayed waveform data P P compressed Binary data stored in the acquisition memory ACQ ASO Setting parameters For details see Setting parameters which can ASCII data of the data residing in the acquisition memory be saved on page 13 12 in the User s Manual IM701530 01E Data consisting of the I C bus analysis results Screen image data saved using the HP GL command Screen image data saved in PS format Screen image data saved in TIFF format Screen image data saved in BMP format 13 20 IM 701530 01E 13 11 Connecting a PC to the DL1540CL C8 AN caution A PC can be connected to the SCSI interface connector C8 option allowing the PC to access the internal hard disk C8 option Items necessary for connection Cable SCSI cable half pitch 50 pins pin type Use a commercially sold cable that is 3 m or less in length that has a ferrite core on each end of the cable and that has a characteristic impedance between 90 and 132 Q Make sure to follow the connection procedures below Connecting the DL1540CL and the PC Otherwise media of other SCSI devices connected to the PC can be damaged Connecting the DL1540CL a
10. Field 2 1 HS Line No 281 62 263 264 265 266 2675268 269 270 71 272 73 2742755760277 5278 slzeoze1l2s2 253264285 gt N PAL 2 to 1251 Field 1 starts at line No 2 Field 2 starts at line No 315 Line Nos in cannot be set Field 1 31 Y YA RPLULLTLRPREU UU UU i l 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Line No T 621 622 623 624 625 ee 632 1246 1250 1251 Field2 PI UUUULa E U 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 Line No gt 933 945 HDTV 2 to 2251 available on DL1540C DL1540CL Field 1 starts at line No 2 Field 2 starts at line No 565 Line Nos in cannot be set 45H gt lt 517H 5H 5H 35H gt Line No 1550 i 72 16 ug 1128 1129 age ag 1132 1166 i y Field 1 O E931 gf gf fh nf na nl nfi nf nj n3 3334 1682 1687 1688 1169 1170 1171 1172 1178 1174 1728 Line No 557 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 603 1 Fez NEL hh nh nf f fh nh f nf aii Y ap Hen 45H MEN a 518H Selecting the polarity Polarity POSITIVE NEGATIVE yo LLLLLLL M Trigger point Trigger level 1 1 Y NTSC PAL i Trigger level ae o xe D ET Trigger point Synchronization pulse ae P
11. r Soft keys 3 Press the SCSI soft key to display the ID number setting J I menu External Motor Sw To SCOLID OFF 5 TopMenu MISC key Explanation 4 Turn the rotary knob to change the ID number The SCSI ID number is used to distinguish between the various devices connected to the SCSI chain Make sure not to use duplicate ID numbers on any of the connected devices The default values are as follows DL1540CL C8 6 SCSI device External SCSI D 5 Built in hard disk 4 The ID numbers of the DL1540CL and built in hard disk cannot be changed Range of SCSI ID numbers 0 1 2 3 and 5 Terminator The terminator is always turned ON It cannot be changed Notes when setting the ID number The SCSI ID numbers of external SCSI devices cannot be set to the same numbers as the instrument or the internal hard disk Various data are saved or loaded from the SCSI device that has the same ID number as the External SCSI ID Set the ID number of the device to which you wish to save or load various data f you change the External SCSI ID also change the SCSI ID on the device For the procedure used to change the SCSI ID on the external device see the instruction manual that is provided with the device IM 701530 01E 13 19 ysiq p
12. The displayed record length given in refers to the record length stored in the acquisition memory Only when the trigger mode is auto or auto level data of a record length given in is stored In case where no value in is given the displayed record length and the record length stored in the acquisition memory are the same 2 100MS s and having taken the minimum and maximum values 3 4 In the envelope mode the minimum maximum values are displayed in a pair For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling mode is active The sample rate given in for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at App 2 IM 701530 01E Appendix 2 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length for DL1540C For DL1540C trigger mode single long hysterisys OFF When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active At cd CH3 CH3 drin Both At goce CH3 CH3 CH4 are Both OFF Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate irecord length rate fecord length rate record length rate record length T div S s word S s word S s word S s word 50s 100 50K 56K 200 100K 120K 100M 50 x 2 25K x 2 28K x 2 100M 100 x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 20s 200 40K 56K 500 100K 120
13. 4 Cancel the accumulation 5 Press the Accumu soft key and select OFF Accumulation modes Persist mode Allows overlapping display of waveforms in a single color The most recent waveform is bright and old waveforms accumulated waveforms are dark Color grade mode Allows overlapping display of waveforms in eight colors according to the frequency of occurrence of th edata values Accumulation time for the persist mode When Persisit has been selected at the accumulation mode the following can be selected The default settings is 100ms 100ms 200ms 300ms 400ms 500ms 600ms 700ms 800ms 900ms 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 7s 8s 9s 10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s INFINITE Grade width for color grade mode When Color has been selected at the accumulation mode select the color grade width The frequency of data value occurrence is indicated in eight colors as illustrated below The grade width can be set within the range given below The default setting is 8 Overlapping display is performed indefinitely in color grade mode When grade width 4 When grade width 32 Higher frequency red 24 to red 192 to magenta 20 to 23 magenta 160to 191 yellow 16 to 19 yellow 128 to 159 white 12to 15 white 96 to 127 cyan 81to 11 cyan 64 to 95 green 4107 green 32 to 63 blue 1to3 blue 1 to 31 black 0 black 0 For example a dot which has appeared o
14. You can perform measurement both on displayed waveform data and on the corresponding waveform values within acquisition memory You first set the various conditions measurement range measurement items distal proximal values and channel delay You can then start measurement of the displayed waveform data by pressing the Measure soft key so that it comes ON You must first stop waveform acquisition then you can execute the measurement by pressing the ALL Scan EXEC soft key Each press of the key takes a single measurement of the various waveform parameters using the memory resident values corresponding to the displayed waveform data The measurement conditions range items distal proximal values and channel delay are the same as those for the displayed data Setting the measurement range The measurement range is determined by the two vertical cursors T1 and T2 The position of cursor T1 indicates the starting point of measurement and the position of cursor T2 indicates the end point 3 After having pressed either the T1 or T2 soft keys use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor You can also use the or keys T1 cursor T2 cursor 1998 11 19 21 07 37 rds 2ms div Stopped q 2ms div i CHI ON T 50V div 10 1 DC 9 0v CH2 ON 50V div 10 1 DC 0 07 CH3 OFF 50V div 10 1 DC 0 0v CH4 ON 2 00V div 10 1 DC 0 00V A i i Record Length i Main 10K Measurement range opa
15. 150MHz probe p Printer roll Rubber feet x4 Soft case 10 1 1 1 selectable x2 chart A9088ZMx2 B9918EZ 700998 B9850NX Power supply fuse Front cover User s manual this manual x1 in fuse holder B9957DG Communication interface manual x1 Operation guide x1 A1351EF 1 For DL1540C DL1540CL a total of four passive probes are supplied if the two optional probes are included 2 Aroll chart will be supplied only when the instrument is equipped with a built in printer IM 701530 01E 3 Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories Optional Spare Parts The following optional accessories are available On receiving these optional accessories make sure that all the items that you ordered have been supplied and that they are undamaged If you have any questions regarding optional accessories or if you wish to place an order contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument Mini clip convertor BNC adapter Ground lead 50 Q Through B9852CR B9852CS B9852CT terminator 700976 a Front cover clear type 700917 The following optional spare parts are available On receiving these optional spare parts make sure that all the items that you ordered have been supplied and that they are undamaged If you have any questions regarding optional spare parts or if you wish to place an order contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument Part Name
16. Half close the printer cover insert the end of the chart through the paper slot in the cover and then close it Push the cover firmly at the point marked until it clicks into place 10 2 IM 701530 01E 10 2 Printing Waveforms and Additional Information using the Optional Built in Printer Keys and Procedure Rotary knob ESC key r Soft keys X T I IL T CI C Y Y Y Pa Y Y J COPY MENU key SHIFT key lt gt keys 1 Press the SHIFT COPY MENU key to display the hardcopy setting menu 2 Press the PRNTER soft key to display the printout type selection menu Copy To Comment Keyboard PRNTR PLTR FILE GP IB ON Selecting additional information 3 Press the Info soft key to select OFF or ON Selecting the type of printout 4 Select from SHORT LONG or REAL If SHORT is selected read chapter 11 If REAL is selected refer to page 10 6 Info Type ON LONG REAL To TopMenu Long copy Setting the printing range 5 Press the LONG soft key and the Range soft key will appear The display will automatically show the pre zoom and expanded waveform T1 Cursor Info Type Range To 5
17. sseeeeeee 13 3 13 4 Formatting the Medla i niit ert or n Pt ent iota E Ee eite td 13 4 13 5 Saving and Loading Waveform Data sssssssssssssssseeseeeeeeeeneeeeneeneen ee 13 6 13 6 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters ssesssssssssseseeeeeeeeenee 13 11 13 7 Saving Screen Image Data siiin dn eec elo on poop Ede ets 13 13 13 8 Deleting and Protecting Saved Data sssssseeeeeeenen eene 13 17 13 9 Changing the SCSI ID Number on Models with the Internal Hard Disk 13 19 13 10Copying the Data Saved on the Internal Hard Disk option to the Floppy Disk 13 20 13 11 Connecting a PC to the DL1540CL C8 ssssssssssseseeeeee eene nnne 13 21 Chapter 14 Other Operations IN 14 1 Using a Trigger Output Signal 2 0 cece ceceeseceneeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeaeesseeeeaeeesaeeeaeeseaeseaeeseaeeeeeseas 14 1 14 2 Downloading Waveform Data to an AG Arbitrary Waveform Generator 14 2 14 3 Checking the System Condition ssssssssssseeeeeeenee eene nennen 14 3 14 4 Adjusting the Printer Density eese enmt nennen 14 4 AN 14 5 Using a Video Signal Output VIDEO OUT sess 14 5 14 6 Setting the Brightness of the LCD sssssseseseeeeeenneee nennen nennen nennt 14 6 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 15 1 Troubleshooting msna cce dte ete tice et
18. In case of AUTO 8 After having selected AUTO and after having selected the Auto Pen setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to display the setting frame 9 Use the rotary knob to set the number of pens Press the RESET key to return the default value Continue with step 10 In case of MANUAL 8 After having selected MANUAL use the rotary knob and the SELECT key to set the Grid Pen setting the TRACE1 Pen TRACE4 Pen setting and the LOAD1 Pen LOAD4 Pen setting 9 Use the rotary knob to set the pen numbers Press the RESET key to return the default value Closing the plotter setup menu 10 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting frame 11 Press the ESC key to close the setting menu Outputting to the external plotter 12 Press the COPY key Aborting the printing 13 After having performed step 12 press the COPY key again to abort the printing File Setup Paper Size A3 WAVE A3 SETUP REBaA4 SETUP A5 UpperWAVE A5 LowerWAVE AS UpperWAVE amp AS LowerSETUP L A5 UpperWAVE amp AS LowerMEASURE Pen Speed SLOW XY Mode LINE Pen Mode AUTO MANUAL Auto Pen Ce 10 8 IM 701530 01E 10 5 Printing Displayed Waveforms and Additional Information using an External Plotter Explanation Selecting the paper size The contents of printing printing size and printing location can be selected from the follow
19. eset oy E EN Comm p pm iis I enl r Soft keys S Setting the Brightness j 3 Press the LCD soft key I I Li i DataOut Scale SS LCD LE C 4 Use the rotary knob to select the desired density level Pressing aoe cux the RESET key results in displaying the default value MISC key Turning off the backlight 5 Press the LCD soft key to turn OFF the backlight Pressing any key turns the backlight ON again LCD LCD Off To ieee EXEC TopMenu Explanation Seiting the brightness of the LCD LCD Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the back light of the LCD Setting range 4 steps from 1 to 4 darkest 1 to brightest 4 Default setting 3 14 6 IM 701530 01E Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 15 1 Troubleshooting For corrective actions when a message appears on the display refer to Section 15 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions page 15 2 f maintenance service is required or if the instrument still does not operate even after the proper corrective action has been taken contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action Reference Page Connect the instrument to a source of the The source voltage is outside the rated range 3 3 The power does not correct voltage come ON Pietei Verify it the
20. keys Operating Procedure 1 Press the GO NO GO key to display the GO NO GO setting menu 2 Press the Mode soft key and select ON The GO NO GO top menu appears 3 Press the PRMTR soft key The default setting is ZONE T1 Cursor Mode GO NOGO Type T Range x OFF om ZONE T2 Setup EXEC 5 0 Ktiv The parameters which can be selected set at this setting consist of the following Determination range refer to page 9 8 Determination conditions such as parameter setup determination logic sequence determination and action after determination refer to page 9 9 9 10 Executing aborting determination after setting selecting the parameters refer to page 9 10 Setting the determination range 4 After having pressed the T Range soft key select either T1 or T2 to set either boudary of the determination range Then use the rotary knob to edit the boundary position You may also use the or keys Do this for both the left T1 and right side boundary T2 T1 cursor T2 cursor 1998 11 26 19 37 51 NORMPBOOKS s 2ms div Stopped q 2ms div H CHI ON H 50V div 10 1 f DC 0 0v y CH2 ON 50V div 10 1 DC 0 0v piu CH3 OFF 50V div 10 1 DC 0 0 CH4 ON 2N div 10 1 DC 0 00 Record Length Main 10K Zoom 10K Filter Smoothing OFF BW FULL Determination i range pe pmo Trigger FALTAR tee tee Type EDGE ka Source CH4
21. sseene 10 6 10 4 Connecting an External Plotter sesssesseeseeeeeeeeeneeenne ener nnne 10 7 10 5 Printing Displayed Waveforms and Additional Information using an External Plotter 10 8 10 6 Entering a Gomment eter ro e ted eei Debate tore rarus bte zt ied 10 10 10 7 Printing the Screen Image to an External Printer sssssssssses 10 11 10 IM 701530 01E Contents Chapter 11 Storing and Recalling Data from the Internal Memory 11 1 Storing and Recalling Displayed Waveforms cesceesceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeseeeeaeeseeeeeaeeeeaeeas 11 1 11 2 Storing and Recalling Setting Parameters esee 11 3 Chapter 12 Saving and Loading Data from a Flopply Disk 12 1 Floppy DISKS ni emo eiie e e ML ed EE ERR Leere 12 1 12 2 Formatting a Floppy Disk nene 12 2 12 3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data seen 12 4 12 4 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters ssssssseeeeeeeenen ne 12 9 12 5 Saving Screen Image Data sss enne neni 12 11 12 6 Deleting and Protecting Saved Data sssssssssseeeeeeeenen eene 12 14 Chapter 13 Saving and Loading Data from the SCSI Device or the Internal Hard Disk 1331 Connecting a SCSI Devices eite ORE UL Re HER 13 1 13 2 About the Internal Hard Disk for C8 option only 13 2 18 3 Selecting the SCSI Device or the Internal Hard Disk
22. 2 00 div for H1 2 00 div for H2 r 4 Sampling data Voltage measurement using vertical cursors When two voltage data maximum and minimum are displayed at the same time axis position moving a vertical cursor from left to right measures each datum in the order in which it was sampled The numbers indicate the order Pd in which the measurements are performed Time axis Vertical axis baaa ogee ba Points to note when performing cursor measurements The cursors and measured values will still be displayed even if a different menu is selected However the cursors cannot then be moved Cursor measured values will be cleared if the automated measurement function is turned ON However pressing the CURSOR key when Cursor is set to ON will display the cursor measured values If the GO NO GO Mode has been set to ON and the GO NOGO EXEC soft key has been pressed the cursor measurement function will not operate even if the CURSOR key is pressed To operate the cursor measurement function the GO NO GO Mode must be set to OFF In case the type selection menu is set to V T and a measured voltage value is interpolation data a will be displayed with the measurement item If measurement is not possible will be displayed When the type selection menu is set to V T ACQ measurements can be made only when the wavef
23. EH rave CH3 0 072V Trigger level 1 Selection of trigger condition CH3 CHI CH2 CH4 ee PASE Level ON x Dx Y HL av HOME page 6 10 Selection of trigger source state Selection of trigger conditions Time CH2 T Level Width Condition To GERIN PULSE gt T TIMEOUT TopMenu 9403us CHI ce CH3 CH4 o 000V Pulse width a Trigger level IM 701530 01E 6 1 6 2 Setting the Edge Trigger Keys and Procedure Rotary knob r Soft keys X X 1 Press the TYPE key to display the trigger type selection menu 2 Press the EDGE soft key OR PATTERN and WIDTH menus are optional Trigger Type WINDOW TY OR PATTERN WIDTH Selecting the trigger source and slope and setting the trigger level E mi 3 Press the LEVEL SOURCE key to display the trigger source selection menu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired trigger source The trigger slope selection menu appears When LINE is TYPE key LEVEL SOURCE key A N caution selected this menu will not be displayed and thus steps 5 to 11 are not necessary 5 Keep pressing the soft key corresponding to the selected trigger source until th
24. Repeat step 2 until all characters and symbols are entered Move the rotary knob to the ENT setting and press the SELECT key The file name comment and such will be set and the keyboard screen will be closed Ed ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YI meert Explanation caps A B c 0 E FJ te 8 1 H9 T LE 4 lt gt key ec MO FOUR EMU MMe v Ez seAct Je L JJ sd CIC C QJ G8 n GIG G9 83 8 C7 8 9 3 oec ms Displaying the keyboard to enter characters symbols For entry of a file name refer to 6 9 Setting the Action On Trigger page 6 15 9 1 Judging using a Waveform Zone page 9 1 9 2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform Parameters page 9 8 12 3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data page 12 4 13 5 Saving and Loading Waveform Data page 13 6 For entry of a comment refer to 10 6 Entering a Comment page 10 10 Function keys on the soft keyboard DEL Deletes the character or symbol left of the cursor in the character string INS Switches between insert and overwrite modes CAPS Switches between upper and lower case letters CLR Deletes all entered characters and symbols Has thus the same function as the RESET key on the front panel SPACE Enters one space ENT Confirms the entered characters and sy
25. sssssssesssseseeeeeeneneee nennen rennen nennen 7 18 Chapter 8 Analyzing Waveforms 8 1 Measuring a V T Waveform using Cursors sesseeneeeeneeneee nennen 8 1 8 2 Measuring an X Y Waveform using Cursors ssssssseseeeeeeeeeeenen eene 8 6 8 3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically se 8 8 8 4 Using the Linear Scaling Function seseeeeeeneneenenenen nnns 8 16 8 5 Performing Waveform Math Addition Subtraction and Multiplication 8 18 8 6 Displaying the Power Spectrum Performing FFT Computation eseeseesss 8 20 8 7 Measuring the Power Spectrum using Cursors ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeaeetaeeeaeesteeeeeeeeeeeeaees 8 21 Chapter9 Performing a GO NO GO Action 9 1 Judging using a Waveform Zone 0 ee eeeceeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeeseaeeeeeneeeeesaeeeseaeeeeeneeeeesaeeeneaeess 9 1 9 2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform Parameters sse 9 8 IN 9 3 Using the GO NO GO Signal Output Function essen 9 13 Chapter 10 Outputting Displayed Waveforms and Setting Parameters to the Printer Plotter 10 1 Loading a Chart in the Optional Built in Printer eeeen 10 1 10 2 Printing Waveforms and Additional Information using the Optional Built in Printer 10 3 10 3 Real time Printing using the Optional Built in Printer
26. C interface unit is optional Either interface enables you to send waveform data to a personal computer for analysis as well as to perform waveform measurement while controlling the instrument using an external controller Personal computer GP IB RS 232 C interface IM 701530 01E 1 22 Chapter 2 Name and Use of Each Part 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel Top View Front Panel Time axis setting knob Page 5 10 r Floppy disk drive Saving and loading of data from the floppy disk Colored LCD display Chapter 12 Description of display contents Page 2 6 r Rotary knob Used to enter setting values and selections r COMP signal output terminal A Outputs a phase correction signal for a probe Page 3 6 Front panel keys Description of each key Pages 2 3 to 2 5 Power switch Function grounding terminal Description of ON OFF operation Cs Used to connect the ground line to Page 3 4 phase correct a probe Input terminals Used to connect a probe Page 3 5 Rear Panel GP IB connector Used to connect an external plotter Connection method Page 10 7 For a description of communications functions refer to the Communication Interface User s Manual IM 701530 11E Trigger output terminal How to use the trigger output s
27. Power voltage 100 120 VAC 200 240 VAC Power cord D UL CSA Standards Power Cord Part No A1006WD Maximum Rated Voltage 125 V Maximum Rated Current 7 A VDE Standard Power Cord Part No A1009WD Maximum Rated Voltage 250 V Maximum Rated Current 10 A BS Standard Power Cord Part No A1054WD Maximum Rated Voltage 250 V Maximum Rated Current 10 A SAA Standard Power Cord Part No A1024WD Maximum Rated Voltage 240 V Maximum Rated Current 10 A Options B5 Built in printer real time printing function E1 FA With two additional 150 MHz probes 700998 Additional trigger OR Pattern Width F5 C bus analysis function C8 2 1 GB internal HDD N1 VGA output 1 F5 includes the enhanced trigger function for the DL1540CL 2 N1 and C8 cannot be specified simultaneously Example DL1540C UL CSA standard power cord and full options 701530 D B5 E1 F1 V1 NO Instrument No When contacting the dealer from which you purchased your instrument please quote the instrument No IM 701530 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories The following standard accessories are supplied with the instrument Make sure that all items are present and undamaged Power cord one of the following power cords is supplied according to the instrument s suffix codes UL CSA standard VDE standard BS standard SAA standard A1006WD A1009WD A1054WD A1024WD
28. SETUP fac Utility 4 Press the SAVE soft key to display the saving menu 5 Press the Type soft key to display the saving format menu Function ACQ Type FileName exec 19 LOAD BIN TopMenu 6 Select the saving format by selecting either BIN or ASCII MEM Anm Type unction x TOAD ASCI EXEC LP Press the FileName soft key to display the keyboard 8 Use the keyboard to enter the filename For details regarding the usage of the keyboard refer to page 4 8 9 Press the EXEC soft key to start saving Function ACQ Type FileName EXEC To LOAD BIN ABC TopMenu A 10 For DL1540CL if waveform data is too large to fit on the medium the unit will display the message shown below when the disk becomes full To continue the save Insert another formatted medium in to the drive select OK with the rotary knob and press the SELECT key The save will then continue on the new medium under the same filename as on the previous medium If you want to terminate the save instead select ABORT with the knob then press SELECT key lt lt ROTARY KNOB select SELECT key enter gt gt This media has become full All data could not be saved on this media In case you want to save all datainsert an other formatted media in the drive and select OK 13 7
29. 14 2 interpolation 0 cee eee ee ne neeeeeeeeeteeeaee 1 15 AT LVL 6 13 MODS osea orte ce rte ether eri tei heavier 5 10 ACCESSOTICS 3 SerisitiVity eere tre tte ne etd 8 18 accumulated waveform ssseee 1 16 7 13 displays eroe E ec e prre ee enit rece tee 2 6 acquisition distal valiezen n an b etn tie tre S 8 9 COUN sees 7 8 downloading seron rendere percer tete 14 2 MOJE etek nies DR 1 12 7 1 CTS ERE T 1 12 E starting stopplng rettet tinh 4 1 action on trigger ssseeeeenee 6 15 EXTACEAS attt e RR ORBE 5 8 atten atlon m rette ttr etre ee reete 5 4 autO SeL Up ii einig 1 20 4 2 entering auto levelmode ite eere e toits 1 10 Characters cececcccccccceccccccccccccececceuuuceceeseuuuuceeueueuuaseeeeueuas 4 8 auto moda i ieri ea ede t are ERE ees 1 10 6 13 Valil68 5 103 ESAE XA YUAN OR SA ES 4 7 automated measurements sssssssesee 1 18 ONVEIOPE MOda este ehate 1 12 7 1 averaging mode eee eee 1 12 7 1 erasing a waveform csescsecsessesesescesesceseseesesesteseseanesescanesees 4 5 error messages ient ee rin D LO 15 2 B expanded waveform cccccceeceeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 1 13 7 4 E i M M expansion rate eeeeesee ene eene eene nnne nnne 7 4 bandwidth MIS seres eeu Dies external clock dee c eee oae 5 9 base trace DRITTE UIT 9 6 e
30. 200 ns max 20 us min for low level 200 ns min for high level GO NO GO input output NO GO OUT GO OUT Connector type Output level Output logic Output Output timing Half pitch interface cable DDK DHA RB50 S132 Straight type 6 polar modular HIROSE TM3RA1 66 01 TTL Negative NO GO OUT signal GO OUT signal Refer to page 9 13 RGB video signal outoput RGB VIDEO OUT Connector type Output type D sub15 pin receptacle VGA compatible 1 The external trigger input terminal EXT TRIG IN is also used as the external clock input terminal EXT CLOCK IN For specifications of the external clock input refer to page 16 3 2 Applies to models other than the DL1540CL with the C8 option 3 Applies to the DL1540CL with the C8 option IM 701530 01E 16 5 suoneouioeds a 16 7 Communication Interface For details regarding the GP IB RS 232 C interface refer to the Communication Interface User s Manual IM 701530 11E GP IB Interface Item Interface Specifications GP IB Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE St d 488 1978 JIS C 1901 1987 Interface function SH1 AH1 T5 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DTO CO Protocol Conforms to IEEE St d 488 2 1987 Code ISO ASCII code Mode Addressable mode talk only mode Address setting Listener and talker addresses 0 to 30 are settable Remote mode clear
31. Displaying comments 4 Press the Comment soft key to select ON Pressing the soft key once again results in OFF and therefore comments will not be displayed Copy To Comment Keyboard PRNTR PLTR FILE GP IB OFF fy Number of characters which can be entered Up to 25 characters may be entered Displaying a comment The comment will appear above the waveform display frame as shown in the figure below Pee Comment 1998 11 20 18 44 28 NORM 1MS s Ims div ABCDEFGH JKLMNOPORS TUVWKY q 1ms div Lb bie Clearing the comment Press the EXEC soft key in the hardcopy setting menu or display another menu The comment will be cleared Points to note when entering a comment The displayed comment may overlap the messages which occur during waveform acquisition When you want to display the comment in such a case turn off data acquisition and set the Comment setting on the hardcopy setting menu to ON once again 10 10 IM 701530 01E 10 7 Printing the Screen Image to an External Printer Keys and Procedure 1 Press the SHIFT COPY MENU key to display the hardcopy setting menu 2 Press the GP IB soft key to display the external outp
32. Expanded Waveform page 7 4 Waveforms can be expanded in the time axis direction This function is useful when you want to change the T div setting after the waveform has been displayed in single mode or when you want to extend the acquisition time to observe a particular part of the waveform thoroughly As explained in Display of the time axis direction on page 1 5 the number of data points stored in the acquisition memory in normal display mode is greater than the number of display points 501 points stored in the time axis direction Hence the displayed waveform is P P compressed in the time axis direction In other words more than one waveform data value is displayed at same individual points IM 701530 01E 1 13 suonounJ 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions The zoom function described here reduces the compression ratio so as to enable observation of individual data points from acquisition memory The maximum selectable magnification rate depends on the displayed record length 10x zoom at 1 KW length 100x at 10 KW 1000x at 100 KW 5000x at 400 KW 10 000x at 1 MW and 25 000x at 2 MW Specifically the waveform can be zoomed until the number of displayed samples per division falls to 10 until the displayed record length for the full screen falls to 100 points If you zoom in such that the number of points per division is less than 50 an interpolation function will automatically supply interpolat
33. Horizontal position is moved to 4 div 1998711725 202817 topped Horizontal position is moved to 0 div m 0 div mo mariya nesta 2 amras a T w Horizontal position is moved to 4 div 1998711725 202850 Stopped Horizontal position is moved to 4 div m div MORMSIMS S 2ms7div tay 14 10 ses miyav Mappe t i Y Y yY Points to note The horizontal position cannot be changed while acquisition is in progress in the roll mode In order to move the horizontal position first stop the acquisition n all modes except the roll mode changing the horizontal position might result in cases where the displayed range exceeds the record length of the acquisition memory No waveform will be shown at that part of the displayed range Even when the horizontal position has been changed the zoom box will not change its position on the display Refer to page 7 4 5 12 IM 701530 01E Chapter6 Activating a Trigger 6 1 Relationship between Trigger Type and Trigger Source Slope Level Settings which can be made with the LEVEL SOURCE soft key or rotary knob menu vary as shown below according to the selected trigger type The setting procedure for each trigger type is described on the page indicated below LEVEL Sets the trigger source slope TYPE Selects the trigger type SOURCE eder P EDGE page 6 2 Selection of trigger source slope CH2 Li i CH1 n CH3 CH4
34. SuJJ0JOAeM Duiz euy B 8 3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically Explanation Waveforms which cannot be measured For waveforms which cannot be measured refer to page 8 2 Setting the measurement range Time range The measurement range is determined at the displayed time axis by the two vertical cursors T1 and T2 The position of cursor T1 indicates the starting point of measurement and the position of cursor T2 indicates the end point Automatic measurements will be carried on data within this range The default measurement range is 10div time axis Measurement items Item Setup Measurement items can be selected from 22 different types Items can be selected separately for each related waveform The default is no items selected A maximum of 24 items can be displayed at once on the waveform display This also includes the values of delay measurement The method of displaying the measurement values depends on the number of selected traces or loaded waveforms Refer to page 8 14 for more details The items which can be selected are as follows Measurement items related to the voltage axis When measuring items such as rise time and fall time High represents the voltage for the most frequently occurring high amplitude at 10096 level while Low represents the voltage for the most frequently occurring low amplitude at 0 level They are therefore different from Max and Min which just represent the ma
35. However if a delay time is set using the trigger delay the trigger position must be moved using the above operations since the delay point will not match the trigger point For more details on delays refer to the next page Move the trigger position to the right Trigger position T Trigger position x Delay time lt l Delay time m E d Trigger point Trigger point Points to note when setting the trigger position If the trigger position is changed while acquisition is not in progress i e while the START indicator is not lit the setting will not be valid until acquisition starts and the waveforms are updated The time measured by cursor measurement will change if the trigger position is changed because the trigger position is used as the reference position except when the roll mode is being displayed 6 18 IM 701530 01E 6 12 Setting the Trigger Delay Keys and Procedure Rotary knob 1 Press the POSITION DELAY key to display the delay time setting menu 2 Turn the rotary knob to set the desired delay time You can also use the lt or gt keys Delay Trigger Position To Trigger Knob 3 4div Odiy 4div POSITION ps POSITION DELAY key Explanation Setting the delay time The trigger del
36. MGroup1 MTraceNumber 1 Number of waveforms in this group MBlockNumber 3 Number of blocks in this group MTraceName Ch2 Waveform ID within group StartBlockNo 1 First block of saved data in group StartPointNo 1 Data start point in first block EndBlockNo 3 Last block of saved data in group EndPointNo 10024 Data end point in last block of group 1 Endian mode for storage becomes Big on DL1500 series Big Data for Motorola 68000 series Ltl Data for Intel 86 series 2 Binary file storage format becomes Trace on DL1500 series Trace Groups into blocks each block for a single waveform Block Groups into blocks each block for data sampled at the same time 8 Maximum number of blocks per group or repetitions in the case of single N trigger mode Maximum number of blocks applies if the number of blocks varies from waveform to waveform 4 Y axis conversion equation for each waveform Y axis value VResolution x Raw data VOffset 5 Data type ISn n byte signed integer BIN P P FS10 10 byte signed real number FLOAT 6 X axis conversion equation for each waveform X axis value HResolution X Data No 1 HOffset Binary Data The data and file structures vary according to the type of data to be saved Data structure Data other than averaging data 15 14 13 1211109 8 765 43 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Code Averaging data 15 14 13 1
37. Number of Image data files Points to note concerning formatting The following three directories are created automatically when a medium is formattedusing this instrument DL WAVE Directory for BIN binary waveform data DL SETUP Directory for SETUP setting parameters DL MISC Directory for P P and ASCII waveform data as well as HP GL PS Postscript TIFF and BMP screen image data There are cases when a medium which has been formatted with another equipment such as a PC can not be used If an error message appears when formatting has been completed the medium may be damaged Formatting the medium will erase all data on the disk Be careful Never turn OFF the SCSI device or remove the disk media such as a MO or a PD while the access indicator of the SCSI device is lit Otherwise damage to the SCSI device or the disk may result IM 701530 01E 13 5 ysiq pJed euJeiu eui Jo e91 8q ISOS 9y Woy eyeq Duipeo pue Bunes 13 5 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Keys and Procedure Rotary knob J x f T m Soft keys C3 CH key POSITION key INPUT key STORE RECALL FILE key START STOP key SHIFT key 1 Following the steps described in section 13 1 select the SCSI device or the internal
38. Pattern trigger option page 6 9 Multiple trigger sources are selected and a trigger is activated when all of the trigger conditions set for each trigger source become true or false Trigger conditions are established by setting combinations of the state High or Low of each trigger source Furthermore one of the trigger sources can be used as the clock signal and triggering is synchronized with this clock signal Example a trigger is activated when CH1 L CH2 L CH3 L and CH4 L Sep ea o dn e oue cun e cHiL H L lii n L cH2 L u t H v H v Hie CH3 L H L H CH4 L H L L Low level H High level Trigger is activated Width trigger option page 6 11 If the pulse width of a trigger source is narrower or wider than some specified time then a trigger is activated accordingly A trigger can also be activated by a single trigger source Trigger is activated IM 701530 01E 1 9 suonounJ 1 3 Setting a Trigger Trigger Mode page 6 13 Conditions for updating displayed waveforms are set The following six types of trigger mode are available Auto mode Displayed waveforms are updated each time a trigger is activated within a specified time approximately 100 ms referred to as the time out period and are updated automatically after each time out period Auto level mode Waveforms are displayed in the same way as in Auto mode if a trigg
39. Selecting the trigger mode The following six trigger modes are available The default is AUTO AUTO Auto mode Updates the displayed waveform each time a trigger is activated if the trigger condition has become true within the time out period of approximately 100 ms Updates the displayed waveform automatically if the trigger condition becomes false within the time out period The roll mode will be activated irrespective of the trigger condition if T div is set to a value greater than 50 ms However the roll mode will not be displayed when the history memory function is ON AT LVL Auto level mode Updates the displayed waveform in the same way as auto mode if the trigger condition has become true within the time out period If the trigger condition becomes false the trigger level is automatically set to the median of the amplitude of the trigger source and then the waveform is displayed Auto level mode is only valid however if the edge trigger has been selected as the trigger type Auto mode operations are carried out even if auto level mode has been selected for a trigger other than an edge trigger Furthermore roll mode will be activated irrespective of the trigger type if T div is set to a value greater than 50 ms However the roll mode will not be displayed when the history memory function ON NORMAL normal transmission mode Updates the displayed waveform only when the trigger condition becomes tr
40. ig ESC key E EN Comm p rator ne REN r Soft keys i id 3 Press the SELECT key to display the density setting frame EL 4 Use the rotary knob to select the desired density level Pressing l E the RESET key results in displaying the default value O 5 Press either the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the density setting frame MISC key CONFIGURATION Printer Density L Isolator OFF ON Explanation Seiting the printer density Printer Density This setting controls the printing density of hard copies on the built in printer Setting range 0 to 3 Default setting 1 Note When you press the soft key Config the setting menu for the isolator 700926 will appear as well For details regarding the isolator and its operation refer to the accessory user s manual of the isolator 14 4 IM 701530 01E 14 5 Using a Video Signal Output VIDEO OUT CAUTION VIDEO OUT terminal RGB VIDEO OUT VGA tr ooooo Specification 5 1 OOOOO O OO OOOOO 10 15 11 D Sub 15 pin receptacle Before connecting the monitor to the instrument be sure to turn OFF the power to both monitor and instrment Never short circuit the RGB VIDEO OUT terminal or apply an external voltage otherwise damage to the instrument may result The instrument s screen can be displayed on a monitor via this terminal Only a VGA monitor or a multi synchronous monitor which is capab
41. the loaded ACQ waveform will not be canceled even when you start data acquisition In this case the channel display appears in the left upper side of the screen CH1 CH1 Coupling Probe Invert ER Hold Offset AC GND trot on ON 0v 17 The way to display the ACQ waveforms and cancel them is exactly the same as for input signal waveforms For details refer to page 5 1 13 8 IM 701530 01E 13 5 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Explanation Auto naming function AutoFile If AutoFile has been set to ON a number 3 digits starting from 001 will be assigned to the waveform data automatically when the data is saved It is possible to insert a common file name up to five characters before the assigned number by specifying the file name using FileName Selecting the data format in which to save data Data Type The data format can be selected from the following P P Converts the displayed waveform data P P compressed data to binary data and saves it ACQ Converts the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory to either binary or ascii data and saves it BIN Converts to binary data ASCII Converts to ascii data Computed waveforms can only be saved in the P P format When in single N mode displayed P P data will be saved Saving the waveform data ACQ in ASCII data format while displaying the power spectrum FFT also saves the computed result of the power
42. 0 PULSE de select it Q Low G PERIOD BURST J INTEG2XY Copy To All Trace ALL CLEAR T2 To To Cursor Trace2 Trace3 Trace4 eae Forc 1 54div Switches between menus Loadi To To Load2 Load3 Load4 PrvMenu TopMenu 9 Repeat steps 5 to 12 in case you want to select measurement items for another trace or loaded waveform In case you want to select the same measurement items for all traces and loaded waveforms select Copy To All Trace using the rotary knob and press the SELECT key Returning to the top menu 10 Press the To Topmenu soft key to return to the automated measurement setting menu Setting the distal mesial proximal values The two levels which are used as the reference for the measurement of rise and fall times can be set For more details refer to the description on page 8 12 11 Press the Trace soft key to select measurement items for trace or loaded waveform 12 Press the Dpr Mode soft key to select or Unit 13 Use the rotary knob to select the Proximal Mesial or Distal setting and press the SELECT key to display the value setting box 14 Use the rotary knob to set the desired value Press the RESET key to restore the new value to the default value 15 Repeat steps 12 to 14 In case you want to select the same measurement items for all the Proximal Mesial or Distal settings Repeat steps 11 t
43. 1 The maximum value is 0 The latest data being 0 previous data are labeled 1 2 3 etc Points to note when using the sequential store function For more details on trigger modes refer to page 6 13 After the data is acquired the specified number of times all the waveforms will appear on the screen at once Data will not be acquired in case of the repetitive sampling mode If data acquisition is aborted while in progress only the waveforms which have been acquired so far will appear on the display Only the acquired waveforms can be selected at the Display Number setting The all single modes will be deacivated when the history memory function is turned ON Trigger mode cannot be set to single N mode if the selected record length is 400 KW 1 MW or 2 MW for DL1540CL only 7 8 IM 701530 01E 7 5 Using the History Memory Function 1 Press the HISTORY key to display the history memory ON OFF Keys and Procedure setting menu Rotary knob 2 Press the History soft key and select ON To select OFF press the History soft key again CLEAR TRACE key Display r Soft keys i i i Number i orr EN tamp EC 9 let E Displaying a waveform from the memory 3 Stop data acquisition by pressing the
44. 2 7 Kiv Measuring only voltage difference on the X axis using the vertical cursors 5 After step 4 has been completed press the AX soft key to display the cursor setting menu The vertical cursors will appear on the screen T1 Type Cursor Cursor Cursor x Y i FIC m T an zsa 6 After having pressed any of the T1 T2 or T1 amp T2 soft keys use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor T1 Cursor Cursor i i T2 Ti amp TZ Bai ad Measuring only voltage difference on the Y axis using the horizontal cursors 5 After step 4 has been completed press the AY soft key to display the cursor setting menu The horizontal cursors will appear on the screen Cursor Type OFF fig 2X T1 Type Cursor Cursor Cursor X Y i EIA m z wo TET zskiv 6 After having pressed any of the H1 H2 or H1 amp H2 soft keys use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor H1 Cursor Type OFF av Cursor Cursor t mimm H2 HI amp HZ 20i Channel assignment for the X Y axis X axis Input voltage of CH1 Y axis Input voltage of CH2 Waveforms which cannot be measured For waveforms which cannot be measured refer to page 8 3 8 6 IM 701530 01E 8 2 Measuring an X Y Waveform using Cursors Measuremen
45. 5 div 5 8 IM 701530 01E 5 7 Selecting the Timebase Points to note when sampling using an external clock The clock signal must be continuous No burst signal is allowed If the frequency of the clock signal is out of specification a warning message External Clock too slow or External Clock too fast will be displayed at the top of the screen When the internal clock is switched to the external clock no waveforms will be displayed until the clock conforms to the specifications Only real time sampling mode is available Envelope mode cannot be set Display of waveforms is not possible in roll mode No function to divide the clock signal is available Since the time axis setting cannot be changed expand the time axis if you want to change the display range For a description of expanding waveforms refer to page 7 4 Trigger delay setting is invalidated The time measured by the cursor measurement or automated measurement function is expressed in the number of pulses of the clock signal No unit is displayed IM 701530 01E 5 9 sexy ejuoziuop pue jeo eui Hues jo 5 8 Setting the Time Axis Keys and Procedure Turn the time axis setting knob to adjust the time axis setting The time axis setting value displayed in the lower right corner of the screen will change accordingly EE i I I
46. CH1 4 lt z EXT CLOCK IN JUL UL Internal timebase 1 4 IM 701530 01E 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Setting the time axis When using the internal clock set the time axis scale as a time duration per division of the grid T div The setting range is 2 ns div to 50 s div The time range in which waveform is displayed is time axis setting x 10 as the display range along the horizontal axis is 10 divisions 1divz500us 1div 1ms lt gt a 10div Note Display of time axis direction The sampled data is read into the acquisition memory and a waveform is displayed based on this data The number of data stored into the acquisition memory differs depending on settings Such as time axis settings trigger mode and acquisition mode The number of display points in the time axis direction on a 10 div screen is 501 points i e 50 points per division Thus the number of displayed points and record length might slightly differ and this will be treated as follows for more details on the relation between time axis trigger mode acquisition mode record length of acquisition memory and displayed record length refer to Appendix 2 When the record length is too long The data is displayed in the time axis direction after first being comp
47. E Trigger Trigger Pre trigger y Post trigger Pre trigger y Post trigger Acquisition 1 Duration during which the trigger output level is HIGH Consists of the pre trigger time and internal process time 2 us or longer 2 Duration during which the trigger output level is LOW Consists of the post trigger time and internal process time 2 us or longer 3 Repeat interval The minimum repeat interval for trigger output differs according to the selected mode Real time sampling mode Approx 17 ms Equivalent sampling mode Approx 10 us Single N mode Approx 300 us CAUTION Never apply an external voltage to the TRIG OUT terminal as damage to the instrument may result IM 701530 01E 14 1 suoneJedo 19410 BH 14 2 Downloading Waveform Data to an AG Arbitrary Waveform Generator Keys and Procedure m Soft keys Rotary knob 2 Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu Press the To NextMenu soft key Time Base Date Comm Time Infor mation Config To NextMenu 3 Presst he DataOut DataQut Scale Self LCD Test MISC key Explanation CH Range T2 EXEC To PrvMenu soft key
48. EXT LINE MU ue page 6 4 Center Window Condition Window Knob Level OUT WIDTH poy aes Center level es Selects trigger condition Width Window Condition Window Knob Level OUT CENTER M otav os Width LA page 6 5 Polarity selection Selection of broadcasting type NTSC Line NTSC Broadcasting Type Field To CH1 Polarity Level PAL HDTV 2x TopMenu 5 POSITIVE 0 85div ulla Selection of field No Line No Trigger level gt OR page 6 7 Selection of trigger source slope state CH4 CHI CH2 CH3 Level KY x Max Yx ay Trigger level 1 JeDBu e BuneAnoy PATTERN gt page 6 8 When activating a trigger by state pattern only Selection of trigger source state Select X ni Level CH2 CH3 CH4 Condtn CIKCH kar H L H L H L ENTER x O 010V Trigger level Selection of trigger condition CH2 CHI CH3 CH4 TER aT Level D xu x Ht Bae aoz2v When activating a trigger in synchronization with the clock signal Selection of the trigger slope of Selection of clock channel the clock channel CH3 CHI CH2 CH4 Condtn cCikcH gus DE xim v u L E rave CH3 Trigger level of clock channel Es Selection of trigger source state CH2 Level CH1 CH3 CH4 Condtn CIKCH I x We EJ
49. IM 701530 01E 10 7 Jenoj d 4e1uug eui 0 sJejeureje gd Hues pue suuojo eM pef ejdsiq Bumndino 10 5 Printing Displayed Waveforms and Additional Information using an External Plotter Keys and Procedure Rotary knob SELECT key ESC key r Soft keys C3 Y J C3 J ue OQ m COPY MENU key SHIFT key lt gt keys 1 Press the SHIFT COPY MENU key to display the hardcopy setting menu 2 Press the PLTR soft key Copy To Comment Keyboard PRNTR PLTR FILE GP IB ON 3 Press the Setup soft key to display the plotter setup menu Setup To TopMenu Selecting the paper size 4 After having selected the Paper Size setting using the rotary knob press the the SELECT key to select the desired paper size Selecting the pen speed 5 After having selected the Pen Speed setting using the rotary knob press the the SELECT key to select from NORMAL or SLOW Selecting the XY Mode 6 After having selected the XY Mode setting using the rotary knob press the the SELECT key to select from DOT or LINE Assigning pens 7T After having selected the Pen Mode setting using the rotary knob press the the SELECT key to select from AUTO or MANUAL
50. OFF Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record length rate record length rate record length T div S s word S s word S s word H 50s 5k 8div 2M 100M 2 5k x 2 1M x2 E 20s 10k 2M 100M 5k x2 1Mx2 3 10s 20k 2M 100M 10k x 2 1M x2 5s 50k 8div 2M 100M 25k x 2 1M x2 2s 100k 2M 100M 50k x 2 IM x2 T 1s 200k 2M 100M 100k x 2 1M x2 500ms 500k 8div 2M 100M 250k x 2 1M x 2 200ms 1M 2M 100M 500k x 2 1M x 2 100ms 2M 2M 100M 1M x 2 1Mx2 50ms 5M 8div 2M 100M 2 5M x 2 1M x 2 UIT A epee erential ERT ET tomm x2 i2 10ms length 2MW is selected 20M 2M 100M 10M x 2 1M x 2 5ms 50M 8div 2M 100M 10M x 2 400K x 2 8div 2ms 100M 2M 1ms 200M 2M 500us 200M 1M 2001s 200M 400K 100us 200M 200K 50us 200M 100K Changes to normal mode 20us mum Ak sisi sate Pa ae mode 10us 200M 20K 5us 200M 10K 2us 200M 4K ius 200M 2K 500ns 200M 1K 200ns 200M 400 100ns 200M 200 1 The displayed record length and acquisition memory record length are equivalent 2 The sample rate given in for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at 100MS s and having taken the minimum and maximum values 3 In the envelope mode the minimum maximum values are displayed in a pair 4 Regardless of the Rep setting repetitive sampling is not used with 2MW maximum displayable record length A Rep setting of ON is ineffective App 10 IM 701530 01E Appendix 4 Ho
51. Only 100 KW of this length can appear on the screen at any given time But the waveform s horizontal position can be shifted as necessary to enable viewing over the entire 200 KW record see page 1 7 High record length settings are useful for monitoring repetitive long period signals and rapid sustained single pulse signals But note that the three highest settings 400 KW 1 MW and 2 MW involve various operational restrictions For details about these restrictions refer to Section 7 1 For details of the record length refer to Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Input Filter page 7 3 Smoothing The smoothing function enables the instrument to ignore small fluctuations in rapidly changing waveform data so that the overall characteristic of the data can be understood The function acts as a low pass filter A weighted moving average value is obtained for each set of five points of sampled data then the result is displayed as a waveform This process is useful when you want to eliminate low levels of noise on input signals Furthermore smoothing is performed on the data stored in the acquisition memory thus it can still be performed after acquisition has stopped allowing the elimination of noise on single shot signals F G BCDE A Input signal o E o gt Time Smoothing i data o a b o E gt Time Bandwidth limit High frequency noise of 20 MHz or higher can be eliminated from the input signal
52. Press the SHIFT STORE RECALL FILE key to display the data save load menu Turning ON OFF the auto naming function 2 Press the AutoFile soft key to select ON or OFF For more details concerning this function refer to the explanation later on Saving P P waveform data 3 Press the P P soft key to display the save load setting menu and a list of files Data Type AutoFile x P P ACQ SETUP o Utility Press the SAVE soft key to display the saving menu 5 Press the Source soft key to display the source waveform setting menu Function P P Source LOAD TRACE 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the waveform to be saved Source TRACES TRACE4 ALL gt FileName EXEC To TopMenu live IRACE2 OP Tl eee 7 Press the FileName soft key to display the keyboard 8 Use the keyboard to enter the filename For details regarding the usage of the keyboard refer to page 4 8 9 Press the EXEC soft key to start saving Function P P Source LOAD TRACE FileName ABC EXEC To TopMenu Loading P P waveform data 10 Press the LOAD soft key to display the loading menu 11 Press the Destn soft key to display the destination setting menu Function P P Destn To uA oo E EXEC TopMenu 12 Press the soft key corresponding to the destination of t
53. Waveforms which cannot be measured using cursors The following waveforms are excluded from measurements using cursors Snapshot waveform Accumulated waveforms other than the most recent one Waveforms other than those which are specified by Display Number and displayed by Display Trace using the sequential store or history memory function Selecting the measurement waveform Trace When V T or AV has been selected at the type selection menu the following can be selected at the trace menu The menu is divided into two menus which can be reached using the PrevMenu and NextMenu soft keys 1 4 Measurements will only be performed on the selected trace LOAD1 4 Measurements will only be performed on the selected loaded waveform ALL in case of V T only Measurements will be performed on all traces and loaded waveforms Measurement items The following items can be measured Using vertical cursors to measure time difference frequency voltage voltage difference V T In all cases excluding ALL T1 Time difference between position of cursor T1 and trigger position T2 Time difference between position of cursor T2 and trigger position AT Time difference between positions of cursors T1 and T2 1 DT Reciprocal of DT frequency V1 X Voltage at the position where the waveform intersects cursor T1 V2 X Voltage at the position where the waveform intersects cursor T2 AV X V2 V1 X indicates the wave
54. connect the protective grounding before connecting to measurement or control unit 6 IM 701530 01E How to Use this Manual Structure of the Manual This User s Manual consists of 16 chapters an Appendix and an Index as described below Chapter Title Description 1 Functions Describes measurement principles and functions Although this section does not give a description of the operating methods it will help you to understand the basic operations 2 Name and Use of Gives the name of each part and describes how to use it Each Part The corresponding reference pages for panel keys and the rotary knobs are also given 3 Before Starting Describes points to watch during use and describes how to Observation and install the instrument connect the power cord turn the Measurement of power switch ON OFF and connect probes as well as how to Waveforms set the date and time 4 Common Describes the operations used to make settings such as Operations start stop acquisition auto set up and initialization of each setting as well as operations such as snapshot clear trace and calibration that are used frequently during operation 5 Setting the Vertical Describes how to turn channels ON OFF how to make and Horizontal settings such as input coupling probe attenuation and Axes vertical sensitivity that are related to the vertical axis voltage axis as well as how t
55. directory Data size Approximately 10 K bytes are used for each set of setting parameters However if GO NO GO zone waveforms are included approximately 4 K bytes extra are required for each zone waveform Checking the free space on a medium Refer to page 13 5 for a description of this procedure Entering a file name The following points must be kept in mind when entering a file name Afile name must always be specified Upto eight characters can be entered All the characters on the keyboard can be used However the following file names cannot be used due to MS DOS restrictions AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK The same name cannot be assigned to different data files of the same data type Overwrite inhibit Points to note when saving loading setting parameters Setting parameters can be saved even if acquisition is in progress i e while the START indicator is lit Once the loaded setting parameters have been canceled the original setting parameters cannot be restored If the extension of the setting parameter file is changed using a personal computer it will be impossible to load the data CAUTION Never turn OFF the SCSI device or remove the disk media such as a MO or a PD while the access indicator of the SCSI device is lit Otherwise damage to the SCSI device or the disk may result 13 12 IM 701530 01E 13 7 Saving Screen Image Data Keys and Procedure Rotary knob SELECT key RESET key E
56. for an input signal changes according to the time axis setting as described hereafter For T div settings in the range between 5 us div and 100 ns div it is possible to switch real time sampling area to repetitive sampling area But for DL1540CL note that the time axis range over which this feature is actually available will vary according to the maximum displayable record length as shown in Appendix 3 50s div to 100 ns div Real time sampling mode When changing the time axis settings the sample rate will change and sampling can be performed at a sample rate of maximum 200 MS s or 100 MS s when ch 3 and 4 are also used The input signal is sampled sequentially and data is stored in the acquisition memory In this mode the waveform can only be displayed correctly at frequencies up to half the sample rate due to Nyquist s theorem Sample rate is expressed in S s number of samples per second Thus this mode is suitable for observation of a waveform which fluctuates more slowly than the sample rate f the sample rate is later than the frequency of the input signal high frequency components will be lost In this case a phenomenon in which high frequency components change to lower frequency components occurs due to Nyquist s theorem This phenomenon is called aliasing Aliasing signal Input signal Sampling point 50 ns div to 5 ns div Repetitive sampling mode If T div is set so that the sample rate exceeds 200
57. or OFF DISPLAY DISPLAY MEX FORM key Graticule Scale Marker Wavelnfo Inten atl ct FRAME OFF BOY Koga on o ZR 767 SHIFT key Explanation Graticule The graticule type can be selected from the following two types The default is GRID FRAME GRID Scale The cross type scale shown below can be turned ON or OFF The default is ON Scale ON Scale OFF Marker The marker shown below can be turned ON or OFF The default is OFF 7 16 IM 701530 01E 7 11 Turning the Waveform Information Display ON OFF Keys and Procedure 1 Press the SHIFT DISPLAY DISPLAY FORM key to display the display condition setting menu 2 Press the Wave Info soft key and select either ON or OFF r Soft keys x MESSEN EEN ort FN ed ow e E zn J gt N J M OQ DISPLAY DISPLAY FORM key A SHIFT key Explanation T Selecting the waveform information display ON OFF The information display can be selected ON or OFF The default is ON OFF Displays only the time axis setting acquisition mode and sample rate This is useful if the displayed waveform information prevents observation of other waveforms
58. 01E Appendix 3 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length for DL1540L When Maximum Displayable Record Length is set to 1MW Selection of 1MW length is not available if T div is set between 50ns and 5ns or if trigger mode is other than single Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active At Least One of CH3 CH4 is ON CH3 CH4 are Both OFF When core Mode Rep ON or OFF Rep ON or OFF Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed i rate record length rate record length rate record length T div S s word S s word S s word I 50s 2k 1M 2k 1M 100M 1k x 2 500Kx2 8 20s 5k 1M 5k 1M 100M 2 5k x 2 500K x 2 E 10s 10k 1M 10k 1M 100M 5k x 2 500K x 2 3 5s 20k 1M 20k 1M 100M 10k x 2 500K x 2 E 2s 50k 1M 50k 1M 100M 25k x 2 500K x 2 E 1s 100k 1M 100k 1M 100M 50k x 2 500K x 2 500ms 200k 1M 200k 1M 100M 100k x 2 500K x 2 200ms 500k 1M 500k 1M 100M 250k x 2 500K x 2 100ms 1M 1M 1M 1M 100M 500k x 2 500K x 2 50ms 2M 1M 2M 1M 100M 1M x 2 500K x 2 20ms 5M 1M 5M 1M 100M 2 5M x 2 500K x 2 10ms 10M 1M 10M 1M 100M BM x 2 500K x 2 5ms 20M 1M 20M 1M 100M 10M x 2 500K x 2 2ms 50M 1M 50M 1M 100M 10M x 2 200K x 2 1ms 100M 1M 100M 1M 500us 100M 500K 200M 1M 200us 100M 200K 200M 400K 100us 100M 100K 200M 200K 50us 100M 50K 20
59. 1 When a probe other than 1 MQ probe for example a 50 probe is to be used connect a through type 50 Q terminator for impedance matching 2 When placing an order for the 50 Q terminator as the one supplied with the instrument quote the number 700976 Setting the probe attenuation Follow the operating procedure given in Section 5 3 Setting the Probe Attenuation page 5 4 so that the probe s attenuation matches the one displayed below Probe in the soft key menu which appears when the INPUT key is pressed If they do not match measured values cannot be read correctly IM 701530 01E 3 5 SUJJOJOAEM JO 1ueueJnsee y pue uoneAJesqo Punes eJojeg B 3 6 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction A Gu Never apply an external voltage to the COMP terminal as damage to the instrument may result Operating Procedure Explanation 1 Turn ON the power switch 2 Connect the probe to the input terminal to which the signal is to be applied 3 Touch the probe s tip against the CAL output terminal and connect the grounding wire to the grounding function terminal 4 Press the AUTO SETUP key 5 Press the AUTOSET EXEC soft key The phase correction signal is displayed on the screen 6 Insert a screwdriver into the trimmer adjusting hole in the probe and turn the trimmer so that the displayed waveform becomes square CAL signal output terminal Grounding function terminal Reason for probe compe
60. 10 4 data Else e coe Lect a oss 12 15 13 18 history memory eene enne 1 15 7 9 date time setting anini Eeee eieaa 3 7 holdzoff ES EEAS EET 1 11 default Settings oie tete renes 4 4 hold off trig eoe eere repe ed e ree gut 6 20 delay horizontal position 1 7 5 12 measurement rere 8 10 IM 701530 01E Index 1 H ii precautions printer LN Rercepere eiecti etd eb seconde 5 8 printer density isisisi en erede 14 4 image data etant cedet 12 11 13 13 printing information eseseeeeeeeene 7 17 10 4 14 3 real time rtr n ee ne 1 21 10 6 initialization oerte rein 1 20 4 4 WavelfOorms terret terrere ntis 10 3 10 8 input coupling iren rrt rnnt mnis 1 2 5 2 probe inp t filler c creer teer enne 1 13 7 3 attenuation eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennernennennne 1 2 3 5 5 4 installation eee aee 3 2 COMMOCUIG esee tees EES 3 5 AMNES TENDIT RR 1 17 7 18 phasecorTectiOn de eee epe en 3 6 InterpolatiOn oce eterne 1 15 7 12 protecting PAPAE EEES 12 14 13 17 inverted waveform ssssssseeeneme 1 3 5 5 proximal IT 8 9 K R keyboard sssssseeeeeneneeenneneenenennnnennennnnnnnenes 4 8 ROM Versio ceci sion Ree tta 14 3 real time printing eeeseeeeeeeeeene 1 21 10 6 L real time sampling mode seseeeeee 1 6 LINE rear p
61. 16 02 54 070 16 02 54 090 16 02 55 011 16 02 53 031 16 02 54 051 16 02 54 071 16 02 54 091 16 02 55 012 16 02 53 032 16 02 54 052 16 02 54 072 16 02 54 092 16 02 55 013 16 02 53 033 16 02 54 053 16 02 54 073 16 02 54 093 16 02 55 014 16 02 53 034 16 02 54 054 16 02 54 074 16 02 54 094 16 02 55 015 16 02 53 035 16 02 54 055 16 02 54 075 16 02 54 095 16 02 55 016 16 02 53 036 16 02 54 056 16 02 54 076 16 02 54 096 16 02 55 017 16 02 53 037 16 02 54 057 16 02 54 077 16 02 54 097 16 02 55 018 16 02 53 038 16 02 54 058 16 02 54 078 16 02 54 098 16 02 55 019 16 02 53 039 16 02 54 059 16 02 54 079 16 02 54 099 16 02 55 7 Press the SELECT key The list will disappear and the selected waveform will appear on the screen Displaying all waveforms 8 Continuing from step 3 4 or 7 press the ALL Disp EXEC soft key Display History Time All Disp acad OFF Stamp EXEC IM 701530 01E 7 9 suonipuoo e dsiq pue uonisinboy Buibueuo 7 5 Using the History Memory Function Explanation Number of waveforms in the history memory Acquisition memory retains waveforms for the last N triggers where N is equivalent to the maximum number of iterations that can be stored under sequential store operation The record length per waveform on a given channel is the same as that for sequential store mode For details refer to page 7 8 Once the history has become fu
62. 1K 200k 1K 200k 1K 100M 100k x 2 500 x 2 200us 500k 1K 500k 1K 500k 1K 500k 1K 100M 250k x 2 500 x 2 100us 1M 1K 1M 1K 1M 1K 1M 1K 100M 500k x 2 500 x 2 50us 2M 1K 2M 1K 2M 1K 2M 1K 100M 1M x 2 500 x2 20us 5M 1K 5M 1K 5M 1K 5M 1K 100M 2 5M x 2 500 x 2 10us 10M 1K 10M 1K 10M 1K 10M 1K 100M 5M x 2 500 x2 5us 20M 1K 20M 1K 20M 1K 20M 1K 100M 10M x 2 500 x 2 2us 50M 1K 50M 1K 50M 1K 50M 1K 100M 10M x 2 200 x 2 ius 100M 1K 100M 1K 100M 1K 100M 1K 500ns 100M 500 200ns 100M 200 Changes to normal mode 100 even when envelope mode has been set 1 The displayed record length given in refers to the record length stored in the acquisition memory Only when the trigger mode is auto or auto level data of a record length given in is stored In case where no value in is given the displayed record length and the record length stored in the acquisition memory are the same 2 The sample rate given in for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at 100MS s and having taken the minimum and maximum values 3 In the envelope mode the minimum maximum values are displayed in a pair 4 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling mode is active IM 701530 01E App 5 xipueddy H Appendix 3_ Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length for DL1540L When Maximum Displayable Record Length is set to 10KW Rep Repetitive samplin
63. 1to31 Second 00 to 59 Note The date and time are backed up by the built in lithium battery Leap years are provided Turn the rotary knob to select SET and press the SELECT key to judge IM 701530 01E 3 7 SUJJOJOAEM JO 1ueuJeJnsee y pue uoneAJesqo Punes eJojeg B Chapter4 Common Operations 4 1 Starting and Stopping Acquisition Keys and Procedure 1 Press the START STOP key to start stop waveform acquisitioning 2 In case the indicator located at the upper left of the START STOP key is lit waveform acquisition is in progress 3 In case the indicator located at the upper left of the START STOP key is not lit waveform acquisition is not in progress In E the upper left corner of the screen Stopped appears START STOP key Explanation Operation when averaging mode is selected as the acquisition mode Averaging stops when acquisition is stopped and resumes when acquisition is restarted Operation during display of accumulated waveforms Accumulated display stops temporarily when acquisition is stopped When measurement is restarted the accumulated display is reset and accumulation starts The START STOP key is not operative in the following cases When remote state is active i e the REMOTE indicator is lit When a short or long copy is being output to the
64. 20k 10K 20K 20k 10K 20K 20k 10K 20K 100M 10k x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 20ms 50k 10K 50k 10K 50k 10K 50k 10K 100M 25k x 2 5K x 2 10ms 100k 10K 100k 10K 100k 10K 100k 10K 100M 50k x 2 5K x 2 5ms 200k 10K 200k 10K 200k 10K 200k 10K 100M 100k x 2 5K x 2 2ms 500k 10K 500k 10K 500k 10K 500k 10K 100M 250k x 2 5K x 2 ims 1M 10K 1M 10K 1M 10K 1M 10K 100M 500k x 2 5K x 2 500us 2M 10K 2M 10K 2M 10K 2M 10K 100M 1M x 2 5K x2 200us 5M 10K 5M 10K 5M 10K 5M 10K 100M 2 5M x 2 5K x 2 100us 10M 10K 10M 10K 10M 10K 10M 10K 100M 5M x 2 5K x2 50us 20M 10K 20M 10K 20M 10K 20M 10K 100M 10M x 2 5K x 2 20us 50M 10K 50M 10K 50M 10K 50M 10K 100M 10M x 2 2K x 2 10us 100M 10K 100M 10K 100M 10K 100M 10K Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set The displayed record length given in refers to the record length stored in the acquisition memory Only when the trigger mode is auto or auto level data of a record length given in is stored In case where no value in is given the displayed record length and the record length stored in the acquisition memory are the same 2 100MS s and having taken the minimum and maximum values 3 4 In the envelope mode the minimum maximum values are displayed in a pair For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling mode is active The sample rate given in for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled
65. 2us 50M 1K x 100 50M 1Kx100 100M 10M x 2 200 x 2x 100 ius 100M 1K x 100 100M 1K x 100 500ns 100M 500x100 200M 1Kx 100 St cur ud maze 200ns 100M 200x100 200M 400 x 100 has been set 100ns 100M 100x100 200M 200 x 100 1 The displayed record length given in refers to the record length stored in the acquisition memory 2 3 4 Only when the trigger mode is auto or auto level data of a record length given in is stored In case where no value in is given the displayed record length and the record length stored in the acquisition memory are the same The sample rate given in for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at 100MS s and having taken the minimum and maximum values In the envelope mode the minimum maximum values are displayed in a pair The displayed record length x100 shows the number of repeated waveform acquisition out of 100 in the single N mode or hysterisys function App 4 IM 701530 01E Appendix 3 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length for DL1540CL Displayed record length varies according to the time axis setting as omdicated below When Maximum Displayable Record Length is set to 1KW Rep Repetitive sampling mode When
66. 4 Turn the rotary knob to set the desired sensitivity i X V DIV key Explanation CH1 CH1 V DIV kr CAL Setting the range and probe attenuation The V div setting range varies depending on the attenuation of the probe used as shown below Probe attenuation Setting range 1 1 1 mV to 5 V div 10 1 10 mV to 50 V div 100 1 100 mV to 500 V div 1000 1 1 V to 5000 V div V div can be set in multiples of 1 2 and 5 e g 1 V div gt 2 V div gt 5 V div Variable mode When Variable is highlighted V div can be set in fine steps as shown below CAL Setting value Variable Setting range Setting step 10 mV 5 0 mV to 20 0 mV 0 1 mV 20mV 10 0 mV to 50 0 mV 0 1 mV 50 mV 20 0 mV to 100 0 mV 0 1 mV 100 mV 50 mV to 200 mV 1mV 200 mV 100 mV to 500 mV 1mV 500 mV 200 mV to 1000 mV 1mV 1V 0 5 V to 2 00 V 0 01 V 2V 1 00 V to 5 00 V 0 01 V 5V 2 00 V to 10 00 V 0 01 V 10 V 5 0 V to 20 0 V 0 1 V 20 V 10 0 V to 50 0 V 0 1 V 50 V 20 0 V to 100 0 V 0 1 V The above values are given for a probe attenuation of 10 1 They will be 1 10 of the value shown when the attenuation is 1 1 10 times the value shown when it is 100 1 and 100 times the value shown when it is 1000 1 Note _____ If the RESET key is pressed to reset V div setting V div will be set to the maximum possible level For a description of how to set the probe attenuation refer to page 5 4 5 6 IM 701530 01E
67. 401 dots vertical to wide mode at 601 dots horizontal X 401 dots vertical Display Interpolation page 7 12 This instrument displays waveforms at 50 dots per division in both the vertical and horizontal axis directions as shown below However if the dots corresponding to the sampled data are not contiguous the instrument will interpolate between them The interpolation method can be selected from the following Dots are also called pixels and are the smallest units used to construct waveforms and characters on the screen Line interpolation Current waveform display Display Number 0 Any former waveform display display number is selectable in the range 1 to 99 Interpolates between two dots using a straight line Sine interpolation Generates interpolation data using the function sin X X then interpolates between two dots using resulting sine curve Sine interpolation is suitable for observation of sine waves IM 701530 01E 1 15 suonounJ 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Pulse interpolation Draws a horizontal line to the time axis position of the next data point then interpolates between the two dots by drawing a vertical line from the next data point No interpolation Draws only a horizontal line to the time axis position of the next dat point Accumulated Waveform Display page 7 13 The time that old wavef
68. 8 11 Measurement starts when the Mode setting is set ON The default setting is OFF The trigger slope can be either f or t and is selected at the Edge Polarity setting The default setting is The number of times the trigger is activated is set at the Edge Count setting and can be set from 1 to 9 The default setting is 1 The voltage level at which triggering occurs is set at the Threshold Level setting and can be selected from Volts or The default setting is 0 0000 V This volts setting range is the voltage value corresponding to 8 div The setting step is 0 04 div can be set to a percentage of 0 to 100 where 100 corresponds to the amplitude of HIGH LOW The setting step is 1 96 The measurement values will be displayed as Dly Points to note relating to automated measurement The cursors and measured values will still be displayed even if a different menu is selected However the cursors cannot then be moved Values gathered by the automated measurement function will be cleared if the cursor measurement function is turned ON However pressing the MEASURE key when Measure is set to ON will display the automatically measured values If the GO NO GO Mode has been set to ON and the GO NOGO EXEC soft key has been pressed the automated measurement function will not operate even if the MEASURE key is pressed To operate the automated measurement function the
69. A D converter becomes impossible thereby resulting in a discontinuous waveform as shown on the right Coe a ee da ee ae ee ee guia i I I i A Position range Display area 16divisions 8 divisions Y T Ecce E pee OE N co aye DNA me Time Axis pages 5 8 and 5 10 Selection of the timebase With the default settings sampling timing is controlled by the clock signal output from the timebase circuit of the instrument refer to the Block Diagram page 1 1 The sampling timing can be controlled by an external clock signal instead of the clock signal from the timebase circuit For DL1540C DL1540CL an external clock signal can be input to the CLOCK IN terminal on the rear panel or to the CH4 input terminal When an external clock is input to the CLOCK IN terminal the clock must be of TTL level however up to four waveforms can be observed at the same time On the other hand if an external clock is input to the input terminal the clock can be of the same signal level normal input signals This also allows you to check the clock signal waveform before observing the desired waveform This external clock function is useful when you are observing a signal whose period varies or when you are observing a waveform by synchronizing it with the clock signal to be measured AID
70. C STORE RECALL FILE key SHIFT key 1 Following the steps described in section 13 1 select the SCSI device or the internal hard disk as the media Media Data Type AutoFile E scsi P P Aca SETUP Eag ow Utility 2 Press the Utility soft key to display the utility selection menu List Exec Func Format Disk To Aca Protect Delete Info TopMenu 3 Press the Format soft key to display the format selection menu Formatting 4 After having selected OK using the rotary knob press SELECT key When formatting is complete the message Execution completed appears Canceling 4 After having selected CANCEL using the rotary knob press the SELECT key lt lt ROTARY KNOB select SELECT key enter gt gt Are you sure 13 4 IM 701530 01E 13 4 Formatting the Media Explanation CAUTION Checking the format If the media has already been formatted select Disk Info after step 2 on the previous page and the following information will be displayed If the media has not been formatted or if it has been formatted in uncorrect format the error message Storage media is defective will be displayed Type of disk Total disk space Used disk space Available on disk Number of Setup data files Number of P P data files Number of ACQ bin data files Number of ACQ ascii data files
71. CHI ON 5 UmV div 10 1 _ pe 0000Y CH2 OFF 200mV div 10 1 bc Q 000V CH3 OFF U I div 10 4 DC O UUY CH4 OFF Widiv 10 1 Dc 0 00 ESC P ESC P2 oe pem Format 8 PCLS LIPS Recard Length Main 10K Zoom 1K IM 701530 01E 10 13 JOYO 4 J9 UU eui 0 sJejeurejeg Hues pue suuojo eM pefejdsiq Bumndino Chapter 11 Storing and Recalling Data from the Internal Memory 11 1 Storing and Recalling Displayed Waveforms 1 P he STORE RECALL k isplay th Keys and Procedure ress t e STORE REC ey to display the data type selection menu Rotary knob 2 Press the Wave soft key to display the store recall setting menu Data Type WAVE SETUP m Soft keys Ea Storing a waveform ees 3 Press the STORE soft key to display the waveform store setting menu The default setting is STORE LL Function WAVE I RECALL Destn MEM itt Source TRACEt EXEC To TopMenu 4 Press the Source soft key to display the source selection CH key menu POSITION key STORE RECALL key 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the trace No to be stored Source cR EIAN TRACE2 TRACES TRACEA To STORE REA D TopMenu 6 Press the Destn
72. GO NO GO Mode must be set to OFF IM 701530 01E 8 13 SUJJOJOAeM Duiz euy BH 8 3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically If measurement is not possible will be displayed If two or more periods of the waveform lie within the measuring range the first period will be measured Automated measurement is also possible for expanded waveforms When switching the display to show the expanded waveform the position of the cursor on the screen does not change When both the pre zoom and the expanded waveform are displayed automated measurement will be performed on the expanded waveform Automated measurement is not synchronized with the update of the displayed waveform Hence the displayed waveform may not match the measured values To make the displayed waveform match the automatic measurements stop acquisition When using waveform computations the displayed unit will become div for waveforms obtained by addition subtraction and V2 for waveforms obtained by multiplication Time is measured based on the T div value set for the input signal waveform Thus be careful if the T div set for a loaded or recalled waveform does not match the T div for the input signal waveform Only the measurement items INTEG1XY and INTEG2XY can be displayed in case of the X Y display and T Y amp X Y display Display Example of measurement values The number and type of measurement items which can be displaye
73. GO NO GO or acquisition on trigger only the first four will be valid For details regarding the characters which can be used refer to page 4 8 The same name cannot be assigned to different data files of the same data type Overwrite inhibit However restarting the GO NO GO determination or acquisition on trigger function will result in overwriting the old files Points to note when saving loading waveform data Acquisition stops when saving or loading is started Only waveform data located within 5 12 div of the center of the waveform display frame is saved Thus if the saved waveform exceeds this range vertically the part exceeding this range will not be displayed if the waveform is subsequently loaded and scrolled vertically For DL1540CL medias having less than 20K free capacity cannot be used for ACQ waveform data saves When ACQ data is loaded the setting parameters will change to their values at the timeof saving f P P data is loaded expansion of the waveform and waveform computation are not possible f the extension of the waveform data file is changed using a personal computer it will be impossible to load the data As for ACQ data only BIN data will be loaded For more details regarding the display of the waveform information while displaying loaded P P waveform or ACQ waveform data refer to page 7 15 Never turn OFF the SCSI device or remove the disk media such as a MO or
74. IL O77 I J Time axis setting knob Explanation Time axis setting range T div can be set within the range of 5 ns div to 50 s div in multiples of 1 2 and 5 The relationship between sampling mode and display mode Sampling mode and display mode change as follows according to the T div setting For a detailed description of sampling mode and display mode refer to page 1 5 and 1 6 If maximum displayable record length is set to 1 K DL1540CL Time axis setting Sampling mode Display mode 1 50 s to 50 ms div Real time Roll mode 20 ms to 1 u s div Real time Update mode 500 ns to 100 ns div Real time repetitive 2 Update mode 50 ns to 5 ns div Repetitive Update mode If maximum displayable record length is set to 10 K or 100 K DL1540CL or when DL1540C is used Time axis setting Sampling mode Display mode 1 50 s to 50 ms div Real time Roll mode 20 ms to 10 p s div Real time Update mode 5 us to 100 ns div Real time repetitive 2 Update mode 50 ns to 5 ns div Repetitive Update mode If maximum displayable record length is set to 400 K available only if trigger mode is single DL1540CL Time axis setting Sampling mode Display mode 1 50 s to 200 ms div Real time Roll mode 100 ms to 100 ns div Real time Update mode If maximum displayable record length is set to 1 M available only if trigger mode is single DL1540CL Time axis setting Sampling mode Display mode 1 50 s
75. In order to perform these operations it is necessary to set Mode at the GO NO GO top menu to OFF after having pressed the ABORT soft key Initialization of the settings Automated measurements Auto set up Changing of expansion settings Cursor measurements Display of an X Y waveform Action on trigger A zone waveform is not displayed if the following conditions are not satisfied after the zone waveform has been created Mode at the GO NO GO top menu ON GO NO GO Type ZONE Mode for selected trace ON Display for selected trace ON corresponding LED is lit During the time in which an action is being executed after GO NO GO determination no waveform data will be acquired Note The zone waveform generated can be retained by saving the set up data on a floppy disk However Mode at the GO NO GO top menu must be set to ON and GO NO GO Type to ZONE For a description of how to save set up data on a floppy disk refer to 12 4 Saving and Loading Set up Data page 12 7 IM 701530 01E 9 7 uorov OD ON OD Buruuoped 9 2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform Parameters Relevant Keys Rotary knob SELECT key RESET key 4 ESC key r Soft keys rJ f j j Y f pz Tu QO O JE GO NO GO key
76. L also moves with the waveform when the waveform is moved Ground level mark Trace No Note e M Waveforms can still be moved vertically if acquisition is in progress However if some parts of the waveform exceed 10 24 divisions before acquisition is stopped those parts will remain at the end of the display frame even if the waveform is moved If a waveform is moved vertically out of the waveform display frame measured values obtained during automated measurement or cursor measurement may not be accurate IM 701530 01E 5 7 sexy ejuoziuop pue jeo eui Buas jo 5 7 Selecting the Timebase Keys and Procedure 1 Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu notary nog 2 Press the Time Base soft key to display the timebase setting menu Time Comm Date Infor Config To Soft keys co Base Time mation NextMenu J 2 3 Select the required timebase by pressing the corresponding soft DEA key INT EXT CH4 Topi LLL LLLA LL 4 In case you selected EXT IN or EXT CH4 use the rotary MISC key knob to set the required threshold level Time Base To fee INT EXT IN TopMenu i Explanation N CAUTION Selectable Timebases Timebase can
77. No starting from 0001 is assigned to each waveform data automatically when the data is saved on a floppy disk a SCSI device or the internal hard disk When saving the screen image data set the image data format You can set the format at the hard copy selection menu that appears by pressing the SHIFT COPY MENU key see page 12 11 It is possible to insert a common file name character string consisting of up to four characters before the assigned file No for instance TRGO0001 The entered file name is reset when ABORT is selected Points to note when using the action on trigger When you change the trigger mode to any other than the single short mode or single mode the trigger on action will be aborted e Itis not possible to perform auto set up or GO NO GO determination while the action on trigger is in progress When the action on trigger starts the trigger mode will change automatically to the single short mode or single mode Even after canceling the action on trigger the previous trigger mode will not be restored When the action on trigger is restarted EXEC after first being aborted ABORT the automatically assigned file No will start from 0001 Previous saved data will therefore be overwritten For DL1540CL note that under FD ACQ action ACQ data record length may in some cases be too long to be saved onto a single floppy disk In this case the screen will display an error mess
78. ON the power switch of this instrument When turning OFF the power reverse the order Action When Power is Switched ON Calibration correction of the ground level and gain etc starts automatically when the power switch is turned ON Front panel keys are not operative during calibration which lasts approximately seven seconds When calibration has been completed the normal waveform display screen will appear NOTO i os If calibration does not start when the power switch is turned ON or if the normal waveform display screen does not appear check the following points Check that the power cord is plugged in properly Check that the correct voltage is being supplied from the AC outlet Refer to page 3 3 Check that the fuse is not blown Refer to page 15 7 If the power switch is turned ON while the INITIALIZE key is pressed all settings will be reset to the factory settings For details refer to Section 4 3 Initializing Settings page 4 4 If there is still no power even after the above points have been checked contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual For Accurate Observation and Measurement Turn the power switches ON and allow the unit to warm up for approximately 30 minutes Just before starting observation measurement perform calibration The ground level and gain etc will be corrected For a description of the c
79. Part No Minimum Q ty Remarks 150 MHz probe 700998 1 Input impedance 10 MO Length 1 5 m 10 1 1 1 selectable Roll chart B9850NX 5 Thermo sensible paper Total length 30 m Power supply fuse A1351EF 2 Time lag 3 15 A 250 V Note It is recommended that the packing box be kept in a safe place The box can be used when you need to transport the instrument somewhere IM 701530 01E Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class instrument provided with terminal for protective grounding The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired Also YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on this instrument To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to an explanation in the User s Manual or Service manual 4L Function Grounding Terminal This terminals shold not be used as a Protective grounding terminal MNO Alternating current ON power O OFF power L In position of a bistable push control Out position of a bistable push control IM 701530 01E Safety Precaustions WARNING Power Supply Ensure the source voltage matches the voltage of
80. S SGL L N SGL as the trigger mode or history mode while averaging mode is active For DL1540CL It is not possible to set SINGLE N SGL as the trigger mode or history mode while averaging mode 6 13 14 7 9 is active 805 For DL1540C It is not possible to set averaging mode while SGL S SGL L N SGL as the trigger mode or history mode is active For DL1540CL It is not possible to set averaging mode while SINGLE N SGL as the trigger mode or history mode is active 7 2 806 Itis not possible to turn ON the smoothing function in Envelope mode 7 8 807 Itis not possible to set Envelope mode while smoothing function is turned ON 7 2 808 Itis not possible to edit a zone waveform during dual display X Y waveform display FFT waveform display or during loading recalling a waveform 9 6 7 809 The operation is not possible in GO NO GO zone type 810 The trace to be edited is not currently displayed 9 6 811 Zone data does not exist 9 2 7 812 Itis not possible to set FFT mode in Envelope mode 8 20 813 Itis not possible to set Envelope mode in FFT mode 7 2 814 Itis not possible to set FFT mode within the repetitive sampling range 8 20 815 It is not possible to set the repetitive sampling range in FFT mode 7 1 816 For DL1540C It is not possible to set history mode in SGL S SGL L N SGL as the trigger mode For DL1540CL It is not possible to set history mode in SINGLE N SGL as the trigger mode 7 9 817 For DL1540C It is not
81. START STOP key has been pressed acquisition is performed the specified number of times The waveforms will be displayed after acquisition stops If the START STOP key is pressed again before acquisition has been completed the specified number of times acquisition stops immediately In this case all the waveform data which has been acquired thus far is valid and can be displayed This trigger mode can only be used in real time sampling mode For setting the number of repetitions refer to page 7 7 Points to note when setting the trigger mode If single short mode or single mode is selected with a T div setting which enables repetitive time sampling mode acquisition will stop after it has been repeated the specified number times If trigger mode is changed while acquisition is stopped i e while the START indicator is not lit acquisition starts automatically If acquisition is interrupted in single N mode only the waveforms which have been acquired completely are displayed If the history memory function is set ON or if the acquisition mode is set to averaging all single mode triggering cannot be done If single long mode or single N mode is selected repetitive sampling cannot be done When the record length maximum displayable record length is 400 K 1 MW 2 MW for DL1540CL single mode is the only mode available 6 14 IM 701530 01E 6 9 Setting the Action On Trigger Keys and Procedure 1 Press the SHIFT MODE
82. Waveform Parameters Seiting action after determination 18 After having selected the Action setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select the desired action After a NO GO determination the data can be recorded in the following manners NONE PRINT FD P P FD ACQ Buzzer FD IMAGE SCSI IMAGE SCSI P P SCSI ACQ HD IMAGE HD P P HD ACQ No action A hardcopy of the screen will be printed out on the built in printer All waveforms displayed on the screen will be saved to the floppy disk as P P compressed data Acquisition data of all waveforms displayed on the screen will be saved to the floppy disk as binary data Sounds the buzzer Saves the current screen image data to the floppy disk Saves the current screen image data to the SCSI device Saves the entire displayed waveform P P compressed data to the SCSI device Saves the acquisition data binary data of the entire displayed waveform to the SCSI device Saves the current screen image data to the internal hard disk Saves all the displayed waveforms as P P compressed data to the internal hard disk Saves all the displayed acquisition data binary data to the internal hard disk 1 You need to be using a model with the internal hard disk DL1540CL C8 option or the SCSI interface unit 700930 sold s
83. When the conditions of waveform acquisition are changed the history memory function will be reset and previous waveform data will be lost The history memory function cannot be switched on if the selected record length is 400 KW 1 MW or 2 MW for DL1540CL only 7 10 IM 701530 01E 7 6 Changing the area for displaying the waveform Keys and Procedure 1 Press the DISPLAY key to display the setting menu 2 Press the Wide Scrn soft key and select either ON or OFF Intrpl x Y Accumu Wide Scrn SINE OFF OFF OFF m Soft keys E d I DISPLAY key Explanation The information display can be selected ON or OFF The default is OFF OFF The area for displaying the waveform becomes normal mode at 501 dots horizontal X 401 dots vertical ON The area for displaying the waveform becomes wide mode at 601 dots horizontal X 401 dots vertical Display when the Wide screen mode is set to ON 1998 11 20 15 24 09 NORM 500kS s 2ms div Stopped q 2ms div CH1 50V CH2 50V i CH4 2V DC 30 1 DC 19 1 P DC 104 aE TUL MUL JL Intrpl x Accumu Wide Scrn SINE OFF OFF OFF NOIG ee aM aM Mi When the wide screen mode is turned ON the area for displaying the waveform changes from the normal size o
84. a PD while the access indicator of the SCSI device is lit Otherwise damage to the SCSI device or the disk may result 13 10 IM 701530 01E 13 6 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters Keys and Procedure r Soft keys Rotary knob STORE RECALL FILE key SHIFT key 1 Following the steps described in section 13 1 select the SCSI device or the internal hard disk as the media Turning ON OFF the auto naming function 2 Press the AutoFile soft key to select ON or OFF For more details concerning this function refer to the explanation later on Saving setting parameters 3 Press the SETUP soft key to display the save load setting menu and a list of files Media Data Type AutoFile SCSI P P Aca SETUP GG on Utility 4 Press the SAVE soft key to display the saving menu Function SETUP FileName To LOAD EXEC TopMenu 5 Press the FileName soft key to display the keyboard 6 Use the keyboard to enter the filename For details regarding the usage of the keyboard refer to page 4 8 7 Press the EXEC soft key to start saving Function SETUP FileName ype TO EDAD ccc TopMenu Loading setting parameters 8 Press the SETUP soft key to display the save load se
85. a list of files Data Type AutoFile P P ACQ SETUP Gad on Uv 4 Press the SAVE soft key to display the saving menu 5 Press the Type soft key to display the saving format menu Function ACQ Type FileName Exec TO LOAD BIN TopMenu 6 Select the saving format by selecting either BIN or ASCH Type Function ACQ To SAVE a NI PEC Topmenu Press the FileName soft key to display the keyboard 8 Use the keyboard to enter the filename For details regarding the usage of the keyboard refer to page 4 8 9 Press the EXEC soft key to start saving Function ACQ Type FileName To LOAD BIN vwx TopMenu 10 For DL1540CL if waveform data is to large to fit on the floppy disk the unit will display the message shown below when the disk becomes full To continue the save Insert another formatted disk into the drive select OK with the rotary knob and press the SELECT key The save will then continue on the new disk under the same filename as on the previous disk If you want to terminate the save instead select ABORT with the knob then press SELECT key N EXEC lt lt ROTARY KNOB select SELECT key enter gt gt This floppy disc has become full All data could not be sayed on this disc In case you want to save all data insert an other formatted floppy in th
86. acquisition memory Furthermore since the vertical cursor is on the actual data moving the horizontal position moves the cursor along with the waveform Specified resolution sample rate T1 Time difference between the position of cursor T1 and the trigger position T2 Time difference between the position of cursor T2 and the trigger position AT Time difference between the positions of cursors T1 and T2 1 AT Reciprocal of DT frequency V1 X Voltage at the position where the waveform intersects cursor T1 V2 X Voltage at the position where the waveform intersects cursor T2 AV X V2 V1 X indicates the waveform under measurement For example trace 1 is shown as 1 Loaded waveforms cannot be measured using V T ACQ measurement Using vertical cursors phase cursor to measure the phase difference Degree D1 Phase angle of cursor D1 with respect to cursor R1 ne Cursor D2 Phase angle of cursor D2 with respect to cursor R1 Phase angle m defined by Base Val AD Phase difference between the positions of cursors R1 R2 Base Val D1 and D2 R1 Cursor indicating phase angle of 0 R2 Cursor position indicating the phase angle defined with Base Val You can select from 180 360 540 or 720 D2 cursor Cursor movement method The cursors can be selected as follows Time measurement cursor vertical T1 Moves cursor T1 only T2 Moves cursor T2 only T1 amp T2 Moves both cursors T1 and T2 simultaneously with
87. as the terminal for an external clock and selecting the signal as the trigger source For the specifications of the terminal refer to When EXT IN is selected in section 5 7 If a clock signal exceeding the above permissible maximum input voltage is input to the each terminal damage to the internal circuits of the instrument may result The trigger slope must be selected from 1 and f 1 in the same way when one of the channels CH1 to CH4 is selected The trigger level must be either 0 15 V or 1 5 V EXT range is 1 V 1 V to 1 V in steps of 4 mV EXT range is 10 V 10 V to 10 V in steps of 40 mV 6 2 IM 701530 01E 6 2 Setting the Edge Trigger LINE Line trigger Select this when the signal to be displayed is synchronized with the frequency of the commercial power source 50 Hz 60 Hz and you want to select the commercial power source voltage signal as the trigger source signal Points to note when setting the edge trigger If the trigger type setting is changed the edge trigger setting will be invalidated However selecting the edge trigger will restore the previous edge trigger setting If the trigger mode is not auto level mode the trigger level will not change once it has been set Thus changing the amplitude of the trigger signal or changing the offset may invalidate the trigger level thereby hindering activation of a trigger Conversely if the trigger mode is auto level mode the
88. at App 6 IM 701530 01E Appendix 3 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length for DL1540L When Maximum Displayable Record Length is set to 100KW Rep Repetitive sampling mode 1 When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active At Least One of CH3 CH4 is ON CH3 CH4 are Both OFF Wien nyo ope Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate recordlength rate recordlength rate recordlength rate record length rate record length T div S s word S s word S s word S s word S s word 50s 200 100K 200K 200 100K 200K 200 100K 200K 200 100K 200K 100M 100 x 2 50K x 2 100K x 2 20s 500 100K 200K 500 100K 200K 500 100K 200K 500 100K 200K 100M 250 x 2 50K x 2 100K x 2 10s 1k 100K 200K 1k 100K 200K 1k 100K 200K 1k 100K 200K 100M 500 x 2 50K x 2 100K x 2 amp 5s 2k 100K 200K 2k 100K 200K 2k 100K 200K 2k 100K 200K 100M 1k x 2 50K x 2 100K x 2 FA 2s 5k 100K 200K 5k 100K 200K 5k 100K 200K 5k 100K 200K 100M 2 5k x 2 50K x 2 100K x 2 3 1s 10k 100K 200K 10k 100K 200K 10k 100K 200K 10k 100K 200K 100M 5k x 2 50K x 2 100K x 2 500ms 20k 100K 200K 20k 100K 200K 20k 100K 200K 20k 100K 200K 100M 10k x 2
89. be selected from the following three types INT Internal clock signal EXTIN Clock signal input to the EXT TRIG IN EXT CLOCK IN terminal EXT CHA Clock signal input to the CH4 input terminal When EXT IN is selected Input a clock signal to the EXT TRIG IN EXT CLOCK IN terminal on the rear panel EXT TRIG terminal on the front panel The clock signal must conform to the specifications given below Input terminal LY Example Item Specifications DL1540 DL1540L Connector type BNC EXT CLOCK IN Maximum input voltage 6 V EXT TRIG INA Frequency range 40 Hz to 15 MHz B Input level TTL CMOS level recommended 0 3 Vp p or greater when measured at the end of the connector 0 15 V or greater relative to the threshold level Input impedance Approx 1 MQ Threshold level 1 5 V or 0 15 V Minimum pulse width 25 ns or more for both High and Low levels If a clock signal exceeding the maximum input voltage is input to the each terminal damage to the internal circuits of the instrument may result When EXT CH4 is selected Input a clock signal to the CH4 input terminal on the front panel The clock signal must conform to the specifications given below Item Specifications Frequency range 40 Hz to 80 MHz Input level 2 div p p or higher Input impedance 1 MQ Minimum pulse width 5 ns or more for both High and Low levels Threshold level setting range for detection of edge Voltage equivalent to
90. built in printer When the floppy disk is being accessed e g when data is being saved to it If acquisition is in progress access to the floppy disk starts after acquisition is stopped When calibration auto set up or initialization is in progress Operation in combination with external clock When the external clock is being used and you start acquisition the error messages Ext clock too slow or Ext clock too fast might appear Note ____W9H9 _ _O If the START STOP key is pressed to start acquisition while acquisition data ACQ data loaded from a floppy are being displayed the acquisition data will disappear from the screen It is possible to retain the waveform on screen by stopping acquisition only for the channel corresponding to the trace No of the waveform For a description of this operation refer to page 12 6 For details regarding the external clock settings refer to page 5 8 IM 701530 01E 4 1 suoneJedo UOWWOD B 4 2 Displaying Waveforms using the Auto Set up Function Keys and Procedure 1 Press the AUTO SETUP key to display the auto set up execution menu AUTO SETUP key Executing auto set up Soft keys 2 Press the AUTOSET EXEC soft key to perform auto set up E T Channels will be turned ON OFF automatically depending on 3 2 whether input is applied or not Ss A Canceling auto set up 3 Press the UNDO soft key to restore the previous settings
91. by multiplication In case engineering units have been set by the linear scaling function the first three characters of the unit setting will appear on the screen Time is measured based on the T div value set for the input signal waveform Thus be careful if the T div set for a loaded or recalled waveform does not match the T div for the input signal waveform IM 701530 01E 8 5 SUJJOJOAeM Duiz euy BH 8 2 Measuring an X Y Waveform using Cursors Keys and Procedure Rotary knob m Soft keys zs x I T O D CURSOR key lt gt keys Explanation Display both the T Y and the X Y waveform in the same display Press the CURSOR key to display the cursor measurement setting menu Press the Cursor soft key and select ON 4 Press the Type soft key to display the measurement type selection menu N p T Cursor cae T2 TI amp T2 25ikiv Measuring time difference voltage using the X Y cursors 5 Press the X Y soft key The X Y cursors will appear on the screen Cursor Type OFF fig ax T1 Type Cursor Cursor Cursor X Y i FIC VL T mM zsa 6 Use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the X Y cursor x Y Cursor Cursor Type i OFF Ee x
92. c eo xd eet eet td ees 15 1 15 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions sssssssssseeeeeeeeeneneeeneeennen nene 15 2 15 3 Self TeSE uei hs he UE EUER Pc od es ee ee ced 15 6 15 4 Replacing the Power Supply Fuse sssssssssseseeeeeeeeenene nennen nennen nenne 15 7 15 5 Recommended Parts for Replacement sseene 15 8 Chapter 16 Specifications 16 1 Input Section x ier ree re ee dd e p c eee e edo etn 16 1 16 2 Trigger Sections nocere Hen dome d iere de E ER cs 16 2 16 3 Ime AXIS 2 3 2 IC a n RECUERDE UE EN ee ae RUE 16 3 16 4 Display i3 ede d b ae en Eee ait eeilom nt tiens 16 3 16 5 Eunctlors 2 2 5 EID ERES TAA ditadtemuibneuims 16 4 16 6 Rear Panel Input Output Section ssessessesseseeeseeenene enne nnne tne nnne 16 5 16 7 Gommunication Iriterface 5 2 5 opere eain e diete emis ua 16 6 16 8 Builtiri Printer optional rh pd pin tete reb tei eee aie feras 16 7 16 9 Built in Floppy Disk Drive nte ema tte eet Dite iere 16 7 16 10Internal Hard Disk for C8 option sseseeeseeeeenennneennenneeennen nennen nenne 16 7 16 11 General Specifications nres ipe cep re D bete intei t P Ee tr Sena 16 8 16 12External Dimensions 2 reiner rmt gei dre ERE te CER Du Ron eet sp Terri ia 16 10 IM 701530 01E 11 Contents Appendix Index Appendix 1 Menu Map eic on ein ited eterne tiet tes ore pg i deeds App 1
93. data VPlusOverData Upper limit of error data VMinusOverData Lower limit of error data VillegalData 32768 If any stored value in the binary data of any waveform matches this value the data is illegal VMaxData 32736 Maximum value of binary data for each waveform VMinData 32736 Minimum value of binary data for each waveform HResolution 1 00000e 06 Resolution co efficient of X axis conversion equation for each waveform 6 HOffset 1 00000e 03 Offset co efficient of X axis conversion equation for each waveform 6 HUnit S Units used for X axis for each waveform no effect on data Date 95 12 01 The date when the trigger was activated Time 01 18 54 Time when the trigger was activated Privatelnfo Information particular to model ModelVersion 1 01 Version No of the model MathBlockNo Block No of block to be computed FormMath1 Contents of Math1 DisplayPointNo 9 Display start point the position from the beginning of the block TriggerPointNo 300 Trigger point the position from the measurement start point PhaseShift 100 Phase shift number of data points The following data is applicable to the DL1540CL only Medialnfo MediaNo 1 Sequential number of divided save MGroupNumber 1 Number of groups in this medium MTraceTotalNumber 1 Number of waveforms in this medium App 12 IM 701530 01E Appendix 5 Output Data Format used when Saving Waveform Data Example DL1540CL
94. files Number of Image data files 12 2 12 2 Formatting a Floppy Disk CAUTION Points to note concerning formatting The following three directories are created automatically when a floppy disk is formatted using this instrument DL WAVE Directory for BIN binary waveform data DL SETUP Directory for SETUP setting parameters DL MISC Directory for P P and ASCII waveform data as well as HP GL PS Postscript TIFF and BMP screen image data Floppy disks formatted in a format other than those specified on the previous page cannot be used If an error message appears when formatting has been completed the floppy disk may be damaged Formatting the floppy disk will erase all data on the disk Be careful Never remove the floppy disk while the access indicator of the floppy disk drive is lit or damage to the magnetic head of the drive or loss of data on the floppy disk may result IM 701530 01E 12 3 ysiq Ajddoj4 wo eyeq Buipeo pue Bui es RI 12 3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Keys and Procedure Rotary knob r Soft keys J x n J I C I Y Y J C I CH key POSITION key INPUT key J STORE RECALL FILE key START STOP key SHIFT key 1
95. following types can be selected SINGLE Stops determination when a NO GO determination is made CONTINUE Carries out determination repeatedly until the ABORT soft key is pressed Seiting action after determination 29 After having selected the Action setting on the condition setup menu press the SELECT key to select the desired action After a NO GO determination the data can be recorded in the following manners NONE No action PRINT A hardcopy of the screen will be printed out on the built in printer FD P P All waveforms displayed on the screen will be saved to the floppy disk as P P compressed data FD ACQ Acquisition data of all waveforms displayed on the screen will be saved to the floppy disk as binary data Buzzer Sounds the buzzer FD IMAGE Saves the current screen image data to the floppy disk SCSI IMAGE Saves the current screen image data to the SCSI device SCSI P P Saves the entire displayed waveform P P compressed data to the SCSI device SCSI ACQ Saves the acquisition data binary data of the entire displayed waveform to the SCSI device HD IMAGE Saves the current screen image data to the internal hard disk HD P P Saves all the displayed waveforms as P P compressed data to the internal hard disk HD ACQ Saves all the displayed acquisition data binary data to the internal hard disk 1 You need
96. for T1 and 2 50 div for T2 Points to note when performing cursor measurements The cursors and measured values will still be displayed even if a different menu is selected However the cursors cannot then be moved Cursor measured values will be cleared if the automated measurement function is turned ON However pressing the CURSOR key when Cursor is set to ON will display the cursor measured values f the GO NO GO Mode has been set to ON and the GO NOGO EXEC soft key has been pressed the cursor measurement function will not operate even if the CURSOR key is pressed To operate the cursor measurement function the GO NO GO Mode must be set to OFF If measurement is not possible will be displayed Cursor measurement is also possible for expanded waveforms When switching the display to show the expanded waveform the position of the cursor on the Screen does not change When both the pre zoom and the expanded waveform are displayed cursor measurement will be performed on the expanded waveform There might be cases where the displayed waveform is not in synchronization with the measurement values To synchronize stop data acquistion IM 701530 01E 8 21 SUJJOJOAeM Duiz euy B Chapter9 Performing a GO NO GO Action 9 1 Judging using a Waveform Zone Relevant Keys Rotary knob
97. frictional heat Do not allow chemicals or oil to come into contact with the roll chart otherwise color development or loss of information may result The chart paper might show some discoloration due to friction after the instrument is moved with the roll paper installed Therefore it is recommended to remove and re install the chart paper before moving IM 701530 01E 10 1 Jenoj d 4e1uug eui 0 sJejeureje gd Hues pue suuojoA eM pef ejdsiq Bumndino 10 1 Loading a Chart in the Optional Built in Printer Push the printer cover firmly at the point of the push a mark The cover springs open allowing you to open it Loading Procedure I There is a release arm located at the upper right side Viewing it from the angle as in the figure move it from left to right Hold the chart so that the end of the chart faces away from you and then place the roll in the provided space as shown in the figure Insert the end of the roll into the gap beneath the black guides so that the chart protrudes approximately 10 cm from above the guides The paper can be inserted easily after cutting off both corners of the end of the paper Rotate the chart to make sure that it is properly aligned and stretched out then secure the chart paper by sliding the release arm back into its old position If the release arm is not put back in its old position an error message will be displayed when printing is performed
98. fuse is blown check the cause use is blown and replace the fuse 15 7 DP While holding down the INITIALIZE key Nothing is displayed Instrument is faulty 3 4 turn ON the power Display appears abnormal Instrument is faulty Reset the instrument to its factory settings 4 4 The phase of the waveform k The phase shift is set Set the phase shift to 0 div 8 18 of CH2 is shifted Instrument is in remote mode Press the LOCAL key to activate local mode Keys do not function While holding down the INITIALIZE key Other causes turn ON the power No trigger is caused Trigger settings are incorrect Make correct trigger settings for the input signal Chapter 6 BS Allow instrument to warm up for at least Insufficient warm up time 30 minutes after the power is turned ON No calibration has been performed Perform calibration 4 6 Measured values are The probe has not been calibrated Calibrate the probe 3 6 abnormal Incorrect probe attenuation Set the correct attenuation 5 4 Offset voltage is in use Set the offset voltage to 0 5 2 Waveform inversion is ON Turn waveform inversion OFF 5 5 No oe is output tothe Printer head is damaged or worn out Maintenance service is required internal printer The type or format of printer do not match Match the type and format of printer No data is output to the The printer is not set to the on line Set to the on line mode external printer The printer cable is not connect
99. hard disk as the media Turning ON OFF the auto naming function 2 Press the AutoFile soft key to select ON or OFF For more details concerning this function refer to the explanation later on Saving P P waveform data 3 Press the P P soft key to display the save load setting menu and a list of files Media Data Type AutoFile P P ACQ SETUP ON SCSI Utility gt Press the SAVE soft key to display the saving menu 5 Press the Source soft key to display the source waveform setting menu Function P P Source FileName EXEC To LOAD TRACE t TopMenu 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the waveform to be saved Source RA TRACE2 TRACES TRACE4 ALL TUPIVICTIU I Functio 2 Press the FileName soft key to display the keyboard 8 Use the keyboard to enter the filename For details regarding the usage of the keyboard refer to page 4 8 9 Press the EXEC soft key to start saving Function P P Source LOAD TRACEt Loading P P waveform data 10 Press the LOAD soft key to display the loading menu 11 Press the Destn soft key to display the destination setting menu Function P P Destn SAVE LOADt 12 Press the soft key corresponding to the destination of the waveform to be loaded Destination Function P P LOAD2 LOAD3 LOAD4 SAVE mem 13 Use
100. having selected the Auto Pen setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to display the setting frame 14 Use the rotary knob to set the number of pens Press the RESET key to return the default value 15 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting frame Continue with step 18 IM 701530 01E 13 13 ysiq pJ H euJeiu eui Jo e91 eq ISOS 9y w014 eyeq Duipeo pue Burnes 13 7 Saving Screen Image Data Explanation 16 After having selected MANUAL use the rotary knob and the SELECT key to select the Grid Pen setting the TRACE1 Pen TRACE4 Pen setting and the LOAD1 Pen LOAD4 Pen setting 17 Use the rotary knob to set the pen numbers Press the RESET key to return the default value 18 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting frame 19 Repeat steps 16 to 18 to set other items of the MANUAL setting 20 Press the ESC key to close the setting menu Selecting the image color with TIFF or BMP only 20 Press the Color soft key to display the image color selection menu Position Format FileName AutoFile Color Compress To 0 00 TIFF OFF OFF ON TopMenu O0j iv 21 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired image color For details regarding the explanation of the image color Position Color Format FileName GRAY HALF FULL 0 00 kiiv TIFF ort aE OP TT Data compression with TI
101. i re 3 Press the Trace soft key to display the trace selection menu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the trace you want to O measure E l Trace lt m FFT i I X I c X Y J OFF ON 2 3 4 EY MATH FFT key Selecting the time window 3 After step 2 has been completed press the RECT or the HANNING soft key to select the time window SHIFT key Selecting the display format 3 After step 2 has been completed press the VT amp FFT or the FFT soft key to select the display format FFT Trace Window Display OFF t RECT Hr FT Explanation Waveforms on which FFT computation can be performed The upper and lower limits of FFT computation can be performed on any one trace selectable from trace 1 to the power spectrum display trace 4 take on fixed values depending on the vertical sensitivity S i electing the time window V div as shown in the figure g below They are not displayed The time window can be selected from the following window types on the screen RECT rectangular window ind Useful for transient signals which attenuate completely within the time mI window value HANNING Useful for signals which are continuous and not periodical Lower limit FFT frequency band valus Maximum 50 MHz
102. in PostScript format on a PostScript printer However if the PostScript data is used in a file created by DTP application software the waveform image will probably not appear on the computer s screen Instead a gray box indicating the size of the image will probably appear CAUTION Never turn OFF the SCSI device or remove the disk media such as a MO or a PD while the access indicator of the SCSI device is lit Otherwise damage to the SCSI device or the disk may result 1 3 1 6 IM 701530 01E 13 8 Deleting and Protecting Saved Data Keys and Procedure Rotary knob r Soft keys STORE RECALL FILE key Explanation SHIFT key Deleting data 1 Following the steps described in section 13 1 select the SCSI device or the internal hard disk as the media 2 Press the Utility soft key to display the utility selection menu List Func Copy Disk To p p Protect HDOFD Format Info TopMenu 3 Press the List soft key to display the list selection menu Change Data List A A x n ACQ CQ ASC SETUP I2C NextMenu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired list Change Data List DK To I ATO I Bale Format Info TopMenu 5 Use the rotary knob to select the file to protect save
103. in real time or repetitive sampling mode and schould be selected beforehand But for DL1540CL the range over which this feature is actually available will again vary according to the maximum displayable record length For details refer to Appendix 2 Appendix 3 1 12 IM 701530 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Record Length Maximum Displayable Record Length page 7 1 for DL1540CL The term record length refers to the number of data points per channel read into acquisition memory Displayed record length refers to the number of these data points that actually appear on the screen Note that sampling rate and record length will vary according to the T div setting see page 1 5 The term maximum displayable record length refers to the maximum number of points that can be displayed on the screen This value can be selected by the user the available selections are 1 KW 10 KW 100 KW 400 KW 1 MW and 2 MW In general the acquisition memory record length and the displayed record length are equivalent But if the maximum displayable record length is set to 1 KW 10 KW or 100 KW and operation is in roll mode then the acquisition acquisition memory record length will be double the maximum displayable record length As an example if maximum displayable record length is set to 100 KW and the T div is 50 ms div then the record length within acquisition memory will be 200 KW 200 400 points
104. input signal is sent through a capacitor to the attenuator in the vertical control circuit This method Input terminal Vertical can be used when you just want to observe the o H control amplitude of the alternating current signal circuit eliminating the DC components from the input signal or when you want to observe the signal relative to a given reference voltage DC The input signal is sent directly to the attenuator in the vertical control circuit Input terminal Mb 5 This method can be used when you want to observe a circuit both the DC and AC components of the vertical 7 input signal This method also enables observation TL of the input signal with the offset voltage DC voltage eliminated This function is useful when you want to observe ripples in a DC output signal GND The ground signal not the input signal is connected input terminat Maie to the attenuator in the vertical control circuit This SM circuit method enables observation of the ground level on the screen Probe Attenuation page 5 4 A probe is usually used to connect the circuit to be measured to an input terminal Use of a probe provides the following advantages the voltage and current of the circuit to be measured are not disturbed asignal can be input without distortion the measurement voltage range of the oscilloscope can be widened A 150 MHz passive probe is supplied with
105. length is long an ACQ data save may require more than one medium In this case you should be sure to format another medium before beginning the save If you insert an unformatted disk during the save procedure an error message will appear and the save will abort so that you will have to reexecute the save from the beginning The approx 7K shown below denotes memory used for storage of setting data Values are given in bytes Data format Data size P P 4096 x CH x N approx 300 ACQ record length of acquisition memory x CH x N approx 7K N indicates the number of trigger repetitions in single N mode for any other mode N21 IM 701530 01E 13 9 ysiq pJed euJeiu 9y Jo e91 eq ISOS 9y Woy eyeq Duipeo pue Bunes 13 5 Saving and Loading Waveform Data CAUTION Checking the free space on a medium Refer to page 13 5 for a description of this procedure Moving loaded P P waveforms Pressing the POSITION key of the channel corresponding to the number of the loaded waveform prompts you to select whether you want to move the input signal waveform or the loaded waveform CH at the Knob setting selects to move input signal waveforms MEM at the Knob setting selects to move loaded P P waveforms Entering a file name The following points must be kept in mind when entering a file name Afile name must always be specified Up to eight characters can be entered However in case of
106. must always be specified Up to eight characters can be entered However in case of GO NO GO or acquisition on trigger only the first four will be valid For details regarding the characters which can be used refer to page 4 8 The same name cannot be assigned to different data files of the same data type Overwrite inhibit However restarting the GO NO GO determination or acquisition on trigger function will result in overwriting the old files Points to note when saving loading waveform data Acquisition stops when saving or loading is started Only waveform data located within 5 12 div of the center of the waveform display frame is saved Thus if the saved waveform exceeds this range vertically the part exceeding this range will not be displayed if the waveform is subsequently loaded and scrolled vertically For DL1540CL floppy disks having less than 20 K free capacity cannot be used for ACQ waveform data saves When ACQ data is loaded the setting parameters will change to their values at the time of saving f P P data is loaded expansion of the waveform and waveform computation are not possible f the extension of the waveform data file is changed using a personal computer it will be impossible to load the data As for ACQ data only BIN data will be loaded For more details regarding the display of the waveform information while displaying loaded P P waveform or ACQ waveform data ref
107. or below Operating altitude 2000 m or below Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 200 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 180 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency48 to 63 Hz Power Supply Fuse 250 V 3 15 A Time lag VDE SEMKO approved Maximum power consumption 240 VA 100 to 120 VAC 300 VA 200 to 240 VAC when the built in printer is used when the built in printer is not used refer to page 3 3 Applies to products manufactured after Jan 1999 having the CE Mark For all other products please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative 16 8 IM 701530 01E 16 11 General Specifications Item Specifications Withstand voltage 1 5 kVAC for 1 minute between power supply and case Insulation resistance 10 MQ or more at 500 VDC between power supply and case External dimensions Approx 217 W x 268 H x 278 D mm projections excluded Weight DL1540C Approx 4 9 kg DL1540CL Approx 5 2 kg without printer only main body Cooling method Forced air cooling air discharged from the rear and left side Installation position Horizontal one on top of another not allowed vertical using supports Battery back up Set up data and internal clock are backed up by a built in lithium battery Battery life is approx 10 years at ambient temperature of 23 C Accessories Power co
108. possible to set SGL S SGL L N SGL as the trigger mode in history mode For DL1540CL It is not possible to set SINGLE N SGL as the trigger mode in history mode 7 8 818 Itis not possible to change a GP IB address when talk only mode is active 819 Set the correct date and time 3 7 820 No keys can be operated during real time printing except the START STOP and COPY key 10 10 821 Itis not possible to set Envelope mode during an external clock 7 2 822 For DL1540C It is not possible to set SGL L N SGL as the trigger mode or history mode in the time range For DL1540CL At this time range setting It is not possible to set N SGL trigger mode the history mode or the record length 5 11 6 13 14 to 400K 1M 2M words 7 10 823 The trace to be operated is not currently loaded recalled 824 Itis not possible to set H position during roll mode acquisition 5 12 825 The operation is not possible in acquisition hold 12 6 826 The operation is not possible while Isolator is not connected 827 The operation is not possible while Isolator is connected Refer to the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701530 11E 15 4 IM 701530 01E 15 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions No Message Reference Page 828 For DL1540CL A record length of 400K 1M 2M words can only be set when the trigger mode is SINGLE 7 2 829 For DL1540CL A record length of 2M words can only be set when
109. probably not appear on the computer s screen Instead a gray box indicating the size of the image will probably appear Never remove the floppy disk while the access indicator of the floppy disk drive is lit or damage to the magnetic head of the drive or loss of data on the floppy disk may result IM 701530 01E 12 13 ysiq Ajddoj4 wo eyeq Buipeo pue Bui es RI 12 6 Deleting and Protecting Saved Data Keys and Procedure r Soft keys Rotary knob 1 Press the SHIFT STORE RECALL FILE key to display the data save load menu 2 Press the Utility soft key to display the utility selection menu Data Type P P ACQ SETUP 3 Presst Exec he List soft k Func Protect Delete ey to di Format 2HD 1 2M AutoFile oN Utility Disk Info To TopMenu splay the list selection menu List p p 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired list Change Data List I t Disk To c orma i ACQ SETUP Meet Info TopMenu STORE RECALL FILE key SHIFT key Explanation Deleting data 5 Use the rotary knob to select the file to protect save PQR 95 05 03 14 04 52 95 05 03 14 05 30 95 05 03 14 06 08 DEF Deleting 6 Press th
110. properly Connect the cable properly The chart paper of printer is not set Set the chart paper to the printer The plotter is not set to listen only mode Set the plotter to listen only mode The communication interface cable is not No data is output to the plotter Connect the cable properly properly connected The RS 232 C setting parameters do not match Set the RS 232 C setting parameters correctly bem Format the disk The disk must be formatted Data cannot be saved on a Floppy disk has not been formatted Wills anew disk 12 2 floppy disk The floppy disk is not inserted properly Push the disk until the eject button pops up 12 1 Data cannot be loaded on a The floppy disk is not inserted properly Push the disk until the eject button pops up 12 1 floppy disk The GP IB addresses RS 232 C parameters Make sure that the correct addresses Making settings and performing Set in the program differ from those used by parameters are set for both program and operation control are not the instrument instrument possible via the communication interface Instrument is not being used according to Use the instrument according to these specific m its electrical and mechanical specifications ations Refer to the Communication Interface User s Manual IM 701530 11E IM 701530 01E 15 1 uonoedsu pue eoueuojure v Punoouse qnoJ 15 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Message Type
111. soft key to display the memory selection menu 7 Press the soft key corresponding to the memory in which the waveform is to be stored FOINA Destination i RECALL MEM 2 MEM 3 MEM 4 8 Press the EXEC soft key to execute waveform storing Recalling a waveform 3 After step 2 has been completed press the RECALL soft key to display the waveform recalling menu Function WAVE Source Destn EXEC To STORE RECA MEM t LOADt TopMenu 4 Press the Source soft key to display the recall memory selection menu 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the memory No from which the waveform is to be recalled Source Function ITO STORE MEM 2 MEM 3 MEM 4 j TopMenu 6 Press the Destn soft key to display the trace No selection menu 7 Press the soft key corresponding to the trace No to be recalled Function WAVE Destination t STORE LOAD2 LOAD3 LOAD4 8 Press the EXEC soft key to execute waveform recalling Function WAVE Destn To STORE LOAD TopMenu Moving a recalled waveform 9 Press the POSITION key of the channel corresponding to the number of the recalled waveform The vertical position setting menu appears 10 Press the Knob soft key to select MEM 11 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired position 12 Use the rotary knob to fine adjust the position LOAD1 Position To Kno
112. spectrum FFT Selecting the waveform to be saved Source When P P is selected as the data type the waveform to be saved can be selected from the following X Y waveforms cannot be saved TRACE1 to 4 One of the input signal waveforms and computed waveforms displayed as trace Nos 1 to 4 is output ALL TRACE All displayed waveforms are output When ACQ is selected as the data type the waveforms to be saved are the input signal waveforms displayed as trace About the saved data For a description of the format of the data to be saved refer to Appendix 5 Output Data Format used When Saving Waveform Data App 12 Data is saved in the directory which corresponds to the data s format type with one of the following extensions added The directory is created automatically when the medium is formatted by the instrument or when data is saved Data format Directory name Extension P P DL_MISC WVF ACQ BIN DL_WAVE WVF ACQ ASCII DL_MISC CSV When saving data a header file which contains information in ASCII format necessary for analysis of the saved data is also saved The file name used for the data is also assigned to the header file and a HDR extension is added The header file is saved in the same directory as the corresponding data Data size Data size will vary according to the save format the number of waveforms channels the record length and other such factors For DL1540CL if acquisition memory record
113. the DL1540CL with the C8 option Use the dedicated half pitch interface cable B9920TA to connect each terminal to the terminals of another instrument A DC voltage of 5 V is always present on the output terminals Thus take care when you connect to another instrument or when you touch the NO GO OUT terminal For DL1540CL models with the C8 option To connect the DL1540CL to external equipment use the GO NOGO cable 366973 sold separately Do not use the GO NOGO cable 366973 sold separately for any other purpose than for carrying out GO NO GO determination on the DL1540CL model with the C8 option About the GO NOGO cable 366973 sold separately Approx 1 5 m Wires are separated QO Modify them to suit your needs Color Pin No Signal Name Logic White 3 GO OUT Negative Green 4 NOGO OUT Negative Blue 5 GND RJ11 connector 6 To the DL1540CL C8 CL 9 14 IM 701530 01E Chapter 10 Outputting Displayed Waveforms and Setting Parameters to the Printer Plotter 10 1 Loading a Chart in the Optional Built in Printer Printer Roll Charts Use only YOKOGAWA s roll charts the same type as the one supplied with the instrument with the built in printer When Roll Charts have Run out When your roll charts have run out purchase more from your dealer or YOKOGAWA sales representatives as listed on the back cover of
114. the rotary knob to select the file to be loaded FileName ABC EXEC To TopMenu EXEC To TopMenu ABC 96705703 11 24 26 96705703 11 25 24 96705703 11 26 00 96705703 11 26 34 96705703 11 27 26 14 Press the EXEC soft key to start loading Function P P Destn SAVE LOAD EXEC To TopMenu 13 6 IM 701530 01E 13 5 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Moving loaded P P waveforms 15 Press the POSITION key of the channel corresponding to the number of the loaded waveform 16 Press the Knob soft key to select MEM 17 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired position 18 Use the rotary knob to fine adjust the position LOAD1 Position To Knob he as 3div idiv Odiv 1div 3div CH Tdiv Canceling the display of the loaded waveform 19 Press the CH key of the channel corresponding to the number of the loaded waveform The load ON OFF menu appears Note that by alternately pressing the CH key the acquisition waveform also dis appears 20 Press the MEM soft key to select OFF and the loaded waveform will be canceled Selecting ON results in displaying the loaded waveform Mem ON Saving ACQ waveform data 3 Press the ACQ soft key to display the save load setting menu and a list of files Media Data Type AutoFile Pa scsi P P ACQ
115. the trigger type IM 701530 01E 6 17 JeDBu e BuneAnoy H 6 11 Changing the Trigger Position Keys and Procedure 1 Press the POSITION DELAY key to display the trigger position delay setting menu 2 Press the soft key to set the desired trigger position The trigger position can also be set using the rotary knob r Soft keys i Trigger Trigger Position To Trigger Knob Position adv odv s4div a oola T HEN es POSITION DELAY key Explanation Selecting the trigger position The trigger position can be selected from the following 4div 4 divisions from the center of the waveform display frame Odiv the center of the waveform display frame 4div 4 divisions from the center of the waveform display frame 4div Odiv 4div Y The trigger position can be set with in steps of 1 50 div using the rotary knob Setting the trigger delay and trigger position The trigger position indicates which position of the waveform in the acquisition memory will actually be displayed on the screen The trigger point refers to the point at which a trigger is activated If no delay time has been set i e delay time O s the trigger position and the trigger point refer to the same location
116. to 15 kHz for the trigger source can be turned ON OFF Trigger level Setting range 10 div from the center of the waveform display frame Setting resolution 1 50 div Accuracy 1 div 10 of trigger level Trigger sensitivity 1 divp p when frequency of trigger source is DC to 150 MHz Trigger position of 1 50 div 0 4 div from the center of waveform display frame Settable from 5 div to 5 div in steps Trigger delay setting range 0 to 9 999 s normal delay Inter channel trigger skew 5 ns or less when vertical sensitivity is the same 1 Measured with the internal clock selected as the timebase and the voltage axis sensitivity set to CAL after calibration following a 30 minute warm up under the standard operating conditions stipulated on page 16 8 2 Measured with a voltage axis sensitivity of 50 mV div when a pulse of amplitude of 5 div p p and rise time of 1 ns is input Trigger coupling DC HF rejection OFF 16 2 IM 701530 01E 16 3 Time Axis Item Specifications Time axis setting range 5 ns div to 50 s div Time axis accuracy 0 01 500 ps External clock External clock can be selected from the following two signals Input signal to EXT CLOCK IN Connector type BNC Maximum input voltage 6 V Input frequency range 40 Hz to 15 MHz only for continuous clock Input level TTL CMOS level recommended 0 3 Vp p or greater at the end of the connector 0 15 V
117. to display the download menu 4 Press the CH soft key to display the channel selection menu T1 To TopMenu Cursor 5 U0div lt gt keys 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel to be downlo aded CH 2 3 TE T1 To TopMenu Cursor 5 U0div 6 Set the downloading range by selecting either T1 or T2 soft key and setting the vertical cursor position using the rotary knob You can also use the lt or gt keys Range T1 EXEC T2 To TopMenu Cursor 27 iv Executing the download funtion 7 Press the EXEC soft key The name of the soft key will change to ABORT Range T1 EXEC T2 To TopMenu Cursor 2 7 iv Aborting the download function 8 Press the ABORT soft key The name of the soft key will change to EXEC Range T1 ABORT Download setting Dataout Downloading data from this instrument should only be done after having set downloading settings at the YOKOGAWA AG series arbitrary waveform generator For details regarding the settings and or operation of the YOKOGAWA AG series refer to its corresponding instruction manual When executing downloading the setting of this instrument will change to talking mode in the case of GP IB When
118. to page 10 4 for more details Data size when saving In case of saving a V T Waveform with two waveforms and grid displayed HPGL approx 25 Kbyte TIFF approx 300 Kbyte PS approx 70 Kbyte BMP approx 300 Kbyte Checking the free space on a floppy disk Refer to page 12 3 for a description of this procedure Image color type with TIFF or BMP only OFF Same image as the SHORT Short copy printing type described on page 10 4 GRAY 4 bit gray scale image HALF Image using the same colors as the screen except grid scale etc are in black and no background FULL Image using the same colors as the screen Data compression with TIFF or BMP only Data of TIFF and BMP formats can be output by compression using respectively LZW and RLE Entering a file name The following points must be kept in mind when entering a file name Afile name must always be specified Up to eight characters can be entered All the characters on the keyboard can be used However the following file names cannot be used due to MS DOS restrictions AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK The same name cannot be assigned to different data files of the same data type Overwrite inhibit Points to not when using data saved in Post Script format There is no problem printing out data saved in PostScript format on a PostScript printer However if the PostScript data is used in a file created by DTP application software the waveform image will
119. unit will be applied to measurement values of cursor measurements and automated measurements The following is a display example of the results of automated measurement When linear scaling is ON Tracel P P 50 00 Max 22 00 Min 28 00V Rms 18 564 Avg 5 842V Ovr 0 0 3Ovr 0 0 High 22 00 Low 28 00V Rise 760 0us Fal 780 0us Freq Prod d 1 300ms Wi Duty 0 0 I1TY 15 8E 03 I2TY 21 2E 03 Brst 2 530ms PIsN 1 When linear scaling is OFF Tracel P P 50 0E 00 Max 24 0E 00V Min 26 0E 00 Rms 17 9E 00V Avg 4 84E 00V Ovr 0 0 3Ovr 0 0 High 24 0E 00 Low 26 0E 00V Rise 760 0us Fall 780 0us Freq Er Prod Ud 1 300ms Wi Duty 0 0 I1TY 18 2E 03 I2TY 14 9E 03v Brst 2 530ms PISN 1 IM 701530 01E 8 17 SUJJOJOAeM Duiz euy B 8 5 Performing Waveform Math Addition Subtraction and Multiplication Keys and Procedure Rotary knob r Soft keys Y 1 Press the MATH key to display the waveform math setting menu Selecting the type of computation 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the math to be carried out Phase Math Operation Shift 1 2 gt 3 1 2 gt 3 1x2 53 0 007div Performing a phase shift m 3 In case of computation of multiplication press the Phase soft MATH key E
120. voltages Activates a trigger for the video signal in NTSC PAL or HDTV studio standard high vision signal broadcasting systems Only CH1 is available for this function Designation of field No and line No is possible Activates a trigger when one of the trigger source conditions becomes true The edge trigger condition can be selected for each trigger source Activates a trigger when all the multiple trigger source conditions become true Trigger condition can be selected from High or Low for each trigger source Clock signal can also be selected Activates a trigger when the pulse width is greater or smaller than the specified width Setting range below pulse width 5 ns 10 ns to 9 999 s Setting range above pulse width 30 ns to 9 999 s OR PATTERN and WIDTH are provided as optional Trigger mode Auto Auto level Normal Single Single N Acquires waveform automatically if no trigger is activated for more than approx 100 ms Automatically sets the trigger level to the median of the amplitude if no trigger is activated for more than approx 100 ms Acquires waveform only when a trigger is activated Acquires waveform only once when a trigger is activated Acquires waveform when a trigger is activated the specified number of times Trigger slope Rise fall and rise fall Trigger coupling DC or AC for trigger source HF rejection Bandwidth limit approx DC
121. waveform computed waveform computed waveform Se ese Pro eo LLLLELLLL HHHH Power Spectrum Display page 8 18 FFT Fast Fourier Transform computation can be performed on the input signal to display its power spectrum This is useful when you want to check the frequency distribution of the input signal 20ms7div 250Hz div Power spectrum Marbut Arment Season dM waveform Two time windows are available a rectangular window and a Hanning window The rectangular window is effective for transient signals such as an impulse wave which attenuate completely within the time window The Hanning window allows continuity of the signal by gradually attenuating the parts of the signal located near the ends of the time window down to the 0 level Hence it is effective for continuous signals FFT computation generates 1000 measurement data points but only 500 points are displayed on the screen Window Integral Power spectrum Rectangular window lt T i AU vs lt T js JM Sine wave ced Hanning window lt T LIPS fat gt gt 7 Rectangular window W t u t u t T U t Step function Hanning window W t 0 5 0 5 cos2x FFT function When the complex result of F
122. waveform level Delay between channels 1 count Setting example of measurement waveform Edge Polarity falling Edge Count N2 1 to 9 Threshold Level 5V 1 p 1 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 l 1 I I 41 L Lei L Measurement Ground waveform level Measuring data in acquisition memory 1 Set the measurement range measurement items distal proximal values and channel delay to appropriate values Then confirm that the Measure soft key in the automated measurement setting menu top menu is set to ON To execute measurement of memory data 2 Press the START STOP key to halt waveform acquisition 3 Press the ALL Scan EXEC soft key The key name immediately changes to ALL Scan ABORT and the oscilloscope begins executing a single measurement of the relevant data in memory while displaying progress on the screen When measurement is finished the key name changes back to ALL Scan EXEC T2 Cursor ALL Scan A ABORT 25iv Indicates progress of acquisition memory data measurement lt lt Message gt gt All scan is in progress NEN 1 1 1 0101 7 3 To abort measurement of memory data 4 The ALL Scan ABORT soft key remains on the screen while measurement is being carried out You can abort the measurement at any time by pressing this key The key name will immediately change back to ALL Scan EXEC IM 701530 01E 8 11
123. x 2 40K x 2 100us 50M 50K 56K 100M 100K 120K 100M 10M x 2 10K x 2 20K x 2 50us 100M 50K 56K 200M 100K 120K 20us 100M 20K 40K 200M 40K 80K 10us 100M 10K 20K 200M 20K 40K Bus 100M 5K 10K 200M 10K 20K Hhanges to ormel mode even when envelope mode 2us 100M 2K 4K 200M 4K 8K has been set ius 100M 1K 2K 200M 2K 4K 500ns 100M 500 1K 200M 1K 2K 200ns 100M 200 400 200M 400 800 100ns 100M 100 200 200M 200 400 1 The displayed record length given in refers to the record length stored in the acquisition memory Only when the trigger mode is auto or auto level data of a record length given in is stored In case where no value in is given the displayed record length and the record length stored in the acquisition memory are the same 2 The sample rate given in for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at 100MS s and having taken the minimum and maximum values 3 In the envelope mode the minimum maximum values are displayed in a pair IM 701530 01E App 3 xipueddy H Appendix 2 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length for DL1540C For DL1540C trigger mode single N or with history function ON When Mode other than Envelope Mode is A
124. 0 x25000 In case of 20 s 2 s 200 ms 20 ms 2 ms 200 us and 20 us div X1 X2 x4 x10 x20 x40 x100 x200 x400 x1000 x2000 x4000 x10000 x20000 In case of 10 s 1 s 100 ms 10 ms 1 ms 100 us and 10 us div X1 X2 x5 x10 x20 x50 x100 x200 x500 x1000 x2000 x5000 x10000 x20000 Zooming range position The center of the zooming position box can be set within 5 div of the waveform display frame The setting step depends on the displayed record length Selecting the display type when displaying an expanded waveform The type of display can be selected from the following OFF Only the original display will be displayed MAIN The pre zoom waveform together with the zoom box will be displayed ZOOM Only the expanded waveform will be displayed The part of the pre zoom waveform selected in the zoom box will be expanded MainZoom Both the original and the expanded waveform will be displayed on the screen which is divided in two Selecting the display type when displaying an X Y waveform The type of display depends on the settings in the expansion menu For X Y mode refer to page 7 15 ZOOM mode X Y Mode OFF X Y T Y amp X Y OFF V T pre zoom X Y pre zoom V T pre zoom waveform upper waveform waveform X Y pre zoom waveform lower MAIN V T pre zoom X Y pre zoom V T pre zoom waveform waveform waveform zoom box upper zoom box X Y pre zoom waveform lower ZOOM V T expanded X Y expanded V T expanded
125. 07 on SHORT MERE REAL 7 jTopMenu Page 6 Press the Range soft key to display the printing range setting menu 7 After having pressed either the T1 or T2 soft keys use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor You can also use the or keys The position of cursor T1 indicates the starting point of printing and the position point of cursor T2 indicates the end point of printing T2 Cursor Info Copy Range 5 07 prion SHORT Ti ZOOM BOX POS 1 page Setting the zoom value 8 After having pressed the ZOOM soft key use the rotary knob to adjust the zoom value H ZOOM info Copy Range OO OFF oN SHORT T1 T2 BOX POS x5 Verifying the waveform to be printed 9 Press the BOX POS soft key to move the zoom box to the desired printing range This allows you to verify which part of the waveform will be printed Position info Copy Range OFF ON SHORT T1 T2 ZOOM zu 0 4 9div 10 Press the ESC key to close the printing range setting menu Outputting to the printer 11 Press the COPY key to execute the printing Aborting the printing 12 After having performed step 11 press the COPY key again to abort the printing IM 701530 01E 10 3 Jeyoj d 4e1uug eui 0 sJejeureje gd Hues pue suuojo eM pef ejdsiq
126. 0M 100K 20us 100M 20K 200M 40K Changes to normal mode 10us 100M 10K 200M 20K Mis bia ao bera 5us 100M 5K 200M 10K 2us 100M 2K 200M 4K ius 100M 1K 200M 2K 500ns 100M 500 200M 1K 200ns 100M 200 200M 400 100ns 100M 100 200M 200 1 The displayed record length and acquisition memory record length are equivalent 2 The sample rate given in for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at 100MS s and having taken the minimum and maximum values 3 In the envelope mode the minimum maximum values are displayed in a pair 4 Regardless of the Rep setting repetitive sampling is not used with 1MW maximum displayable record length A Rep setting of ON is ineffective IM 701530 01E App 9 xipueddy H Appendix 3_ Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length for DL1540L When Maximum Displayable Record Length is set to 2MW for DL1540L only Selection of 2MW length is not available if T div is set between 50ns and 5ns if trigger mode is other than single or if CH3 or CH4 is ON Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active At Least One of CH3 CH4 is ON CH3 CH4 are Both OFF When fo es Mode Rep ON or OFF Rep ON or
127. 1 Connect the video signal to the CH1 terminal Rotary knob 2 Press the TYPE key to display the trigger type selection menu 3 Press the TV soft key OR PATTERN and WIDTH menus are optional NTSC Line m Soft keys Cj Trigger Type 5 j i T I EDGE WINDOW TY OR PATTERN WIDTH m Selecting the broadcasting system for the video signal l Y If OR PATTERN and WIDTH menus are not provided the select menu will be displayed next to the trigger type selection menu TYPE key 4 Press any of the NTSC PAL or HDTV soft key to select the LEVEL SOURCE key desired broadcasting system NTSC Line Broadcasting Type Field To 5 PAL HDTV 2X TopMenu Selecting the field and line number If OR PATTERN and WIDTH menus are not provided the select menu will be displayed next to the trigger type selection menu 5 Press the Field soft key to select the desired field number 6 Turn the rotary knob to select the desired line number NTSC Line Broadcasting Type Field To PAL HDTV 1 El TopMenu 207 Selecting the polarity and setting the trigger level 7 Press the LEVEL SOURCE key to display the polarity trigger level setting menu 8 Press the soft ke
128. 1 rige T 4 5 expansion sssssssssesseeeeeeenneneenn nennen 1 13 7 4 MAING mcm 4 5 information 7 17 10 3 nsipienp C M 1 3 5 5 loading 12 4 13 6 math 1 19 8 18 Prini E E 10 3 parameters 2 1e ee D eee e ee 8 8 Mere o e M 11 1 SAVING orte M A ES 12 4 13 6 SLOMING ois eiie b ex HR UR eg eed PERRA 11 1 MN oe eh CTETUR MEE MENS 7 15 IM 701530 01E Index 3
129. 100M 100k x 2 200K x 2 100ms 500k 400K 8div 500k 400K 8div 100M 250k x 2 200K x 2 50ms 1M 400K 8div 1M 400K 8div 100M 500k x 2 200K x 2 20ms 2M 400K 2M 400K 100M 1M x 2 200K x 2 10ms 5M 400K 8div 5M 400K 8div 100M 2 5M x 2 200K x 2 5ms 10M 400K 8div 10M 400K 8div 100M BM x 2 200K x 2 2ms 20M 400K 20M 400K 100M 10M x 2 200K x 2 1ms 50M 400K 8div 50M 400K 8div 100M 10M x 2 80K x 2 8div 500us 100M 400K 8div 100M 400K 8div 200us 100M 200K 200M 400K 100us 100M 100K 200M 200K 50us 100M 50K 200M 100K 20us 100M 20K 200M 40K Changes to normal mode 10us 100M 10K 200M 20K EL IR moda 5us 100M 5K 200M 10K 2us 100M 2K 200M 4K ius 100M 1K 200M 2K 500ns 100M 500 200M 1K 200ns 100M 200 200M 400 100ns 100M 100 200M 200 1 The 8div indication shown in the Displayed record length column indicates that the waveform display spans only 8 divisions of the screen s time axis No waveform appears over the two far right divisions The displayed record length and acquisition memory record length are equivalent 2 The sample rate given in for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at 100MS s and having taken the minimum and maximum values 3 Inthe envelope mode the minimum maximum values are displayed in a pair 4 Regardless of the Rep setting repetitive sampling is not used with 400KW maximum displayable record length A Rep setting of ON is ineffective App 8 IM 701530
130. 10K x 2 10s 100 10K 20K 100 10K 20K 100 10K 20K 100 10K 20K 100M 50 x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 5s 200 10K 20K 200 10K 20K 200 10K 20K 200 10K 20K 100M 100 x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 2s 500 10K 20K 500 10K 20K 500 10K 20K 500 10K 20K 100M 250 x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 1s 1k 10K 20K 1k 10K 20K 1k 10K 20K 1k 10K 20K 100M 500 x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 500ms 2k 10K 20K 2k 10K 20k 2k 10K 20k 2k 10K 20K 100M 1k x2 5K x 2 10K x 2 200ms 5k 10K 20K 5k 10K 20kK 5k 10K 20K 5k 10K 20K 100M 2 5k x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 100ms 10k 10K 20K 10k 10K 20K 10k 10K 20K 10k 10K 20K 100M 5k x2 5K x 2 10K x 2 50ms 20k 10K 20K 20k 10K 20kK 20k 10K 20K 20k 10K 20K 100M 10k x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 20ms 50k 10K 50k 10K 50k 10K 50k 10K 100M 25k x 2 5K x 2 10ms 100k 10K 100k 10K 100k 10K 100k 10K 100M 50k x 2 5K x 2 5ms 200k 10K 200k 10K 200k 10K 200k 10K 100M 100k x 2 5K x 2 2ms 500k 10K 500k 10K 500k 10K 500k 10K 100M 250k x 2 5K x 2 1ms 1M 10K 1M 10K 1M 10K 1M 10K 100M 500k x 2 5K x 2 500us 2M 10K 2M 10K 2M 10K 2M 10K 100M 1M x 2 5K x2 200us 5M 10K 5M 10K 5M 10K 5M 10K 100M 2 5M x 2 5K x 2 100us 10M 10K 10M 10K 10M 10K 10M 10K 100M 5M x 2 5K x2 50us 20M 10K 20M 10K 20M 10K 20M 10K 100M 10M x 2 5K x 2 20us 50M 10K 50M 10K 50M 10K 50M 10K 100M 10M x 2 2K x 2 10us 100M 10K 100M 10K 100M 10K 100M 10K 5us 100M 5K 2us 100M 2K 1K Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set
131. 211109 8 765 43 2 1 0 Code File structure BIN BIN waveform data Control information IM 701530 01E App 13 xipueddy H Appendix 5 Output Data Format used when Saving Waveform Data Example DL1540CL ASCII Data P P DATA P P waveform data Control information ASCII data consists of a mantissa part and an exponent part as shown below Model DL1540CL BlockSize 512 BlockNumber 1 DisplayPointNo 6 DisplayBlockSize 500 TriggerPointNo 250 Date 95 12 01 Time 48 17 11 SampleRate 100 MHz TraceName Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Unit e ny yr y MediaNo 1 StartBlockNo 1 StartPointNo 1 EndBlockNo 1 EndPointNo 512 4 200e 01 2 000e 00 2 400e 01 2 000e 00 4 200e 01 2 000e 00 2 400e 01 2 000e 00 4 200e 01 2 000e 00 2 200e 01 2 000e 00 3 800e 01 2 000e 00 2 200e 01 2 000e 00 3 800e 01 2 000e 00 2 400e 01 2 000e 00 3 800e 01 2 000e 00 2 400e 01 2 000e 00 App 14 IM 701530 01E Index Index Symbols setup x2 a E M O time SMAKI TEE 1 17 7 16 density determination A Di annern 9 4 9 9 ANJE reige er qct EI EEE HEX de ERA REIR GRADES 9 8 9 11 AG Scent demie tiere i EE 1 2 ZONE ee nns 9 3 AG coupling cite a d rire teri edere eH es 5 2 display AG series
132. 28 DB2 44 ACK 29 DB3 45 RST 30 DB4 46 MSG 31 DB5 47 SEL 32 DB6 48 C D 33 DB7 49 REQ 34 DBP 50 I O 35t037 GND 252423 3 2 1 Pin No Doooooo00000000000100000D anaasaupunuouununauhnG 5049 48 28 27 26 Items necessary for connection Cable Use a commercially sold cable that is 3 m or less in length that has a ferrite core on each end of the cable and that has a characteristic impedance between 90 and 132 O Connection procedure 1 Connect the SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the rear panel of the instrument 2 Set the SCSI ID number of the connected device to the External SCSI ID number specified on the instrument The default value is 5 3 Turn ON the SCSI device and the instrument in that order SCSI devices that can be connected Most SCSI devices MO disk drive hard disk and ZIP can be connected to the instrument but there are some exceptions For example a hard disk with a capacity of up to 2 GB can be used For details on which devices can be connected ask your YOKOGAWA dealer For general handling precautions for the connected SCSI device see the instruction manual that is provided with the device NOLO When connecting multiple SCSI devices in a chain attach a SCSI terminator to the device at the other end of the chain To format the internal hard disk use the for
133. 36 00V Load3 P P 72 00V Max 36 00v Min 36 00V Load4 P P 72 00V Max 36 00V Min 36 00V MISC Use of the Information menu or communications function enables output of all the selected measured values though the measured values cannot be updated by the Information menu When saving screen image data on a floppy disk in HP GL or PostScript format all the selected items can be saved IM 701530 01E 8 15 SUJJOJOAeM Duiz euy B 8 4 Using the Linear Scaling Function Relevant Keys Rotary knob SELECT key RESET key ESC key r Soft keys i C is ee WESS C MES o mm J Lj L 4 1 l 1 4 f I I Y I y p MISC key keys Operating Procedure 1 Press the MISC key to display the setting menu and press the To NextMenu soft key Time Comm Date Infor Contig To Base Time mation NextMenu 2 Press the Scale soft key Self To Test LCD PrvMenu DataOut Scale 3 Press the Mode soft key and select ON The Setup soft key will appear Mod 3 o ond 4 Press the Setup soft key to display the linear scaling setting menu Mode Setup To Lorr ZU TopMenu In order to use the linear scaling function it is nec
134. 4 i L T2 Em GO NOGO Type T Range Setup Cursor OFF ZONE POLITE Ti EXEC 1 23Kiv 9 8 IM 701530 01E 9 2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform Parameters Setting the determination conditions Parameter setup 5 Press the Setup soft key of the GO NO GO top menu The parameter menu will appear 6 After having selected the Mode setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select ON Pressing the key once more results in selecting OFF 7T After having selected the Trace setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select the trace used for measurement Selectable from 1 to 4 8 After having selected the Item setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to display the parameter setting screen 9 Use the rotary knob to select the parameter of measurement Press the SELECT key the setting screen will disappear and the setting will be shown at the Item setting Measure Parameter od C UNDERSHOOT j RISE C WIDTH O INTEGITY MAX O OVERSHOOT O FALL O WIDTH j INTEG2TY C MIN G HIGH O FREQ O DUTY Qj INTEGIXY Qj RMS G Low Qj PERIOD j BURST J INTEG2XY Q ava G PULSE Q DELAY 10 After having selected the Upper setting using the rotary knob press the SHIFT MISC KEYBOARD key to display the keyboard 11 Use the keyboard to enter the desired value For details concerning operation of the keyboard r
135. 4 The waveforms will be displayed at the Odiv location on the voltage axis Moving waveforms You can move the position of input signal waveforms and recalled waveforms seperately When displaying recalled waveforms press the POSITION key corresponding to the recalled waveform and select which waveform either the input signal or the recalled one should be moved When you want to move the input signal waveform press the Knob soft key and select CH When you want to move the recalled waveform press the Knob soft key and select MEM Restrictions on the recalled waveforms It is not possible to change either the voltage axis or the time axis sensitivity of the recalled waveforms The conditions when the waveform was stored are kept It is also not possible to perform computation and expansion on the recalled waveforms However it is possible to move the recalled waveforms using the POSITION key and to perform cursor measurements and waveform parameter measurements Points to note when storing and recalling The waveform that is stored is the P P data displayed on the screen not the acquisition data e Waveform data located within 5 12 div of the center of the waveform display frame is stored Thus if the stored waveform exceeds this range vertically the part exceeding the range will not be displayed if the waveform is recalled and moved vertically Note Initializing does not result in loss of stored wa
136. 5 6 Changing the Waveform s Vertical Position Keys and Procedure R 1 Press the POSITION key of the channel whose waveform you otary knob want to move 2 Select the position of the screen where you want the waveform Soft keys to be displayed by pressing the corresponding soft key y E I 3 Turn the rotary knob to fine adjust the position CH1 Ki I s CH Position To Position 3div_ 1dv_ _Odiv idiv 3div 0 0 kiiv mum I J Y POSITION key Explanation Moving range The ground level can be moved up to 4 000 div from the center of the waveform display frame This range can be travelled using the rotary knob The soft keys allow you to move the waveform quickly to either of the positions 3div 1div Odiv 1div 3div Seiting resolution The ground level can be moved in steps of 0 02 divisions irrespective of the vertical sensitivity Waveforms which cannot be moved Snapshot waveforms Indication of the vertical position For an input signal waveform or computed waveform the corresponding trace No and ground level mark are displayed on the left edge of the waveform display frame The trace No and ground level mark also move with the waveform when the waveform is moved For a recalled or loaded waveform the trace No preceded by
137. 50K x 2 100K x 2 fm 200ms 50k 100K 200K 50k 100K 200K 50k 100K 200K 50k 100K 200K 100M 25k x 2 50K x 2 100K x 2 100ms 100k 100K 200K 100k 100K 200K 100k 100K 200K 1 00k 100K 200K 100M 50k x 2 50K x 2 100K x 2 50ms 200k 100K 200K 200k 100K 200K 200k 100K 200K 200k 100K 200K 100M 100k x 2 50K x 2 100K x 2 20ms 500k 100K 500k 100K 500k 100K 500k 100K 100M 250k x 2 50K x 2 10ms 1M 100K 1M 100K 1M 100K 1M 100K 100M 500k x 2 50K x 2 5ms 2M 100K 2M 100K 2M 100K 2M 100K 100M 1M x 2 50K x 2 2ms 5M 100K 5M 100K 5M 100K 5M 100K 100M 2 5M x 2 50K x 2 1ms 10M 100K 10M 100K 10M 100K 10M 100K 100M 5M x 2 50K x 2 500us 20M 100K 20M 100K 20M 100K 20M 100K 100M 10M x 2 50K x 2 200us 50M 100K 50M 100K 50M 100K 50M 100K 100M 10M x 2 20K x 2 100us 100M 100K 100M 100K 100M 100K 100M 100K 50us 100M 50K 100M 50K 200M 100K 200M 50K 20us 100M 20K 100M 20K 200M 40K 200M 20K 10us 100M 10K 100M 10K 200M 20K 200M 10K 5us 100M 5K 2us 100M 2K Changes to normal mode 1K even when envelope mode has been set The displayed record length given in refers to the record length stored in the acquisition memory Only when the trigger mode is auto or auto level data of a record length given in is stored In case where no value in is given the displayed record length and the record length stored in the acquisition memory are the same 2 100MS s and having taken the minimum and maximum values 3 4 In the envelope
138. 57 06 58 57 06 58 57 06 58 58 06 58 58 06 58 58 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 06 58 58 06 58 58 06 58 58 06 58 58 06 58 58 06 58 58 06 58 58 06 58 59 06 58 59 06 58 59 06 58 59 06 58 59 06 58 59 06 58 59 06 58 59 06 58 59 06 59 00 06 59 00 06 59 00 06 59 00 060 06 59 00 061 06 59 00 062 06 59 00 063 06 59 00 064 06 59 00 065 06 59 00 066 06 59 01 067 06 59 01 068 06 59 01 069 06 59 01 070 06 59 01 071 06 59 01 072 06 59 01 073 06 59 01 074 06 59 01 075 06 59 01 076 06 59 02 077 06 59 02 078 06 59 02 079 06 59 02 waveform will appear on the screen 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 06 59 02 06 59 02 06 59 02 06 59 02 06 59 02 06 59 02 06 59 03 06 59 03 06 59 03 06 59 03 IM 701530 01E SUOIIPUOD Aeldsiq pue uonisinboy BuibueyD 7 4 Acquiring Waveforms using the Sequential Store Function Explanation Displaying all waveforms 11 Continuing from step 6 7 or 10 press the ALL disp EXEC soft key to display all waveforms Display Intrpl x Y Accumu Time All Disp wide Scrn eer SINE OFF OFF Stamp EXEC ON Number of acquisitions Acquisition Count N For DL1540C this setting specifies the number of times that data acquisitions will be s
139. A product for industrial environment In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Cable conditions External trigger clock input terminal Connected BNC cable 3D2W with both side s Ferrite Cores TDK ZCAT2035 0930A Trigger output terminal Same as above for the External trigger clock input terminal Connecter for half pitch interface Connected the cable B9920TA the dedicated cable for RS 232 C Unit 700927 Immunity Complying Standard EN50082 2 1995 Susceptibility under immunity condition Noise increase lt 60 mV SCSI interface No effect Testing Condition 100 Msps 20 mV div PeakDetect Envelope Mode 20 MHzBWL Channel Input terminated with 50 O Cables Condition The applied BNC cable must be shorter than 3 meters The applied analog RGB cable used for RGB video signal output must be shorter than 3 meters Standard operating conditions Ambient temperature 28 2 C Ambient humidity 55 10 96 RH Power voltage and frequency fluctuation Less than 1 96 of the rated voltage frequency Warm up time 30 min or more Storage conditions Temperature 20 to 60 C Humidity 20 to 85 RH no condensation allowed Operating conditions Temperature 5 to 40 C Humidity 20 to 85 RH without printer 35 to 85 RH with printer No condensation allowed in either case Storage altitude 3000 m
140. ACTION key to display the trigger on action selection menu 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired action Data acquisition will stop 3 In case you selected FD P P or FD ACQ pressing the FileName soft key will display the keyboard In case you J 9 selected PRINTER skip step 4 Action On Trigger FileName EXEC O PRINTER MGA FO Aca rovc 4 r Soft keys C3 Use the keyboard to enter the filename For details on entering characters using the keyboard refer to page 4 8 MODE ACTION key START STOP key Starting the action on trigger SHIFT key 5 Press the EXEC soft key to restart acquisition The selected action will be validated when a trigger is activated fiction On Trigger EXEC FD P P FD ACQ FD IMG or PRINTER PED Py I m FD IMG iid EXC Stopping the action on trigger 6 Press the ABORT soft key to stop acquisition fiction On Trigger GROU FD P P FD ACQ FD IMG EXEC or fiction On Trigger FileName PRINTER FD ACQ FD IMG PEC Explanation Selecting the action on trigger The action can be selected from the following PRINTER Outputs hardcopy to the b
141. AP SHOT key is pressed Clear trace Clears snapshot and accumulated waveforms Calibration Automatic calibration and manual calibration are available Waveform display ON OFF Display ON OFF function is available for each of the channels CH1 to CH4 Waveform inversion Inverts waveforms about the ground level Vertical position setting Moves waveforms vertically within 4 div of the center of the waveform display frame Horizontal position setting Moves display positions horizontally within 5 div of the center of the waveform display frame Acquisition mode Normal envelope and averaging modes are available Sampling mode For some time axis settings the user can switch between real time sampling and repetitive sampling Record length For DL1540CL 1 KW 10 KW 100 KW 400 KW 1 MW or 2 MW selectable For DL1540C automatically set according to Time axis Sample rate Trigger mode Acquisition mode Sequential store function Stores waveforms only a specified number of times up to 100 in case of real time sampling mode History memory Stores 100 acquisition data in case of real time sampling mode Waveform expansion Displayed waveforms can be expanded in the time axis direction Display interpolation Interpolation method can be selected from straight line sine pulse and OFF no CR interpolation Smoothing Displays waveforms obtained by moving averaging on se
142. All waveform except snapshot Characters value Snapshot waveform You can change the brightness of the back light of the LCD Refer to Section 14 6 Setting the Brightness of the LCD 7 18 IM 701530 01E Chapter 8 Analyzing Waveforms 8 1 Measuring a V T Waveform using Cursors Keys and Procedure Rotary knob r Soft keys BEN n oT J D CURSOR key lt gt keys 1 Press the CURSOR key to display the cursor measurement setting menu Press the Cursor soft key and select ON 3 Press the Type soft key to display the measurement type selection menu N Ti Cursor Type Cursor iiid ON aT T2 TI amp T2 shiv Measuring time difference frequency voltage voltage difference using the vertical cursors 4 Press the V T soft key to display the cursor selection menu Two vertical cursors will appear on the screen T1 Cursor Type Cursor E orr me 0 PE Bl 5 Press the Trace soft key to display the trace selection menu T1 Cursor Cursor Type Trace Cursor i orF E V T 1 T2 TI amp T2 2 7kiv 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the trace you want to measure Ti Trace 1 2 Cursor Cur
143. Appendix 2 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length for BELLO App 2 Appendix 3 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length for DIEI540C0b o EEN EEE E tu m uoNDUm E NM IM MU nud App 5 Appendix 4 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform sssssseeeeeeee App 11 Appendix 5 Output Data Format used when Saving Waveform Data Example DL1540CL App 12 12 IM 701530 01E Chapier 1 Functions 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram System Configuration Block Diagram HP GL plotter Hard copy Set up information list YOKOGAWA AG series arbitrary waveform generator Arbitra waveform output N N o Data transfer External printer Hard copy E Communication Built in printer Hard copy Set up information list Floppy disk Saving loading data lt gt GO NO GO judgement output Trigger output gt RGB video signal output Personal computer Remote control Data analysis lt SCSI device Saving loading data He External clock input _ trigger input Signal input Object to be measured
144. Bumndino 10 2 Printing Waveforms and Additional Information using the Optional Built in Printer Explanation a Contents of hardcopy Displayed waveforms Ground display such as graticule measured values Menu Setting information such as filter offset display record length and trigger settings only in case printing type is set to SHORT Additional information Addition Info The following additional information setup and waveform parameters can also be output To output the hardcopy only select OFF Setup Information Setup Information 1Vertical 2 Horizontal CHT CH2 CHS CHi T biv ms div viv 50V 50v ov 50v Acquisition Normal Coupling DC Dc pc Dc Sample Rate 1M S s Probe 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 Record Length Main 10K Offset Dov foov oov oov Zoom 10K Position 00div L00div 1 00div_ 3 00div_ Time Base INTERNAL Invert OFF OFF lorr OFF Smoothing OFF Bandwidth FULL 3 Trigger Mode AUTO EDGE Coupling ac HF Rejection OFF Position 0 00div Delay 0 0ps Press any key Holdoff Time OFF Edge Source CH cut Source Chi Ch2 Cha Cha EXT Level ov ov ov ov 0 15 Slope EJ pJ Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters Measure Values Tracel Trace2 Trace3 Trace4 P P 52 00V P P 52 00v P P 54 00V P P 52 00V Max 24 00V Max 24 00 Max 54 00V Max 54 00V Min 28 00v Min 28 00v Min 0 000v
145. CH for CH1 CH2 only 3 4 channels measurement 56 K 50 K 4 W CH When in roll mode 20 K 10 K 4 W CH In other cases 10 K 10 K 4 W CH For DL1540CL 2 channels measurement 2 MW CH for CH1 CH2 only 3 4 channels measurement 1 MW CH 1 Voltage axis sensitivity of 1 mV div can be achieved by digital zooming 2 mV div x 2 2 Measured with the internal clock selected as the timebase and the voltage axis sensitivity set to CAL after calibration following a 30 minute warm up under the standard operating conditions stipulated on page 16 8 8 Measured with the input short circuited record length set to 10 KW acquisition mode set to normal mode and accumulation function OFF 4 Record length displayed on the screen 5 Typical values are described in terms of typical of average performance However they cannot be guaranteed IM 701530 01E 16 1 suoneouioeds a 16 2 Trigger Section Item Specifications Trigger source power source signal EXT signal input to the TRIG IN terminal CH1 CH2 CH3 and CH4 signal which is input to each input terminal LINE commercial Trigger type Edge trigger Window Trigger TV Trigger OR Trigger optional Pattern trigger optional Width trigger optional Activates a trigger on the edge of a single trigger source Activates a trigger when the source level of channel either enters a previously set range of voltages or protrudes from a previously set range of
146. DL h40C S40ClUN Digital Oscilloscope USER S MANUAL YOKOGAWA 4 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 701530 01E 2nd Ed iti ition Introduction Notes Trademarks Revisions Disk No DL26 2nd Edition May 2000 YK Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA DL1540C DL1540CL Digital Oscilloscope This User s Manual contains useful information about the functions and operating procedures of the instrument mainly DL1540C It also contains precautions that should be observed during use Main differences in the specifications between DL1540C and DL1540CL is that DL1540CL allows record length of up to 2M words Due to these differences functions and operations differ slightly among these models For a detailed description refer to the relevant sections of this manual To ensure correct use of the instrument please read this manual thoroughly before operating it Keep the manual in a safe place for quick reference whenever a question arises Two manuals are provided with the instrument in addition to this manual Manual Name Manual No Description DL1540C 1540CL IM701530 02E Describes basic operations only Operation Guide DL1540C 1540CL 1M701530 11E Describes the communications functions Communication Interface for the GP IB RS 232 C interface User s Manual The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of improvements in the instrument s performance and functions Display content
147. FF or BMP only 22 Press the Compression soft key to set compression ON or OFP Entering the filename 22 Press the FileName soft key to display the keyboard 23 Use the keyboard to enter the filename For details regarding the usage of the keyboard refer to page 4 8 Outputting 24 Press the COPY key Auto naming function AutoFile If AutoFile has been set to ON a number 3 digits starting from 001 will be assigned to the data automatically when the data is saved It is possible to insert a common file name up to five characters before the assigned number by specifying the file name using FileName Selecting the data output format Format The data output format can be selected from the following formats HP GL Saves image data in HP GL format PS Saves image data in PostScript format TIFF Saves image data in TIFF format BMP Saves image data in BMP format About saved image data When saving image data extensions are automatically added The DL MISC directory is created automatically and the data is saved into this directory The extensions are as follows HPGL HGL TIFF TIF PS PS BMP BMP 13 14 IM 701530 01E 13 7 Saving Screen Image Data Selecting the paper size These Setup settings are necessary for printing out image data from a PC or such to a plotter The contents of printing paper size printing size and prin
148. FT computation is G R jl the power spectrum can be expressed as follows 247 Power spectrum 10 log R 3 R Real Part I Imaginary Part Reference value 0 dB of log mag 1 Vrms IM 701530 01E 1 19 suonounJ 1 6 Other Useful Functions Auto Set up page 4 2 This function makes settings automatically such as vertical sensitivity time axis and trigger settings to suit the signal to be measured This is useful when the signal to be measured is unknown However there might be particular signals for which the auto set up function may not work properly Initialization page 4 4 This function resets the key settings to the factory settings default settings and is useful when complex settings have been made and you want to cancel all of them at once Snapshot page 4 5 If single mode is not selected as the trigger mode a waveform is updated at the specified intervals or is displayed in roll mode Thus to retain the currently displayed waveform acquisition must be stopped Use of the snapshot function allows the currently displayed waveforms to remain temporarily on the screen without acquisition being stopped To activate this function just press the SNAP SHOT key without stopping acquisition The currently displayed waveform will be retained This waveform is called a snapshot waveform The snapshot waveform is displayed with a different intensity from that used for the updated waveform making compariso
149. Format ESC P2 BJ PCLS LPS PR201 repr BJ Printed by Canon Bubble Jet BJC 440J 1998 11 19 13 26 18 NORMEZMS s 2 0us div Stopped q 200us div i CH1 ON i 50B0mV div 1001 i nc U 00 v i CH2 OFF T UmV div 10 1 r DC o 000 CH3 OFF TAN dlv 10 1 Dc 0 007 CH4 OFF 1V div 10 1 Dc 9 00V Record Length Main 10K Zoom TK Format ESC P ESC P2 PCLS5 LPS PR2U1 ECT T 1 0 1 2 IM 701530 01E 10 7 Printing the Screen Image to an External Printer PCL5 Printed by HEWLETT PACKARD Desk Jet 880C 1998 11 19 10 44 50 NORM 5MS s 200us div Stopped 3 200us div cut ON 5 mV div 10 1 DC pc Format ESC P ESC P2 BJ Pes LIPS PR201 reememr 7T LIPS Printed by Canon Laser Shot A404F 1898 11 19 134747 NORM5MS s 0Dus div Stopped Ja 200us div 9 00 v CH2 OFF 200my div 10 1 nooy CH3 OFF U N div 101 oc 000v CH4 OFF Widiv 101 DE 0 00 Record Length Main 10K Zoom mK CHi or 5 0mv div 10 Dc 0 000 CH2 OF gerast Format ESC P ESC P2 Ern 200mVv div 10 pC 0 0005 CH3 OF 1V div 10 Dc 8 005 CH4 OF Widiv 10 Dc gom Record Length Main 10 Zoom 1 PR201 Printed by Canon Laser Shot A404F 1998 11 19 13 51 37 Stopped NORM MS s z Dus div 3 200us div
150. I CURSOR Cursor Type Cursor Tour oor onse o a m rere 24 CH1 Coupling Probe Invert CO Hold AC GND tot ou gl on 901v Page 8 1 8 6 Page 5 2 5 4 5 5 popon Position T POSITION PoslUn TG i Xi TE Cursor p adiv Odiy 4div oolp MEASURE E ox getup Setup Eoo exco nextmenu 5ajaw Page 5 12 Page 8 8 TYPE Trigger Type FFT Phase WE now Tv OR PATTERN WIDTH mm EAA E Page 6 2 6 4 6 5 6 8 6 9 6 11 1 2 gt 3 1 2 gt 3 1x2 gt 3 D0 kiiv Page 8 19 DEUM i FFT T Wind Displ race indow isplay A Jio mcr Sarr Page 8 21 CH1 Mode Ice tever sero io CH2 CH3 CHA EXT LINE f He R a Page 9 1 9 8 Page 6 2 6 4 6 5 6 8 6 9 6 11 COPY 7 E Tigger Mode ke Stops when executing printout EXIDEN AT LVL NORMAL SGL S SGL L N saL MP Stops when saving image screen data ACTION Page 6 13 Page 10 3 10 7 10 10 10 11 12 14 ua cor Copy Ti Comment Keyboard Sa Action On Trigger opy To eyboar E ree PDIP DACO EXEC 2 prams ems ee eem ON ACTON Page 6 15 Page 10 3 10 7 10 9 10 10 10 11 12 11 STORE RECALL z TA Data T COUPLING EX oc Em L WAVE SETUPS FILE Page 11 1 11 3 Page 6 17 STORERECALL Data Type AutoFile P utility P P ACQ SETUP pd on p Page 12 2 12 4 12 9 12 14 MISC Trigger Time Date Infor Config To POSITION Trigger Position To Trigger Knob Position J Base COMM Time mation NextMenu DELAY adiv Odiv adiv Eu eras Oojjav KEYBOARD
151. IAL EXEC soft key to execute initialization INITIAL r3 EXEC INITIALIZE key E keys J f Explanation Default settings related to the vertical and horizontal axes CH1 to CH4 All channels ON V DIV 50 V div POSITION The horizontal position is set to Odiv For the vertical position refer to the figures Two channels Four channels given under title POSITION in section 4 2 INPUT Input coupling DC Probe attenuation 10 1 Inversion OFF TIME DIV 1 ms div TIMEBASE INT Default settings related to trigger MODE AUTO FUNCTION EDGE LEVEL SOURCE Trigger source CH1 Trigger slope Trigger level 0 V COUPLING Trigger coupling AC HF rejection OFF POSITION Center of the waveform display frame DELAY Delay time 0 s HOLD OFF Mode OFF Hold off time MIN 0 2us Default settings related to other settings ACQUISITION Mode NORMAL LENGTH for DL1540CL Record length 10K FILTER Smoothing OFF Band limit FULL DISPLAY Interpolation SINE X Y display OFF Accumulate OFF Wide screen OFF DISPLAY FORM Graticule GRID Scale ON Marker OFF Waveform information ON Intensity TEXT 9 SHIFT OFF LED is not lit Settings which cannot be initialized In the following cases the settings which were in effect before initialization will be retained e
152. Jer euJeiu eui Jo e91 eq ISOS 9y Woy eyeq Duipeo pue Bunes 13 10Copy ing the Data Saved on the Internal Hard Disk option to the Floppy Disk Keys and Procedure Rotary knob r Soft keys Y f O cmo Y Y Y J C X Y J STORE RECALL FILE key SHIFT key Explanation 1 Following the steps described in section 13 1 select the internal hard disk as the media Media Data Type AutoFile HD P P ACQ SETUP on Utility 2 Press the Utility soft key to display the utility selection menu List Func Copy Disk To P P Protect HDOFD Format Info TopMenu 3 Press the List soft key to display the list selection menu Change Data List ACQ jACQ ASC SETUP I2C NextMenu THIET mO ropen 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired list 001 00 01 26 15 50 28 002 00 01 26 155122 003 00 01 26 15 56 14 004 00 01 26 15 56 50 005 00 01 26 16 04 48 006 00 01 26 16 06 54 007 00 01 26 17 51 00 008 00 01 26 17 51 32 E Turn the rotary knob to select the name of the file to be copied 6 Press the Copy HD FD soft key to execute the copy operation List Func Copy Disk To p p Protect HDOFD Format Info TopMenu
153. K 100M 100 x 2 20K x 2 28K x 2 100M 250 x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 10s 500 50K 56K 1k 100K 120K 100M 250 x 2 25K x 2 28K x 2 100M 500 x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 5s 1k 50K 56K 2k 100K 120K 100M 500 x 2 25K x 2 28K x 2 100M 1k x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 2s 2k 40K 56K 5k 100K 120K 100M 1k x 2 20K x 2 28K x 2 100M 2 5k x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 1s 5k 50K 56K 10k 100K 120K 100M 2 5k x 2 25K x 2 28K x 2 100M 5k x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 500ms 10k 50K 56K 20k 100K 120K 100M 5k x 2 25K x 2 28K x 2 100M 10k x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 200ms 20k 40K 56K 50k 100K 120K 100M 10k x 2 20K x 2 28K x 2 100M 25k x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 100ms 50k 50K 56K 100k 100K 120K 100M 25k x 2 25K x 2 28K x 2 100M 5Ok x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 50ms 100k 50K 56K 200k 100K 120K 100M 50k x 2 25K x 2 28K x 2 100M 100k x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 20ms 200k 40K 56K 500k 100K 120K 100M 100k x 2 20K x 2 28K x 2 100M 250k x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 10ms 500k 50K 56K 1M 100K 120K 100M 250k x 2 25K x 2 28K x 2 100M 500k x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 5ms 1M 50K 56K 2M 100K 120K 100M 500k x 2 25K x 2 28K x 2 100M 1M x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 2ms 2M 40K 56K 5M 100K 120K 100M 1M x 2 20K x 2 28K x 2 100M 2 5M x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 1ms 5M 50K 56K 10M 100K 120K 100M 2 5M x 2 25K x 2 28K x 2 100M BM x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 500us 10M 50K 56K 20M 100K 120K 100M 5M x 2 25K x 2 28K x 2 100M 10M x 2 50K x 2 60K x 2 200us 20M 40K 56K 50M 100K 120K 100M 10M x 2 20K x 2 28K x 2 100M 10M x 2 20K
154. MS s or 100 MS s the sampling mode is switched to the repetitive sampling mode automatically In this mode sampling is performed only once for each cycle of a repetitive signal and several cycles are needed to form a waveform It appears as if the signal is sampled at a sample rate higher than the actual rate An apparent sample rate of up to 20 GS s can be used However the maximum observable frequency is 150 MHz due to the instrument s frequency characteristics With DL1540CL it is not possible to set T div if the maximum display record length is 400 KW or more There are two repetitive sampling methods sequential sampling in which a signal is sampled sequentially at a fixed interval and random sampling in which a signal is sampled at random to produce a waveform This instrument uses a random sampling method which also enables observation of the waveform up to the trigger point Time axis setting and roll mode display If trigger mode described on page 1 10 is set to auto mode or auto level mode and T div is Set between 50 ms div and 50 s div the display will not be updated by trigger anymore update mode but the mode will switch to roll mode when new data is acquired In roll mode the oldest data is deleted and the waveform shifts from right to left on the screen A waveform can be observed in the same way as itis recorded on a pen recorder This mode is useful when you are observing a signal which repeats or which fluctuates slowly
155. Min 2 000v Rms 17 47V Rms 17 86V Rms 37 85V Rms 37 22V Avr 2 172V Avr 1 595V Avr 27 95 Avr 28 19V Ovr 4 3 Ovr 4 2 Ovr 3 8 Ovr 4 2 4Ovr 8 7 4Ovr 4 2 40vr 0 0 40vr 4 2 High 20 00v High 22 00v High 54 00 High 52 00V Low 26 00V Low 26 00 Low 2 000 Low 4 000V Rise 370 0us Rise 380 0us Rise 10 00us Rise 10 00us Fall 380 0us Fall 380 0us Fall 10 00us Fall 10 00us Freq 684 9Hz Freq 684 9Hz Freq 675 7Hz Freq 675 7Hz Prod 1 460ms Prod 1 460ms Prod 1 480ms Prod 1 480ms d 780 0us Wd 740 0us Hd 740 0us d 740 0us wd 680 0us wd 720 0us Wd 740 0us Wi 740 0us Duty 53 4 Duty 50 7 Duty 50 0 Duty 50 0 ITY 87 74E 0311TY 72 46E 0311TY 281 8E 0311TY 282 4E 03 I2TY 21 70E 0312TY 15 94E 03I2TY 279 8E 0312TY 282 2E 03 HXY Diy Diy I2XY Diy 1993 11 20 11 33 55 NORMS00kS s 2ms div Stopped E Setting the printing type SHORT short copy Select this type of output if you want to printout an exact copy of the screen It looks as the figure below f f h r Mode RUTO k ARAR Ang Type EDGE 2ms div Printout of chanel infomation record lengths filter settings and trigger settings Fater Smoothing OFF BW FULL Trigger Source cH amp cH1 CHi Couping Probe Invert ACO Hold Offset oc Eri ou AC GND 10 4 ON aly 10 4 IM 701530 01E 10 2 Printing Waveforms and Additional Information using th
156. Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active At Least One of CH3 CH4 is ON CH3 CH4 are Both OFF When ye Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate recordlengih rate recordlength rate recordlength rate record length rate record length T div S s word S s word S s word S s word S s word 50s 2 1K 2K 2 1K 2K 2 1K 2K 2 1K 2K 100M 1 x2 500x 2 1Kx2 20s 5 1K 2K 5 1K 2K 5 1K 2K 5 1K 2K 100M 2 5 x 2 500 x 2 1K x 2 gt 10s 10 1K 2K 10 1K 2K 10 1K 2K 10 1K 2K 100M 5 x 2 500 x 2 1K x 2 amp 5s 20 1K 2K 20 1K 2K 20 1K 2K 20 1K 2K 100M 10 x2 500 x 2 1K x 2 p 2s 50 1K 2K 50 1K 2K 50 1K 2K 50 1K 2K 100M 25 x 2 500 x 2 1K x 2 3 1s 100 1K 2K 100 1K 2K 100 1K 2K 100 1K 2K 100M 50 x2 500x2 1K x2 5 500ms 200 1K 2K 200 1K 2K 200 1K 2K 200 1K 2K 100M 100 x 2 500 x 2 1K x 2 fe 200ms 500 1K 2K 500 1K 2K 500 1K 2K 500 1K 2K 100M 250 x 2 500 x 2 1K x 2 100ms 1k 1K 2K 1k 1K 2K 1k 1K 2K 1k 1K 2K 100M 500 x 2 500 x 2 1K x 2 50ms 2k 1K 2K 2k 1K 2K 2k 1K 2K 2k 1K 2K 100M 1kx 2 500 x 2 1Kx 2 20ms 5k 1K 5k 1K 5k 1K 5k 1K 100M 2 5k x 2 500 x 2 10ms 10k 1K 10k 1K 10k 1K 10k 1K 100M 5k x2 500 x2 5ms 20k 1K 20k 1K 20k 1K 20k 1K 100M 10k x 2 500 x 2 2ms 50k 1K 50k 1K 50k 1K 50k 1K 100M 25k x 2 500 x 2 ims 100k 1K 100k 1K 100k 1K 100k 1K 100M 50k x 2 500 x 2 500us 200k 1K 200k
157. ON Displays the channel No voltage axis sensitivity settings input coupling probe attenuation as shown below in addition to the OFF display r Channel No j y Voltage axis sensitivity When the wide screen mode is OFF CHi 2000V CH2 500V CH3 50V CH4 5V the waveform information is displayed bu HET q COO 100 DIE Soe on the outside the waveform display Probe attenuation area on the right nput coupling Points to note concerning the waveform information display Turning ON OFF the waveform information display in the normal screen mode does not affect the information that is displayed on the outside of the waveform display area on the right If a recalled waveform is displayed the memory number and the voltage axis sensitivity are displayed inside the waveform display area f P P waveform data loaded from a floppy disk is displayed the file name and the voltage axis sensitivity will be displayed Up to 8 characters of the file name will be displayed but overlap may occur with other displayed file names depending on the size of the used characters If ACQ waveform data loaded from a floppy disk is displayed the channel No voltage axis sensitivity input coupling and probe attenuation will all be displayed at the site of the waveform The channel No of the channel for which acquisition has been halted i e for which ACQ Hold is set to ON will be highlighted IM 701530 01E 7 17 suomnipuo
158. Page 3 7 5 8 14 3 14 4 Page 6 18 6 19 DataOut Scale Se LCD TO en Page 8 16 14 2 14 6 15 7 For the Comm menu refer to the Communication Holdoff Interface Manual IM 701530 11E Time HOLD OFF e oZus pem pn Displays the keyboard used for entering values Page 6 20 MSS Page 4 7 i xipueddy IM 701530 01E App 1 Appendix 2 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length for DL1540C The record length varies according to the time axis setting as shown below trigger mode auto auto level normal single short hysterisys OFF Rep Repetitive sampling mode 4 When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active At Least One of CH3 CH4 is ON CH3 CH4 are Both OFF When Envelope Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate recordlength rate record length rate jrecordlength rate record length rate record length T div S s word S s word S s word S s word S s word 50s 20 10K 20K 20 10K 20K 20 10K 20K 20 10K 20K 100M 10 x 2 5K x 2 10K x2 20s 50 10K 20K 50 10K 20K 50 10K 20K 50 10K 20K 100M 25 x 2 5K x 2
159. Press the LEVEL SOURCE key to display the trigger source state selection menu 3 Press the CIkCH soft key to display the clock channel L J I e NES selection menu The default value is X CH1 Qu CH2 CH3 CH4 Condtn CikcH tevel H L x Y m Soft keys H L H L H L ENTER onov TYPE key LEVEL SOURCE key Activating a trigger by state pattern only 4 Press the X soft key 5 Press the trigger source soft key and select the state Do this for all trigger sources In case H or L has been selected use the rotary knob to set the trigger level as well Skip to step 7 CH2 CHI CH3 CH4 condtn CIKCH pea LX H x n L n ENTER x i Activating a trigger in synchronization with the clock signal 4 Continuing from step 3 select the desired clock channel and press the corresponding soft key 5 Select the trigger slope of the clock channel using the soft keys and then use the rotary knob to set the trigger level CH3 CHI CH2 CH4 Condtn CIkCH itr Lx H EH x Y HL TRUE CH3 6 Press the trigger source soft key for the channels which are not clock channel and select the trigger state In case H or L has been selected use the rotary kn
160. RS 232 C Interface Item Connector type Remote mode can be cleared by pressing the LOCAL key except when local lock out has been set DL1540C DL1540CL can use a SCSI device through the RS 232 C interface unit 700927 sold separately Specifications DELC J9PAF 13L6 JAE or equivalent Electrical specifications Conforms to EIA RS 232 C Standard Connection format point to point Communication format full duplex Synchronizing format Start stop asynchronous transmission Baud rate 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 SCSI Small Computer System Interface tem Interface standard You need to be using a model with the internal hard disk DL1540CL C8 option or the SCSI interface unit 700930 sold separately Specifications Conforms to ANSI X3 131 1986 for SCSI Small Computer System Interface Connector shape Half pitch 50 pins Converting to the pin type is possible with the SCSI adapter accessory Half pitch 50 pins pin type FUJITSU FCN 234D50 G O Electrical specifications Single end see IM700930 01E for pin configurations Single end built in terminator always ON SCSI Devices that can be Used format in HD Drives SCSI HD drives for MS DOS ver 3 3 or later or SCSI HD drives that can EZ SCSI MO Drives 128 230 640 MB drives MO media uses Semi IBM format ZIP Drives PD Drives 1 Applies to models other than the DL1540CL with the C8
161. SC key r Soft keys Output setting menu in case PS is selected COPY MENU key SHIFT key Paper Size File Setup au SA4 SETUP A5 UpperWAVE A5 LowerWAVE AS UpperWAVE amp AS LowerSETUP A5 UpperWAVE amp AS LowerMEASURE Output setting menu in case HPGL is selected Paper Size Pen Speed XY Mode Pen Mode Auto Pen File Setup A3 WAVE A3 SETUP ECESTXISIAA SETUP A5 UpperWAVE A5 LowerWAVE AS UpperWAVE amp AS LowerSETUP A5 UpperWAVE amp AS LowerMEASURE sow LINE AUTO MANUAL 5 1 Following the steps described in section 13 1 select the SCSI device or the internal hard disk as the media 2 Press the SHIFT COPY MENU key to display the copy setting menu Copy To Comment FLOPPY O ON Keyboard 3 Press the Copy To soft key to display the image file setting menu PRNTR PLTR 4 Press the SCSI or HD soft key to set the SCSI device or the internal hard disk as the save destination Copy To GP IB Malen SCSI HD Turning ON OFF the auto naming function 5 Press the AutoFile soft key to select ON or OFF For more details concerning this func
162. SE Draws a horizontal line to a point directly above or below the next data point and then interpolates using two dots so that the end of the horizontal line is connected to the next data point by a vertical line Note or less OFF can always be selected LINE SINE and PULSE can only be selected if the number of display points per division is 50 7 12 IM 701530 01E 7 8 Displaying an Accumulated Waveform Keys and Procedure Rotary knob 1 Press the DISPLAY key to display the setting menu 2 Press the Accumu soft key to display the accumulated waveform selection menu Accumulation r Soft keys is 3 After step 2 has been completed press the Persist soft key T 4 Turn the rotary knob to set the desired accumulation time Display Intrpl x Y Accumu Time All Disp Wide_Scrn iir SINE OFF OFF Stamp EXEC ON e Accumulation with colored waveform DISPLAY key Explanation 3 After step 2 has been completed press the Color soft key Intrpl xv ficcumulate Mode ide Sern intr i SINE OFF Persist Color or on 4 Turn the rotary knob to set the desired grade width Grade Intrpl x Accumu Display Wide Scrn SINE OFF Color Number ON
163. START STOP key O emu l H Displaying a specific data by selecting its number i HISTORY i ctos 4 Use the rotary knob to set the number of the data you want to see display number The corresponding waveform will appear ACQ HISTORY key on the screen SHIFT key Display d History Time All Disp Number OFF Ea Stamp EXEC zs Displaying a specific acquired data by selecting its time of acquisition 5 Continuing from step 3 press the Time Stamp soft key to display the list of acquired data with their acquisition times Display History Time All Disp Mamer OFF Stamp EXEC 6 Use the rotary knob to highlight the data you want to see Stopped Time Stamp 020 16 02 53 040 16 02 54 060 16 02 54 080 16 02 55 001 16 02 53 021 16 02 53 041 16 02 54 061 16 02 54 081 16 02 55 002 16 02 53 022 16 02 53 042 16 02 54 062 16 02 54 082 16 02 55 003 16 02 53 023 16 02 53 043 16 02 54 063 16 02 54 083 16 02 55 004 15 02 53 024 16 02 53 044 16 02 54 064 16 02 54 084 16 02 55 005 16 02 53 025 16 02 54 045 16 02 54 065 16 02 54 085 16 02 55 006 16 02 53 026 16 02 54 046 16 02 54 066 16 02 54 086 16 02 55 007 16 02 53 027 16 02 54 047 16 02 54 067 16 02 54 087 16 02 55 008 16 02 53 028 16 02 54 048 16 02 54 068 16 02 54 088 16 02 55 009 16 02 53 029 16 02 54 049 16 02 54 069 16 02 54 089 16 02 55 010 16 02 53 030 16 02 54 050
164. Select the trigger states for all trigger sources Make sure to select the trigger slope for the selected clock channel f you want to activate a trigger in synchronization with the clock signal make sure that the pattern set up time is 2 ns or more relative to the clock and that the hold time is 0 ns or less 6 10 IM 701530 01E 6 7 Setting the Width Trigger Optional Keys and Procedure Selecting the width trigger Rotary Knob 1 Press the TYPE key to display the trigger type selection menu 2 Press the Width soft key to display the width condition menu Time r Soft keys l EDGE WINDOW OM DE EXTERNES 0 00gus EC T I H Sri 3 Select the width condition by pressing any of the PULSE lt T m j PULSE gt T or TIMEOUT soft keys Time O i ondition t Y Y Y 1 1 pz na TIMEOUT Topher 0 003us TYPE key i LEVEL SOURCE Key 4 Turn the rotary knob to set the desired pulse time Time Width Condition To ETE TIMEOUT TopMenu 92s Selecting the trigger source state and setting the trigger level 5 Press the LEVEL SOURCE key to display the trigger source selection menu 6 Press the soft key corr
165. T key or the ESC key to close the count setting box 24 After having selected Threshold of the Measure setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to set the delay detection level to Volts or 96 25 Use the rotary knob to select the screen below and press the SELECT key to display the value setting box 26 Use the rotary knob to set the desired value Press the RESET key to restore the new value to the default value 27 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the value setting box Setting the reference waveform 28 After steps 17 to 25 have been completed and after having selected Trace of the Reference setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select the trace or loaded waveform to be used as reference 29 After having selected Edge Polarity of the Reference setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select rising edge or falling edge 30 After having selected Edge Count of the Reference setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to display the count setting box 31 Use the rotary knob to set the desired count number Press the RESET key to restore the new value to the default value 32 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the count setting box 33 After having selected Threshold of the Reference setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to set the delay detection level to Volts or 96 34 Use the rotary knob to select the screen below an
166. There are two types of messages which are displayed on the screen Status message Displays the currently executing operation and the results Error warning message Displayed if an invalid setting has been made or if the instrument is defective When Maintenance Service is Required Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual Status Message No Message Reference Page 0 Calibration is in progress 4 6 1 Auto setup is in progress 4 2 2 Saving file is in progress 12 4 9 11 3 Loading file is in progress 12 4 9 4 Deleting file is in progress 12 14 5 Disk formatting is in progress 12 2 6 A directory list is currently being created 12 3 7 Set up data has been stored in the internal memory 11 3 8 Displayed waveform has been stored in the internal memory 11 1 9 Printer output is aborted 10 3 11 10 GO NO GO is aborted 9 5 6 10 11 11 Trigger action is aborted 6 15 16 12 DATA output is aborted 13 4 13 Exit from GO NO GO mode 9 5 6 10 11 14 Execution completed x 15 Making bitmap data is in progress 12 11 18 13 16 Copying file is in progress 13 3 Error Warning Message In addition to the messages given below there are also some other error warning messages code Nos 100 to 500 These messages are described in the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701530 11E If an error message other than tho
167. This mode is also useful when you want to detect glitches fast spikes on a waveform which occur intermittently With DL1540CL the time axis range for roll mode varies depending on the maximum display record length Refer to Appendix 3 Roll mode is also turned on when trigger mode is switched to single short long mode but the displayed waveform stops when a trigger is activated since trigger setting is effective in single short long mode AT i IM 701530 01E 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Horizontal Position of the Waveform page 5 12 In case you acquired more data than can be displayed on one 10 div screen i e the record length of the acquisition memory is longer than the record length of one Screen then you can view the data by moving the display position in the time axis direction This might be the case when using the roll mode display or when the trigger mode is set to single long mode for DL1540C The displayed waveform can be moved over a span of 5 div from the center of the screen For more details on the relation between record length of acquisition memory and displayed record length refer to page 1 5 Appendix 2 and Appendix 3 Moving the horizontal position In roll mode the display position can be moved after data acquisition is stopped If the instrument is in a mode other than roll mode the display position can be moved even during data acquisition The follo
168. Trace2 Trace3 Trace4 3 1 95 03 03 10 10 10 Go NoGo Go G 5 2 95 03 03 10 10 12 NoGo Go NoGo Go 10 3 95 03 03 10 10 15 Go NoGo NoGo NoGo 100 100 95 03 03 10 23 10 Go NoGo NoGo Go Forcing determination to stop and clearing the zone waveform To force determination to stop press the ABORT soft key or set Mode at the GO NO GO top menu to OFF To clear the displayed zone waveform switch Mode at the GO NO GO top menu to OFF 9 6 IM 701530 01E 9 1 Judging using a Waveform Zone Points to note relating to zone determination Trigger mode is automatically switched to single short mode single mode irrespective of the selected trigger mode during GO NO GO determination However determination will be repeated if the determination sequence has been set to CONTINUE Even in case the GO NO GO mode at the GO NO GO top menu is changed to OFF again the setting at the trigger mode selection will not become valid again It is not possible to perform zone determination while both pre zoom waveform and its expanded waveform are displayed at the same time or while an FFT or X Y waveform is displayed Neither is it possible to a display zone waveform To perform GO NO GO determination using a zone waveform make sure that the expanded waveform alone is displayed before Mode is set to ON at the GO NO GO top menu The following operations are not possible after having pressed the EXEC soft key
169. Uk i i Filter A i Smoothing OFF i i BW FULL E i H Trigger H Type EDGE ka i H Source CH1 4 i T2 Cursor 1 5 div Measure Item Delay T Range ALL Scan To OFF Setup Setup Ti EXEC NextMenu 8 8 IM 701530 01E 8 3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically Selecting the measurement items The measurement items can be selected from 22 different ones For the meaning of each item refer to the description on page 8 12 4 Press the Measure soft key at the automated measurement setting menu to display the item selection menu 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired trace or loaded waveform number Use the rotary knob to highlight the desired measurement item 7 Press the SELECT key to select an item The selection mark in front of the item will be highlighted to indicate it has been selected Press the SELECT key again to undo this or to reset all selection at once press the ALL CLEAR soft key 8 Repeat step 6 and 7 to select all the desired measurement items The display of the measurement items depends on the number of waveforms to be measured and the selected items Refer to page 8 14 for more details 9 Measure Items UNDERSHOOT J RISE O WIDTH O INTEGITY When selected the mark O OVERSHOOT J FALL O WIDTH J INTEG2TY becomes G HIGH Q FREQ O DUTY J INTEGIXY Use the rotary knob to first highlight an item and then
170. Upper Lower Vidiv limit limit value value Display format Sov M ev The display format depends on the expansion settings Refer to page 7 5 for more 2000 V 90 10 details 1000 V 80 0 500V 80 0 200 V 70 10 Points to note relating to displaying the power spectrum 100V 60 20 FFT computation is not possible in repetitive sampling mode or when the M m acquisition mode is envelope mode 10V 40 40 FFT computation is not possible when the Waveform s Horizontal Position set 5V 40 40 except to Odiv 2V 30 50 1V 20 60 The unit of the voltage axis is ABV 500 mV 20 60 In case the waveform is expanded FFT computation will be carried out on the 200 mV 10 70 100 mV 0 80 expanded range l l l l 50 mv 0 80 FFT computation is not possible when the wide screen mode is turned ON 1 1 ge i Turning ON the FFT while the wide screen mode is ON automatically turns OFF 5mV 20 100 the wide screen mode 2mV 30 110 1mV 40 120 8 20 IM 701530 01E 8 7 Measuring the Power Spectrum using Cursors Keys and Procedure Rotary knob 1 Display the power spectrum For details refer to the previous page 2 Press the CURSOR key to display the cursor measurement setting menu 3e ys ji e 3 Press the Cursor soft key and select ON 4 After having pressed any of the F1 F2 or F1 amp F2 soft keys use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the vertical cur
171. Used to make settings corresponding to the soft key menu displayed above the keys ESC key Deletes the currently displayed menu RESET key Resets the settings made using the rotary knob to their default settings SNAP SHOT LL SNAP SHOT key Page 4 5 ESC Retains the waveform which is displayed FFT DISPLAY FORM RESET when this key is pressed even if updating is performed SELECT key INITIALIZE FILTER measure CURSOR GO NO GO MATH DISPLAY VERTI CAL HORIZONTAL TRIGGER ON OFF m TRIG D Eu cyp 5 3 ed 4 Zoom TYPE MODE POSITION lt gt 7 8 9 V DIV ACTION TIME DIV LEVEL POSITION SOURCE DELAY 5 PosrrioN SELECT Confirms the items and characters selected Rotary knob Used to set values move the cursor and select the desired items mom key COUPLING HOLD OFF Used to shift from one digit to the next of the value you are setting using the AcQ INPUT REMOTELOCAL CAL MISC HISTORY STORE RECALL COPY rotary knob AUTO SETUP key Page 4 2 KEYBOARD INITIALIZE key Page 4 4 Displays the initialization menu which can be used to reset the settings to their default values Page 4 7 L CAL key Pa
172. XEC and ABORT soft keys When saving the screen image data set the image data format You can set the format at the hard copy selection menu that appears by pressing the SHIFT COPY MENU key see page 12 11 IM 701530 01E 9 11 uorov OD ON OD Buruuoped 9 2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform Parameters Example of data format In case of NO GO determination the measurement values will appear For the other contents refer to page 9 6 JudgeCnt NoGoCnt Date Time Param1 T1 P P Param2 T2 Max 3 1 95 03 03 10 10 10 Go 2 000e 02V 5 2 95 03 03 10 10 12 1 000e 02V Go 10 3 95 03 03 10 10 15 Go 1 500e 02V 100 100 95 03 03 10 23 10 Go 1 950e 02V Forcing determination to stop To force determination to stop press the ABORT soft key or set Mode at the GO NO GO top menu to OFF Points to note relating to parameter determination Trigger mode is automatically switched to single mode irrespective of the selected trigger mode during GO NO GO determination However determination will be repeated if the determination sequence has been set to CONTINUE Even in case the GO NO GO mode at the GO NO GO top menu is changed to OFF again the setting at the trigger mode selection will not become valid again While both pre zoom waveform and its expanded waveform are displayed at the same time the expanded waveform will become the object of determination The following operations are not possible after having pressed th
173. age 10 4 For HPGL format Setting Output item Output size Output location A3 WAVE Screen hardcopy A3 Middle A3 SETUP Set up parameters A3 Middle A4 WAVE Screen hardcopy A4 Middle A4 SETUP Set up parameters A4 Middle A5 Upper WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 Lower WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Lower half A5 Upper WAVE amp Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 Lower SETUP Set up parameters A5 Lower half A5 Upper WAVE amp Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 Lower MEASURE waveform measurement data A5 Lower half 12 12 IM 701530 01E 12 5 Saving Screen Image Data CAUTION For PS format Setting Output item Output size Output location A4 WAVE Screen hardcopy A4 Middle A4 SETUP Set up parameters A4 Middle A5 Upper WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 Lower WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Lower half A5 Upper WAVE amp Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 Lower SETUP Set up parameters A5 Lower half A5 Upper WAVE amp Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 Lower MEASURE waveform measurement data A5 Lower half For TIFF BMP format No selections are possible the output size is approx 12 x 8 cm Contents to be saved In the HP GL and PS format the following types of screen image data are not saved Snapshot waveforms Soft key menu and rotary knob menu e Messages except Stopped and RUNNING In the TIFF and BMP format data will be saved exactly as in case of the short copy Refer
174. age after saving data to the initial floppy disk 6 16 IM 701530 01E 6 10 Setting the Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection Keys and Procedure m Soft keys 1 Press the COUPLING key to display the trigger coupling selection menu 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired trigger coupling 3 In case you want to set HF rejection press the ON soft key at the HF Rej field Coupling HF Rej mo oc do COUPLING key Explanation Selecting the Trigger coupling The following types are available AC The trigger source signal is used as the trigger source after the DC content has been removed The trigger level becomes 0 V DC The trigger source signal is used as the trigger source without any processing The trigger level becomes the center of the amplitude of the trigger source The default value is AC The trigger coupling setting applies to all channels simultaneously Turning HF rejection ON OFF Set to ON if you want to use the trigger source signal as the trigger source after the high frequency content frequency contents exceeding approximately 15 kHz has been removed Points to note when setting the trigger coupling and HF rejection These settings will be ignored if EXT or LINE is selected as the trigger source or TV is selected as
175. al time Printing using the Optional Built in Printer Keys and Procedure 1 Press the SHIFT COPY MENU key to display the hardcopy setting menu Copy To Comment Keyboard PRNTR PLTR FILE GP IB lime ON r Soft keys X X 2 Press the PRNTR soft key to display the printout type selection menu n T I r n o 3 Press the REAL soft key info I Type To OQ ON SHORT LONG TopMenu COPY MENU key Outputting to the printer SHIFT key 4 Press the COPY key to execute the printing Aborting the printing 5 After having performed step 4 press the COPY key again to abort the printing Explanation Chart speed The chart speed depends on the time axis setting as shown in the table below Time axis setting Chart Speed 500 ms div 16 67 mm s 1 s div 8 33 mm s 2 s div 4 17 mm s 5 s div 1 67 mm s 10 s div 0 83 mm s 20 s div 0 42 mm s 50 s div 0 17 mm s Points to note when printing real time Before carrying out real time printing verify the following settings The trigger mode should be set to Auto mode or Auto Level mode The history memory function should be set to OFF The time base should be selected INT For DL1540L the record length must be set to 10 K or 100 K The t
176. alibration method refer to Section 4 5 Performing Calibration page 4 6 Action When Power is Switched OFF Settings made prior to turning OFF the power switch are retained This allows display of waveforms using these saved settings the next time the power switch is turned ON Note 2 The settings are backed up by a lithium battery The battery lasts for approximately five years if it is used at an ambient temperature of 23 C When the battery runs out an icon appears in the top left of the screen In this case the battery needs to be replaced immediately The battery cannot be replaced by the user Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual IM 701530 01E 3 5 Connecting a Probe Input Terminals AN caution A probe or an input cable such as a BNC cable must be connected to one of the input terminals CH1 to CH4 located on the lower section of the front panel The input impedance is 1 MQ 1 5 and approximately 25 pF The maximum input voltage is 250 V DC ACpeak or 177 Vrms when the frequency is 1 kHz or less Never input a voltage exceeding this level as it could damage the input section of the instrument If the frequency exceeds 1 kHz the input section may be damaged even when the voltage is below 250 V 1MQ 25pF lt 250Vpk Points to Note when Connecting a Probe Probe When connecting a probe to the instrument for the first time perform phase correctio
177. an ms j Entry by rotary knob 1 Change the value displayed in the lower right side of the screen by turning the rotary knob 2 When the new value has been selected using the rotary knob use the lt gt keys to move to the next position to be changed Ex CH1 CH Position To Position 3div_ idv Odiv idiv 3div Toodiv Explanation Entry using the keyboard The operation described in step 1 will only result in displaying the corresponding keyboard when the setting allows numerical input Depending on the setting there are cases when units such as k m u symbolizing u EXP and NAN Ignore appear To change such a setting select the correct one using the rotary knob and press the SELECT key Pressing the RESET key will clear the keyboard display Decimal enterings will be rounded as necessary to comply with the step size Entry using the rotary knob Pressing the RESET key will reset the value displayed in the rotary knob menu to the default value factory setting IM 701530 01E 4 7 suoneJedo UOWWOD B 4 7 Entering Characters using the Keyboard Keys and Procedure Rotary knob SELECT key ESC key 1 Display the keyboard used for entering a file name or comment displayed when your are prompted a character input 2 Use the rotary knob to select the desired character or symbol and press the SELECT key The entered character will appear J on the displayed keyboard
178. and 256 in steps of 2 An tN 1 An 1 Xn An Value obtained after nth averaging Xn nth measured value N Attenuation constant IM 701530 01E 7 1 suomnipuoo e dsiq pue uonisinboy Buibueuo 7 1 Selecting Acquisition Mode Sampling Mode and Record Length for DL1540CL Selecting sampling mode Repetitive A sampling mode can be selected provided that the selected T div setting allows sampling both in real time and repetitive modes However the repetitive sampling mode is not effective when the trigger mode is set to single long mode Furhermore the repetitive sampling mode cannot be set in case of the single N trigger mode when the history memory function is used or in case FFT is used T div settings which enable the selection of the sampling mode are from 5 us to 100 ns div Selecting the maximum displayable record length for DL1540CL You can set the maximum displayable record length to 1 KW 10 KW 100 KW 400 KW 1 MW or 2 MW The default selection is 10 KW The following restrictions apply Time axis settings from 50 ns to 5 ns cannot be used in combination with 400 KW 1 MW and 2 MW record lengths If the time axis value is already set within this range the 400 KW 1 MW and 2 MW selections will not be available f the selected record length is 400 KW or 2 MW certain time axis settings will produce waveform display over eight divisions only with no waveform appearing over the two r
179. anelo c e e eta ads 2 1 2 2 M IUE recalling Vd rue setting parameters sese 1 21 11 3 seing parameters s E a waveform data nalen DEB reference waveform ecccecesecseseseeeeseseeeeeeteeseateeeeeeeee 8 10 lorig CODy cider irr ere trem eret 10 5 rejection HF 1 11 6 17 M Iun 7 2 repetitive sampling mode esee 1 6 F015 EET non py ny OTE p HRSONMION sen saseiey utc eh whole MainZoom display cs 1 14 7 4 roll mode eseseeeneenenennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 5 12 Math vision trie canoe ly 1 19 8 18 S measurement automated tut tren tite eene 1 18 8 8 dO MEME MM SM M 1 18 8 1 SINE sagged ete odiedes dunque 7 12 HIGH HEU Ire ote Im c e pte App 1 safety precautions 00 ee cece eee cess see eeeeseeeeeneeeeaeenees 5 iiesialivalUe rer REIR nee ERU 8 9 SAMPE TATE Voces nire og iR onim App 2 App 5 moving range esesescesescsssseesssesesesceseceseaeseseeeeeeseseees 5 7 5 12 ESIpung MORE ess qusc agn A sampling poibt e enirn b nennen mentre 1 6 N saving screen image data esessesses 12 11 13 13 NESGL ai nean ende re ene 6 14 wal 129 A Turc PAM NM HM HS EES MNT 6 5 wavelorm gatas ii Sear fiBitrialHfioUace Que ta be carded FAO BAS vd EN ede Tapa screen intensily 5 eee Een 7 18 O AIEE PE E LE 15 6 sequential store 1 14 7 7 OR Trigger t EC
180. ansion Rate Expansion rate limits ZOOM Mode ZOOM Knob or NIE zoom OO POS Mainzoom H ZOOM The expansion rate which can be set varies according to the specified record length of the pre zoom waveform The specified record length depends on the model time axis setting sampling mode and trigger mode For more details refer to Appendix 2 Appendix 3 The following table shows the maximum expansion rates for some record lengths Displayed record length 2M 8div 2M 1M 800K 8div 500K 400K 8div Maximum expansion rate 25000 20000 10000 10000 5000 5000 Setting position step div 0 00002 0 00001 0 00001 0 00001 0 00002 0 00002 Displayed record length 400K 200K 160K 8div 100K 50K 40K Maximum expansion rate 4000 2000 2000 1000 500 400 Setting position step div 0 00005 0 00005 0 00005 0 0001 0 0002 0 0005 Displayed record length 20K 10K 5K 4K 2K 1K Maximum expansion rate 200 100 50 40 20 10 Setting position step div 0 0005 0 001 0 002 0 005 0 005 0 01 Displayed record length 500 400 200 100 Maximum expansion rate 5 4 2 1 Setting position step div 0 02 0 05 0 05 0 1 7 4 IM 701530 01E 7 3 Zooming the Waveform Expansion rate steps Depending on the T div value the expansion rate steps are as follows In case of 50 s 5 s 500 ms 50 ms 5 ms 500 us 50 us and 5 us div X1 x2 5 x5 x10 x25 x50 x100 x250 x500 x1000 x2500 x5000 x1000
181. axis accuracy 5 V div to 1 V div 2 5 of setting 20 mV 500 mV div to 100 mV div 1 96 of setting 2 mV 50 mV div to 1 mV div 2 5 of setting 0 2 mV Frequency characteristics 5 V div to 10 mV div Repetitive DC to 150 MHz 3 dB point when sine wave of Single DC to 80 MHz when using CH1 2 simultaneously amplitude 4 div is input measuring DC to 40 MHz when using 3 4 Ch simultaneously measuring 5 mV div Repetitive DC to 80 MHz Single DC to 80 MHz when using CH1 2 simultaneously measuring DC to 40 MHz when using 3 4 Ch simultaneously measuring 2 mV div 1 mV div DC to 20 MHz 3 dB point when AC coupling used 10 Hz or below 1 Hz or below in case the accessory 10 1 probe is being used Inter channel skew 2 ns or less under the same conditions Residual noise level 3 0 7 mV or 0 12 div typical value 5 whichever greater Inter channel isolation 40 dB typical value 5 same voltage axis sensitivity DC to 150 MHz A D converter resolution 8 bit 25 LSB div Probe attenuation 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 Bandwidth limit Bandwidth limit can be turned ON OFF for 20 MHz Maximum sampling rate real time sampling mode 2 channels measurement 200 MS s CH1 CH2 3 4 channels measurement 100 MS s repetitive sampling mode 20 GS s Maximum Record length For DL1540C When trigger mode is single long mode 2 channels measurement 120 K 100 K 4 W
182. ay time is the duration between the point at which a trigger is activated and the point at which data acquisition starts gee position Delay time 1 _l__ Trigger point The setting range is 0 to 9 999 s The setting step is as follows Setting time Setting step 0 to 999 9 ns 0 1 ns 1 us to 9 999 us 1ns 10 us to 99 99 us 10 ns 100 usto 999 9 us 100 ns 1 ms to 9 999 ms 1us 10 ms to 99 99 ms 10 us 100 ms to 999 9 ms 100 us 1 s to 9 999 s 1 ms Points to note when setting the delay time A delay time cannot be set if the external clock has been selected as the timebase The setting will be invalid if sampling is performed using the external clock IM 701530 01E 6 19 JeDBu e BuneAnoy H 6 13 Setting the Hold off Time Keys and Procedure 1 Press the HOLD OFF key to display the hold off time setting Rotary knob menu 2 Turn the rotary knob to set the desired hold off time You can also use the lt or gt keys Turning the rotary knob switches the r Soft keys Y Mode ON automatically X Y J Holdott UJ C3 J i e ES s OQ pam 3 To deactivate the hold off function press the Mode soft key and select OFF Holdoff HOLD OFF key Ti y un adus Explanation Hold off time settin
183. b eer 3div 1div Odiv 1div 3div CH O div Source MEM itt EXEC IM 701530 01E 11 1 Asoway jeuJe1u eui wou ejeq uieoen pue Bunos 11 1 Storing and Recalling Displayed Waveforms Explanation Canceling the display of the recalled waveform 13 Press the CH key of the channel corresponding to the number of the recalled waveform The recall waveform ON OFF menu appears Note that by alternately pressing the CH key the acquisition waveform also dis appears 14 Press the MEM soft key to select OFF and the recalled waveform will be canceled Selecting ON results in displaying the recalled waveform Mem ON Selecting the waveform to be stored Source The waveform to be stored can be selected from any displayed waveform either input signal waveforms or computed waveforms at Trace 1 to 4 X Y waveforms cannot be stored Selecting the destination memory Destn The destination memory can be selected from the four internal memories MEM 1 to MEM 4 Be aware that when storing the data previous data will be overwritten and thus lost Selecting the waveform to be recalled Source Waveforms can be recalled from the internal memories MEM 1 to MEM 4 Selecting the display destination for recalled waveforms Destn Waveforms destination can be selected from the four traces LOAD1 to LOAD
184. ble place Note rc re p T e Internal condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In such cases allow the instrument to acclimatize to its new environment for at least one hour before starting operation 3 2 IM 701530 01E 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord Before Connecting the Power A mm Make sure that you perform the following steps before connecting the power Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the instrument Connect the power cord after confirming that the voltage of the power supply complies to the rated electric power voltage for this instrument Connect the power cord after confirming that the power switch is OFF Always use protective ground to prevent electric shock Connect the accessory power cord to a power outlet with grounding terminal Do not use non grounding extension cords or other measures that defect the protective grounding Never use an extension cord that does not have protective grounding otherwise the protection feature will be negated Connecting the Power Cord 1 Make sure that the main power switch is OFF 2 Plug the power cord into the power connector socket on the rear panel of the instrument 3 Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet that meets the following specifications The AC outlet must be of 3 pin type with a pro
185. cer Trigger point Trigger level 1 por HDTV 7 a F ER Trigger level F Tigger point Setting the trigger level Level Set the difference between the beginning of the synchronization pulse and the level at which the trigger level is judged The setting range is from 0 10 div to 2 00 div The setting resolution is 0 05 div The default settings are given below NTSC PAL 0 50 div HDTV 1 00 div 6 6 IM 701530 01E 6 4 Setting the TV Trigger Setting frame skip Frame This is a function for skipping frames when the color burst is inverted on every frame You can select how many frames to skip from the following choices Frame Trigger every frame at the specified field Frame2 Trigger every two frames at the specified field Frame4 Trigger every four frames at the specified field Frame8 Trigger every eight frames at the specified field However the frame skip function can be used only for the following cases For all other frame periods set HoldOff NTSC with 60 Hz frame period PAL with 50 Hz frame period HDTV with 60 Hz frame period NOlG e M Frames will not be skipped if you change the HoldOff setting after setting the frame skip function If you wish to trigger using the frame skip function make the Frame selection again f you select Frame4 or Frames the trigger mode is automatically changed to
186. channel 1 and 2 on DL1540CL Channel 3 and 4 on DL1540CL do not acquire display the waveform When the time axis setting is set to 50 ns to 5 ns range when the trigger mode is not single mode or when one of the two channel 2 or one of the two channel 3 or 4 in the case of DL1540CL is ON maximum display record length of 2 MW for DL1540CL can not be selected For information about selection of maximum displayable record length refer to Section 7 1 page 7 1 CH key operation during waveform math The math waveform will be displayed at trace 3 location where the input signal of channel 3 is usually displayed Even if you press the CH3 key and the indicator is lit the math waveform will be displayed The math waveform consists of data of channel 1 and channel 2 Even when you turn off the display of channel 1 or 2 the math waveform will remain To display the input signal waveform of channel 3 you have to turn OFF waveform math Refer to page 8 18 CH key operation during display of a recalled waveform When you recall waveform data from the internal memory that waveform will appear on the screen To turn the display of the recalled waveform off press the CH key corresponding to the number of the recalled waveform displayed as MEM and select OFF at the appeared menu Refer to page 11 2 step 13 and 14 CH key operation during display of a loaded waveform When you load P P waveform data or acquisition waveform data fr
187. channel for which the probe attenuation is to be selected The input setting menu will be displayed Press the Probe soft key to display the probe selection menu N r Soft keys X X 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired attenuation CH1 CH1 Probe Attenuation Offset CH1 Coupling F 1 1 0 H H 5 c RS o AC ELM ono m IV omy INPUT key Explanation Probe attenuation Probe attenuation can be selected from 1 1 10 1 100 1 and 1000 1 The default is 10 1 Set to 10 1 when using the probe supplied with the instrument Set to 1 1 when using a BNC cable Note The selected probe attenuation will remain unchanged even if auto set up is performed When the probe attenuation is changed the offset voltage also changes accordingly 5 4 IM 701530 01E 5 4 Inverting a Waveform Keys and Procedure 1 Press the INPUT key corresponding to the channel whose waveform is to be inverted The input setting menu will be displayed 2 Press the Invert soft key to select ON r Soft keys EC T I CH1 Offset ogy Co CH1 Coupling Probe Inv
188. ct FULL r Soft keys j E Y Applying the smoothing function 2 After step 1 has been completed press the Smoothing soft TOT key and select ON To stop smoothing select OFF CO uH Ta PT un FILTER key Explanation Bandwidth limit The bandwidth frequency limit can be 20MHz The frequency characteristic when the bandwidth limit is applied is shown below When FULL is selected the frequency bandwidth is 150 MHz 3 dB 20 MHz FULL 150 MHz Smoothing process A moving average value is obtained for each five points of sampling data and the data obtained is used when displaying the waveform This process is performed on the data in the acquisition memory so it can still continue even if acquisition is stopped The following frequency characteristic of the smoothing process is dependent on the sample rate The attenuation rate will be 3 dB when the frequency is approximately 1396 of the sample rate When the acquisition mode is envelope mode this process cannot be carried out 0dB 1 3 dB Attenuation f Sample frequency I A 0 13f 0 5 Frequency IM 701530 01E 7 3 SUOIIPUOD ejds q pue uonisinboy BuibueyyD 7 3 Zooming the Waveform Keys and Procedure r Soft keys Rotary knob
189. ctive When Envelope Mode is At Least One of CH3 CH3 CH4 are Both Active CH4 is ON OFF Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record length rate record length rate record length T div S s word S s word S s word 50s 2 1K x 100 2 1Kx100 100M 1 x 2 500x2x 100 20s 5 1K x 100 5 1Kx100 100M 2 5 x2 500x2x 100 10s 10 1K x 100 10 1Kx 100 100M 5 x 2 500x2x 100 5s 20 1K x 100 20 1Kx100 100M 10 x2 500x2x100 2s 50 1K x 100 50 1Kx100 100M 25 x2 500x2x 100 1s 100 1K x 100 100 1Kx 100 100M 50 x 2 500 x 2x 100 500ms 200 1K x 100 200 1K x 100 100M 100 x 2 500 x 2 x 100 200ms 500 1Kx100 500 1Kx100 100M 250 x 2 500x 2x 100 100ms 1k 1K x 100 1k 1Kx100 100M 500 x 2 500 x 2 x 100 50ms 2k 1K x 100 2k 1Kx100 100M 1kx 2 500x2x100 20ms 5k 1K x 100 5k 1Kx100 100M 2 5k x 2 500 x 2x 100 10ms 10k 1K x 100 10k 1Kx100 100M 5k x2 500x2x100 5ms 20k 1K x 100 20k 1Kx100 100M 10k x 2 500x2x 100 2ms 50k 1K x 100 50k 1Kx100 100M 25k x 2 500x2x 100 1ms 100k 1K x 100 100k 1Kx100 100M 50k x 2 500x2x 100 500us 200k 1K x 100 200k 1Kx100 100M 100k x 2 500 x 2x 100 200us 500k 1K x 100 500k 1Kx100 100M 250k x 2 500 x 2x 100 100us 1M 1K x 100 1M 1Kx100 100M 500k x 2 500 x 2x 100 50us 2M 1K x 100 2M 1Kx100 100M 1M x2 500x2x 100 20us 5M 1K x 100 5M 1Kx 100 100M 2 5M x 2 500 x 2x 100 10us 10M 1K x 100 10M 1Kx100 100M 5M x 2 500x2x 100 5us 20M 1K x 100 20M 1Kx 100 100M 10M x 2 500 x 2 x 100
190. cy characteristic when AC or DC is selected is shown below Note that low frequency signals and low frequency contents are not acquired if AC is selected When AC is selected When DC is selected Attenuation Attenuation 0 dB 3 dB 0 dB 3 dB gt gt i 150 MHz 150 MHz less than 10 Hz when using 1 1 probe less than 1 Hz when using 10 1 probe Input frequency Input frequency Offset voltage and vertical sensitivity If DC is selected it is possible to cancel the offset voltage for the input signal The allowable setting range varies depending on the vertical sensitivity as shown in the table below Vertical sensitivity Allowable setting range Setting step 10 mV to 500 mV div 10 V to 10 V 500 uV 1 V to 5 V div 100 V to 100 V 5 mV 10 V to 50 V div 1000 V to 1000 V 50 mV The above values are given for a probe attenuation of 10 1 They will be 1 10 the value shown when the attenuation is 1 1 10 times the value shown when it is 100 1 and 100 times the value shown when it is 1000 1 5 2 IM 701530 01E 5 2 Setting the Input Coupling AN caution Offset voltage and displayed value measured value The offset function eliminates unnecessary DC voltage from an input signal voltage If the offset voltage is set to a positive value the input signal is displayed with the offset voltage subtracted from it as shown below The offset voltage is also subtracted from th
191. d at a screen together with the waveform s depend on the number of waveforms under measurement Furthermore if the number of measurement items exceeds the maximum which can be displayed the type of measurement items which will appear on the display is designated The following shows an example where the type of displayed measurement values is designated In case of one waveform under measurement Measurement values of selected measurement items and delay between channels will all be displayed Tracel P P 52 00 Max 26 00 Min 26 00V Rms 17 694 Avg 700 6mv Ovr 0 0 0vr 0 0 High 26 00Y Low 26 00 Rise 1 600ms Fall 1 560ms Freq 200 0Hz Prod 5 000ms Hd 2 600ms Wi 2 400ms Duty 52 0 I1TY 165E 03 I2TY 13 1E 03 Brst 18 46ms PIsN 4 In case of two waveforms under measurement Up to 12 measurement values of selected measurement items of one waveform will be displayed In case delay measurement is set ON the maximum number of displayed measurement items becomes 11 Tracel P P 52 00V Max 26 00V Min 26 00V Rms 17 69V fivg 700 6mv Ovr 0 0 0vr 0 0 High 26 00 Low 26 00V Rise 1 600ms Fall 1 560ms Freq 200 0Hz Trace2 P P 72 004 Max 36 004 Min 36 00 Rms 24 774 Avg 634 7mv Ovr 0 0 Ovr 0 0 High 36 00 Low 36 00 Rise 1 080ms Fall 1 000ms Freq 301 2Hz In case of three or four waveforms under measurement Up to 6 measurement values of selected measurement items of one waveform will be displayed In case delay measur
192. d press the SELECT key to display the value setting box 35 Use the rotary knob to set the desired value Press the RESET key to restore the new value to the default value 36 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the value setting box 37 Repeat steps 16 to 34 in case you want to set delay measurement for other trace or loaded waveforms Returning to the top menu 38 Press the To Topmenu soft key or the ESC key to return to the automated measurement setting menu 8 10 IM 701530 01E 8 3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically Delay Items Mode or MECUN Select ON when delay Measure measurement is to be done Edge Polarity amp Edge Count 1 mm x Set the measurement Threshold Level conditions 0 0000V Reference Trace DR2NeeETRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 Selects the waveform of LOAD1 LOAD2 LOAD3 LOAD4 reference Edge Polarity Y Edge Count 1 Sets the measurement conditions of the reference channel Threshold Level Volts 0 To To NextMenu TopMenu Switches between menus To To PrvMenu TopMenu Trace2 Trace3 Trace4 Or 5 0 div Load1 Load2 Load3 Load4 Measurement range 1 count N1 count 13 1 100 o 1 60 Setting example Edge Polarity 4 rising Edge Count N1 1 to 9 Threshold Level 60 Reference Ground
193. ding item Assignment of pens to the grid trace and load The grid TRACE1 to TRACE4 and LOAD 1 to LOAD4 can have pens assigned to them as follows Setting Assignment for hardcopy Grid Graticule all cursors trigger position mark date and time comments setup information list measurement values TRACE1 Trace1 waveform ground level trigger level mark voltage axis conditions input coupling probe attenuation TRACE2 to 4 Same as Trace1 LOAD to 4 IM 701530 01E 10 9 Jeyoj d 4e1uug eui 0 sJejeureje gd Dunes pue suuojo eM pef ejdsiq Bumndino 10 6 Entering a Comment Keys and Procedure 1 Press the SHIFT COPY MENU key to display the hardcopy setting menu Entering comments 2 Press the Keyboard soft key to display the keyboard r Soft keys X X Copy To omment Keyboard 5 d PRNTR PLTR FILE GP IB Ed ON C9 3 Use the keyboard to enter the comment For details regarding the usage of the keyboard refer to page x x um ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYM Insert COPY MENU key OJ 2 3 4 J 6 2 le 8 o oe is SHIFT key cas A 8 c D E e 8 1 2 S LM Explanation CR MOF eJ e GS E o MM GEI CP Ez PaO E36 169 CIC CI e Gn
194. display of the waveform can be synchronized with repetitive cycles or when using the history memory function you may want to change the repetitive period as shown below Repetitive period T Trigger level lt Input signal Trigger source signal Trigger signal restricted by hold off time t when Rise is selected as the trigger slope IM 701530 01E 1 11 suonounJ 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Acquisition Modes page 7 1 When storing sampled data in the acquisition memory it is possible to perform processing on specified data and display the resultant waveform The following data processing methods are available Normal mode In this mode sampled data is stored in the acquisition memory without processing Envelope mode In normal mode and averaging mode the sample rate the number of times data is acquired per second in the acquisition memory drops if T div is increased refer to Appendix 2 Appendix 3 In envelope mode the maximum and minimum values are obtained at each acquisition of the data sampled at 100 MS s then the maximum and minimum values are stored as a pair in the acquisition memory one pair takes up 2 words of memory Envelope mode is useful when you want to avoid aliasing page 1 6 since the sample rate is kept high irrespective of the time axis setting T div Furthermore envelope mode is also useful when you want to detect glitches pulsin
195. downloading is finished or when the ABORT Soft key is pressed the previous setting will return The range of determination is set by the two cursors T1 and T2 The setting lies within T2 To TopMenu Cursor 27 div 5 00 div at the left side to 5 00 div at the right side measured from the center of the display 14 2 IM 701530 01E 14 3 Checking the System Condition Keys and Procedure r Soft keys Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu Press the Information soft key to display the ROM check screen Time Comm Date Infor Contig To Co Base 7 Time mation NextMenu No Y 3 Press any key or move any knob on the front panel Explanation sje j j The setting parameter information screen will be displayed Q Returning to the MISC menu 4 Press any key or move any knob on the front panel MISC key ROM check screen The ROM check screen as shown below enables you to check the ROM version the date the ROM was programmed the model type and whether options are installed An example for DL1540C is shown below INFORMATION Version 1 01 ROM Date 1998 12 01 Model DL1540C Option Enhanced Trigger Yes Printer Yes RS232C No Pr
196. e Delete soft key Protecting 6 Press the Protect soft key A H symbol will be added before the file name of the protected file List Exec Func Format Disk ACQ Protect Delete 2 D 1 2M Info To TopMenu Canceling protection 7 After step 4 has been performed use the rotary knob to select the file at the beginning of which a f symbol is added POR DEF 95 05 03 14 04 52 9 95 05 03 14 06 08 8 Press the Protect soft key and the protection will be canceled The symbol before the file name will be deleted List Disk To ACQ Info TopMenu Exec Func Protect Delete Format 2HD 1 2M Waveform data and setting parameters saved on a floppy disk can be deleted one file at a time Protecting data A protection function is used to protect saved data from being deleted by mistake If an attempt is made to delete protected data an error message will be displayed and the data will not be deleted A symbol is displayed before the names of protected files to distinguish them from un protected files 12 14 IM 701530 01E 12 6 Deleting and Protecting Saved Data CAUTION Selecting the data list Change Data List File lists are displayed by data type and data format and are grouped as follows P P Displayed waveform data P P compressed ACQ Data being saved in the acquisition memory SETUP Se
197. e In the latter case the display will show XXX at the corresponding setting For the meaning of each item refer to page 8 12 Each parameter can be set within the range given in the table below Measurement item Upper lower limit setting range Setting step Max Min High Low P P AVG RMS t 8 div 0 04 div Overshoot Overshoot 0 to 200 1 Duty Duty O to 100 1 Freq 0 02 to 10 div Period Rise Fall Width Width 0 to 10 div 0 01 div Delay Delay 10 to 10 div 0 01 div INTEG1TY INTEG2TY 3 4x10 7 INTEG1XY INTEG2XY The setting step is not constant since the frequency is the reciprocal of the period Specifying a file name when FD P P FD ACQ FD IMAGE SCSI P P SCSI ACQ SCSI IMAGE HD P P HD ACQ or HD IMAGE has been selected as the trigger action Specifying the file name File Name A file No starting from 0001 is assigned to each waveform data automatically when the data is saved on a floppy disk a SCSI device or the internal hard disk It is possible to insert a common file name character string consisting of up to four characters before the assigned file number for instance NOGOO001 The entered file name will be reset when the action becomes NONE or when GO NOGO determination is set to OFF The file name will not be reset if the GO NOGO determination is executed aborted using E
198. e EXEC soft key In order to perform these operations it is necessary to set Mode at the GO NO GO top menu to OFF after having pressed the ABORT soft key Initialization of the settings Automated measurements Auto set up Changing of expansion settings Cursor measurements Display of an X Y waveform Action on trigger During an action is being executed after GO NO GO determination no waveform data will be acquired In case the linear scaling function has been set to ON you can enter linear scaled values at the GO NO GO parameter setting menu Only waveforms displayed on screen are available for judgment Acquisition memory data is not available 9 12 IM 701530 01E 9 3 Using the GO NO GO Signal Output Function Output Signal NO GO OUT signal The output signal level TTL level changes from high to low L temporarily when a NO GO determination is made GO OUT signal The output signal level TTL level changes from high to low L temporarily when a GO determination is made Signal output circuit diagram 5V 5V LS06 2 2 KQ 519 Output Connector Pin configuration For DL1540CL models with the C8 option Pin No Signal name 1 NO GO OUT 2 GND 26 GO OUT 27 GND Only use pin No 1 2 26 and 27 Other pins are used for other communication purposes The output connector on DL1540CL with the C8 option is as fol
199. e Optional Built in Printer ed B LONG long copy Select this type of output if you want to printout normal waveforms on screen as expanded waveforms The following settings must be made Setting the printing range Sets from where to where printing will be done 10div of the time axis will be printed on one page A printout page will always be filled up to 10div and therefore more of the waveform might be printed than specified by the printing range Setting the expansion rate For setting limits and expansion rate refer to page x x This setting is not necessary if expanded waveforms have already been displayed before the hardcopy output setting menu is displayed and you do not want to change the expansion rate 1 page 1998 11 20 1157 10 Peni e mms div Stepped bee ene e E E AEN fran m Printout of chanel WY VAN Ee X oinfomation PpD i ihih piee tenete e cord lengths i essi bois uo Im filter settings smoothing and trigger settings ra Number of pages rie buo After having selected the long copy and having closed the hard copy setting menu the display will still be according to the MainZoom display mode To display normal waveforms only press the ZOOM key and select OFF or MAIN Note The printer density can be adjusted For more details refer to page 14 4 IM 701530 01E 10 5 Jenoj d 4e1uug eui 0 sJejeureje gd Hues pue suuojo eM pef ejdsiq Bumndino 10 3 Re
200. e desired slope is selected CH2 Level CH1 nie CH3 CH4 EXT LINE 0 000 V 6 Turn the rotary knob to set the desired trigger level CH2 Level CH1 n2 CH3 CH4 EXT LINE 0 120V Types of Trigger sources and setting the trigger slope level CH1 CH2 CH3 CHA Select one of these to select one of the input signals CH1 to CH4 as the trigger source The trigger slope can be selected from the following three slope types F Activates a trigger when the trigger source changes from a level below the trigger level to one above the trigger level i Activates a trigger when the trigger source changes from the level above the trigger level to the one below the trigger level ji Activates a trigger in either of the above cases The setting range for the trigger level is within 10 div of the vertical sensitivity but is however limited by the waveform display frame For example when the voltage sensitivity is set to 50 mV div the trigger level to 300 mV and the ground level of the trigger source is positioned at Odiv the trigger level becomes 250 mV In case the ground level of the trigger source is positioned at 3 div the trigger level becomes 300 mV The setting step for the trigger level is 1 50 of the vertical sensitivity EXT external Trigger Select this when connecting the trigger signal source to the EXT TRIG IN EXT CLOCK IN terminal on the rear panel also used
201. e drive and select OK IM 701530 01E 12 5 ysiq Ajddoj4 wo eyeq Bulpeo7 pue Bui es RI 12 3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Loading ACQ waveform data Note that only BIN data can be loaded 11 Press the LOAD soft key to display the loading menu Function ACQ To sae MEIN EXEC TopMenu 12 Use the rotary knob to select the file to be loaded POR 95 05 03 11 33 36 2 STU 95705703 11 34 40 13 Press the EXEC soft key to start loading Function ACQ To For DL1540L if you have saved ACQ data to multiple floppy disks you can opt to load all of this data or only part of it for example data from one disk only If you do a partial load the waveform display will not appear over the entire time axis but only over a portion of it If you want to display waveforms over the full span of the time axis insert the floppy disk s with the remaining ACQ data and repeat Steps 11 to 13 as necessary repeating the same filename at Step 5 Moving loaded ACQ waveforms 14 The way to move these waveforms is exactly the same as for input signal waveforms For details refer to page 5 7 Canceling holding the display of the loaded waveform 15 Press the INPUT key of the channel corresponding to the number of the loaded waveform The acquisition hold menu appears 16 Press the ACQ Hold soft key to select OFF Then when you press the START STOP key to start data acquisit
202. e is not displayed 5 1 704 No set up data has been stored 11 3 705 No displayed waveform has been stored 11 1 706 Itis not possible to perform a snapshot during X Y waveform display 4 5 707 The roll chart is not secured 10 2 708 No roll chart 10 2 709 Printer is overheating Turn OFF the power immediately Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative 710 Itis not possible to execute a self test since a storage media operation or printer operation or GO NO GO operation or trigger action operaton is in progress 711 It is not possible to perform this operation since GO NO GO is active Stop GO NO GO and try again 9 1 8 712 No printer installed 2 713 Itis not possible to perform this operation since the trigger action is active Stop the trigger action and try again 6 15 714 Itis not possible to perform the real time printout in this time range Set time range to 500ms div or below 10 10 715 Itis not possible to perform the real time printout during Zoom MainZoom waveform display X Y waveform display FFT waveform display or during loading recalling a waveform 10 10 716 For DL1540C It is not possible to perform the real time printout with NORM SGL S SGL L N SGL as the trigger mode or with history mode For DL1540CL It is not possible to perform the real time printout with NORM SINGLE N SGL as the trigger mode or with history mode 10 10 717 Itis not possible to display a time stamp during acquisition 7 9 718 Itis
203. e keyboard 9 10 IM 701530 01E 9 2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform Parameters Executing the determination function 23 Press the EXEC soft key The name of the soft key will change to ABORT T1 Cursor Mode GO NOGO Type T Range OFF E ZONE 12 Setup EXEC 23pdiv For the display which appears during measurement refer to page 9 5 Aborting the determination function 24 Press the ABORT soft key The name of the soft key will change to EXEC Ti Cursor Mode GO NOGO Type T Range z OFF ca ZONE r2 Setup ABORT 24div Explanation Selecting the waveforms to be judged Input signal waveforms which are displayed as trace Nos 1 to 4 can be judged Computed waveforms can also be judged Acquisition memory data is not available Setting the determination range T Range The range of determination is set by the two cursors T1 and T2 The setting lies within 5 00 div at the left side to 5 00 div at the right side measured from the center of the display Note that this range is different from the one used for automated measurements Selecting waveform parameters and setting the range Item Upper Lower Up to four waveform parameters can be selected from the following items If you do not know the upper limit or lower limit set the side of the setting range or when the keyboard shows this settings select NAN Ignor
204. e measured voltages obtained during automated measurements offset aV Q AAA Decreases by a V Pi mi Points to note when setting the offset voltage Once the offset voltage has been set it will not change unless initialization is performed For instance if the input coupling is set to AC after the offset voltage has been set the offset voltage will remain unchanged even if the input coupling is later switched to DC When the probe attenuation is changed the offset voltage also changes accordingly The offset voltage remains unchanged irrespective of the vertical sensitivity However if the offset voltage exceeds the allowable setting range it will be set to the maximum or minimum vertical sensitivity value When the offset voltage is set it will also be subtracted from the acquired waveform data in acquisition memory Thus care must be taken when saving acquisition data When using AC coupling with a 10 MQ 10 1 probe keep in mind that the voltage at the input connector will not be attenuated to 1 10 at the probe tip for input signal components below 1 Hz Be careful not to let the input voltage at the probe tip exceed 250 V DC ACpeak or 177 Vrms for signal components below 1 Hz IM 701530 01E 5 3 sexy E UOZIOH pue jeo au Hues jo 5 3 Setting the Probe Attenuation Keys and Procedure 1 Press the INPUT key corresponding to the
205. eeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeeaeeenaeens 5 1 AN 5 2 Setting th Input Couplirig 2 cocer ever rtc reae citate cue ee chc 5 2 5 3 Setting the Probe Attenuation esesssesssssseseeeeneeeneenneennnen nnne nnne nnne nnn 5 4 5 4 drivertinig a WaVefOLtTI uui creer tel ec caved re stc i enc eee ce reve s Ep ea ore die a 5 5 5 5 Setting the Vertical Sensitivity 00 ishni a e t i a E 5 6 5 6 Changing the Waveform s Vertical Position 5 7 AN 5 7 Selecting the Timebase rerit etie ia t rte ei Pete deis 5 8 5 9 Setting the Time AXIS uio e Ue dee Le ir ee Hae E t Reda gd 5 10 5 9 Changing the Waveform s Horizontal Position eccceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeseeeeeeteaeeenees 5 12 IM 701530 01E 9 Contents Chapter6 Activating a Trigger 6 1 Relationship between Trigger Type and Trigger Source Slope Level 6 1 A 6 2 Setting the Edge rigget iison onidira a ecd alas 6 2 6 3 Setting the Window Trigger esessessesesseeeeeeeeeeeenene nnne entente nnne 6 4 6 4 Setting the TV Trigger enean e eaaa ar a enne eres e tren terres nennen 6 5 6 5 Setting the OR Trigger Optional ssessesssseseeeneeeneneennenee nene 6 8 6 6 Setting the Pattern Trigger Optional sseeeeeeenenenennenenen nennen 6 9 6 7 Setting the Width Trigger Optional 6 11 6 8 Setting the Trigger Mode ssssesssesseeeeseeeeee
206. efer to page 4 7 12 After having selected the Lower setting using the rotary knob press the SHIFT MISC KEYBOARD key to display the keyboard 13 Use the keyboard to enter the desired value For details concerning operation of the keyboard refer to page 4 7 14 After having selected the Condition setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select the condition setting When the condition is met NO GO will result OUT The value of the measurement parameter lies outside the values determined by the Upper and Lower values IN The value of the measurement parameter lies inside the values determined by the Upper and Lower values 15 Repeat steps 6 to 14 until the parameter setup has been completed Determination Logic 16 After having selected the Logic setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select the desired condition When the condition is met NO GO will result AND All determinations are NO GO IN Any of the determination is NO GO Sequence determination 17 After having selected the Sequence setting on using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select the desired sequence The following types can be selected SINGLE Stops determination when a NO GO determination is made CONTINUE Carries out determination repeatedly until the ABORT soft key is pressed 9 9 uonoy OD ON OD Buruuoped 9 2 Judging using Measured Values of
207. ement is set ON the maximum number of displayed measurement items becomes 5 Tracel P P 52 00V Max 286 00V Min 26 00V Rms 17 69V fivg 700 6mV Ovr 0 0 Trace2 P P 72 00 Max 36 00 Min 36 00 Rms 24 774 Avg 634 7mY Ovr 0 0 Trace3 P P 4 000 Max 2 0004 Min 2 000V Rms 509 4mv Avg 129 7m Ovr 0 0 Tracel P P 52 004 Max 26 00V Min 26 00V Rms 17 69V fivg 700 6mv Ovr 0 0 Trace2 P P 72 00V Max 36 00 Min 36 00 Rms 24 774 Avg 634 7mv Ovr 0 0 Trace3 P P 4 000V Max 2 000V Min 2 000 Rms 509 4mv Avg 129 7m Ovr 0 0 Trace4 P P 1 2004 Max 1 1204 Min 80 00mV Rms 699 3mV fivg 501 2mv Ovr 0 0 8 14 IM 701530 01E 8 3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically In case of more than five waveforms under measurement Up to 3 measurement values of selected measurement items of one waveform will be displayed In case delay measurement is set ON the maximum number of displayed measurement items becomes 2 Tracel P P 52 00 Max 26 00 Min 26 00 Trace2 P P 72 00V Max 36 00V Min 36 00V Trace3 P P 4 000V Max 2 000V Min 2 000V Trace4 P P 1 200V Max 1 12049 Min 80 00mVv Loadi P P 51 20V Max 25 604 Min 25 60V Tracel P P 52 00V Max 26 00V Min 26 00V Trace2 P P 72 00V Max 36 00v Min 36 00 Trace3 P P 4 000V Max 2 000v Min 2 000V Trace4 P P 1 200V Max 1 120V Min 80 00mv Loadi P P 51 20V Max 25 60V Min 25 60V Load2 P P 72 00V Max 36 00V Min
208. en you want to change any setting Automated Measurements Refer to page 8 7 T1 cursor T2 cursor 1998 11 27 20 34 49 NORM 500kS s 2ms div Stopped d 2ms div H CH1 ON T H 50 0V div 10 1 i i DC 0 0v i CH2 OFF i i 50V div 10 1 1 DC 0 0v F T CH3 OFF 1 50V div 10 1 i i DC 0 0v H H CH4 OFF i i 2V div 10 1 H i i DC 0 00V i P H Record Length Measurement H i i Main 10K Tracet P P 52 00V Max L 26 00V Min 26 00V oon 10K values Rms 16 64V Avg 329 3mV Ovr 0 0 Filter EN 0vr 0 0 High 26 009 Low 26 00 Smoothing OFF Rise 1 520ms Fall 1 600ms Freq 200 0Hz BW FULL Prod 5 000ms Hid 1 2 640ms Wd 2 360ms Trigger Duty 52 8 I1TY 49 3E 03 I2TY 2 38E 03 Mode AUTO Brst 5 020ms PIsNt 1 i Type EDGE i i H Source CH4 4 Trace No 1 H i i Ti Measure Item Delay T Range ALL Scan To rp od OFF Setup Setup T2 EXEC NextMenu lai Measurement items or delay between channels 2 6 IM 701530 01E 2 3 Display Expanded Display Refer to page 7 4 r Expansion zoom box Pre zoom waveform 1998 11 19 19 37 19 C LN NORM 5SkS s 200ms div Stopped 200ms div CH1 OFF EN 50 0V div 10 1 DC 0 0v CH2 ON H 800mV div 10 1 DC 0 000 A 50V div 10 1 DC 0 0v CH4 OFF 2 00V div 10 1 DC 0 00 Time axis setting of the ued U9e3 jo esf pue o
209. ent Automated measurement Expansion Waveform computation Storage in the internal memory Outputting to an external plotter Saving on a floppy disk in case of the HP GL and PS format Functions of the CLEAR TRACE key Deletes the following waveforms Snapshot waveform Accumulated waveform refer to page 7 13 Restarts the following operations Averaging refer to page 7 1 Equivalent time sampling IM 701530 01E 4 5 suoneJedo UOWWOD B 4 5 Performing Calibration Keys and Procedure r Soft keys f 1 Press the CAL key to display the calibration execution menu Executing manual calibration 2 Press the EXEC soft key to execute calibration Turning automatic calibration ON 3 Press the Auto CAL soft key to select ON AutoCal CAL OFF EXEC Explanation CAL key About the calibration function The following parameters are calibrated Ground level offset A D converter gain Trigger threshold level Time axis for equivalent time sampling Calibration takes approximately five seconds No keys are operative during calibration Automatic calibration function When the automatic calibration function is ON calibration is performed automatically after the following time periods has elapsed in case T div has bee
210. eparately 2 Selectable only on models with the internal hard disk DL1540CL C8 option 19 After having selected either FD P P or FD ACQ move to the FileName setting and press the SELECT key The keyboard will be displayed After having selected either NONE or PRINT continue with step 21 20 Use the keyboard to enter the name of the file The entered filename will be displayed at the FileName setting For details how to operate the keyboard refer to page 4 8 21 After having selected the Buzzer setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select ON OFF action In case of ON the buzzer sounds after NO GO determination Returning to the top menu 22 Return to the GO NO GO top menu by pressing the ESC key Parami Param2 Param3 Param4 Mode or KOE pd ON p ON OFF on Trace VEPs VERA 2g 1273 0 Item MAX MIN RMS ava Upper 20 00V xxx xxx xx Lower 14 00V xxx xxx xxx Condition IN ovr MINI IN IN Common Items Setup Sets determination conditions for each parameter Selects logic Logic EN o Ec CONTINUE Sequence Action TEXT FD P P FD ACQ FD IMAGE Selects sequence Selects action after determination FileName E Buzzer OFF ON Selects buzzer ON OFF action when determination is NG Enters the file name using th
211. er is activated within the time out period If no trigger is activated the center value of the amplitude of the trigger source page 1 7 is detected and the trigger level is changed automatically to this center value then a edge trigger is activated to update the displayed waveforms Half the amplitude Trigger level Amplitude Half the amplitude Normal mode Displayed waveforms are updated only when a trigger is activated Displayed waveforms will not be updated if no trigger is activated Single short mode When a trigger is activated displayed waveforms are updated only once then acquisition stops This mode is useful when you are observing a single shot signal Called single shot mode for DL1540C and single mode for DL1540CL Single long mode As with the single short mode when a trigger is activated displayed waveforms are updated only once then acquisition stops However the length of acquired data is longer in this mode up to 120 K words This mode is available only with DL1540C Single N mode This mode is useful when using the sequential store function refer to page 1 14 Waveforms are acquired and stored in different memory areas each time a trigger is activated then acquisition stops and the waveforms are displayed Acquisition is performed the specified number of times Acquired waveforms can be displayed together or they can be displayed individually This mode is useful when you want to de
212. er to page 7 17 When you load waveform data ACQ and P P be aware of the restrictions of some models DL1540C Can only load waveform data saved by the DL1540C DL1540CL Can load waveform data saved by theDL1540C and DL1540CL Never remove the floppy disk while the access indicator of the floppy disk drive is lit or damage to the magnetic head of the drive or loss of data on the floppy disk may result 12 8 IM 701530 01E 12 4 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters Keys and Procedure Rotary knob m Soft keys STORE RECALL FILE key SHIFT key 1 Press the SHIFT STORE RECALL FILE key to display the data save load menu Turning ON OFF the auto naming function 2 Press the AutoFile soft key to select ON or OFF For more details concerning this function refer to the explanation later on Saving setting parameters 3 e Press the SETUP soft key to display the save load setting menu and a list of files Data Type AutoFile P P ACQ SETUP ON Utility Press the SAVE soft key to display the saving menu Function SETUP FileName To LOAD EXEC TopMenu Press the FileName soft key to display the keyboard Use the keyboard to enter the filename For details regardin
213. eration Keys Rotary Knob sssssssssssssseeeeeeeenneen nennen nennen nnne nnne nnn nennen nnne 2 3 2 3 Display i che tede 2 6 Chapter 3 Before Starting Observation and Measurement of Waveforms 3 1 Precautions During Use icta entra E 3 1 3 2 installing the Mait NIT e iiie Re e e ERE P Lr UU RREH MER R 3 2 AN 3 3 Connecting the Power COId eee vente vein be e tepai 3 3 3 4 Turning the Power Switch ON OFF sessssssesseeeeeeneeennne nennen nnne nene tnrn enne enne 3 4 AN 3 5 Connecting a Probe 5 ea ett ddabtne b ftn niet praedia eere 3 5 AN 3 6 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction 3 6 3 7 Setting the Date and TIME a aa a nennt 3 7 Chapter4 Common Operations 4 1 Starting and Stopping Acquisition 02 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeaeeteaeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeaeesiaeeeaeeenatens 4 1 4 2 Displaying Waveforms using the Auto Set Up Function eee 4 2 4 3 Initializing Settings x intet cer e reb Tee LLL La 4 4 4 4 Halting a Waveform and Erasing the Halted Waveform Snapshot and Clear Trace 4 5 4 5 Performing Calibration eor ear ecrit ei ieee 4 6 4 6 Setting Valles 12 nin i ede ie eee IE e La ze e E e de eL S 4 7 4 7 Entering Characters using the Keyboard ssssssssssseseeeeneneneen nennen 4 8 Chapter 5 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes 5 1 Turning Display of Input Signal Waveforms ON OFF cccceesceesceeeeee
214. ert CQ Hold AC GND 10 1 OFF ON C ITem C 1 J INPUT key Explanation Relevant channels The input signals for channels CH1 to CH4 can be inverted independently of one another Each time the soft key is pressed ON or OFF are displayed alternately and the waveform will be inverted accordingly Indication of an inverted signal When a waveform is inverted the corresponding trace number is highlighted as shown below Avi Points to note Cursor measurement automated measurement waveform math and GO NO GO determination are performed on the inverted waveforms not on the original ones The waveform data that will be saved in the acquisition memory will not be inverted so care must be taken when saving the acquisition data IM 701530 01E 5 5 sexy ejuoziuop pue jeo eui Hues jo 5 5 Setting the Vertical Sensitivity Keys and Procedure Rotary knob r soft keys 1 Press the V DIV key of the desired channel to display the vertical sensitivity setting menu Verify that the CAL setting is highlighted 2 Turn the rotary knob to set the desired sensitivity V div CH1 I J J CH1 V DIV V DIV anm VAR wy NP 3 In case you want to adjust the setting in smaller steps press the Variable soft key
215. ertical cursor displayed on the T Y waveform This cursor related to the X Y cursor moves over the time axis Vertical cursor T1 Moves cursor T1 only T2 Moves cursor T2 only T1 amp T2 Moves both cursors T1 and T2 simultaneously without changing the distance between them Horizontal cursor H1 Moves cursor H1 only H2 Moves cursor H2 only H1 amp H2 Moves both cursors H1 and H2 simultaneously without changing the distance between them Cursor movement range The X Y cursor can only be moved over the X Y waveform For details regarding the horizontal vertical cursors refer to page 8 4 Points to note when performing cursor measurements For more details regarding the points to note when performing cursor measurements refer to page 8 4 IM 701530 01E 8 7 SUJJOJOAeM Duiz euy B 8 3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically Relevant Keys Rotary knob SELECT key RESET key 4 ESC key r Soft keys zm Ut Y Jp C 7 O I l mum Qon l z n Y i X i i J MEASURE key keys Operating Procedure 1 Press the MEASURE key to display the automated measurement setting menu 2 Press the Measure soft key and select ON T1 Measure Item Delay T Range ALL Scan To ae ON setup Setup 12 EXEC NextMenu 50 kiv
216. esets the settings made using the rotary knob to their default values SNAP SHOT C Esc rer DISPLAY Fony RESET SELECT key INITIALIZE FILTER MEASURE CURSOR Gomno co MATH DISPLAY Confirms the items and characters VERTICAL HORIZONTAL TRIGGER selected ON OFF TRIG D Rotary knob 1 2 3 4 4 y G a Ld se ccc Used to select cursor position waveform 7 8 vov ACTION SELECT 2 parameters linear scaling phase shift LEVEL POSITION FFT computation etc SOURCE DELAY gt positions 2 L key A Used to shift from one digit to the next of COUPEN HOLD OFF ACO the value you are setting using the rotary i INPUT REMOTEL OCAL CAL MISC HISTORY STORE RECALL COPY m Ead prion 0 s ma KEYBOARD FILE MENU MATH key Page 8 16 GO NO GO key Pages 9 1 and 9 8 Displays the waveform computation menu Displays the GO NO GO setting menu SHIFT MATH FFT key Page 8 18 Displays the FFT computation menu MISC key Page 8 14 Used to set the linear scaling function Keys and Rotary Knob used for Other Operations r LOCAL key Clears the remote state The REMOTE indicator is lit while remote mode is active Refer to the Communication Interface User s Manual IM 701510 11E RESET key CLEAR TRACE Re
217. esponding to the channel to be used as a trigger source and set the trigger state CH2 L il CH1 ce CH3 CH4 amis 7 Turn the rotary knob to set the desired trigger level CH2 Level CH1 ce CH3 CH4 ae Explanation Selecting the width condition PULSE lt T Trigger will be activated when the pulse width of the trigger source becomes narrower than the preset pulse width PULSEST Trigger will be activated when the pulse width of the trigger source is wider than the preset pulse width and the state changes TIMEOUT Trigger will be activated when the pulse width of the trigger source becomes wider than the preset pulse width PULSE lt T k PULSE gt T Trigger point Trigger point Trigger point TIMEOUT TIMEOUT PULSE gt T y Y wo Ww w PS NE IM 701530 01E 6 11 16u e BuneAnoy H 6 7 Setting the Width Trigger Optional Width setting range and setting steps Width setting range and setting steps are given below The setting accuracy of the width is within 2 ns set value x 0 01 approximately Setting range Setting steps 5nsto9 99us 10ns 10 us to 99 9 us 100 ns 1 ms to 9 999 ms 1 us 10 ms to 99 99 ms 10 us 100 ms to 999 9 ms 100 us 1 s to 9 999 s 1 ms 1 The next pulse width after 5 ns is 10 ns 2 When the width condition is set to PULSE lt T the smallest setting range is 5 ns when the width condition is set to PULSE gt T or TIMEOUT the smallest
218. ess Any Key Setting parameter information screen The set up information screen shown below enables you to check the most important setting parameters The information given on the screen can also be printed For a description of the procedure refer to page 10 3 and 10 9 An example for DL1540C is shown below Setup Information Vertical 2 Horizontal CHT CH2 CHS Cui T Div ims div viv 50v Isov 50v isov Acquisition Normat Coupling DC IDe Dc pc Sample Rate 1M S s Probe 101 10 1 10 1 10 1 Record Length Main 10k Offset oov joov oov oov Zoom t0K Position 3 00div 1 00div 100div 3 00div Time Base INTERNAL Invert OFF lorr OFF lorr Smoothing OFF Bandwidth FULL 3 Trigger Mode AUTO Type EDGE Coupling ac HF Rejection OFF Position 0 00div Delay 0 0ps Press any key Holdoff Time OFF Edge Source CH cm Source Chi Ch2 cha Cha EXT Level ov ov ov ov 0 15V Slope l3 EJ 5 IM 701530 01E 14 3 suoneJedo 19410 BH 14 4 Adjusting the Printer Density Keys and Procedure Rotary knob 1 Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu SELECT key 2 Press the Config soft key RESET key i
219. ess the POSITION key to display the menu for horizontal positioning 2 Select the position to where you want to move the viewing frame by pressing the corresponding soft key 22 de 3 Turn the rotary knob to fine adjust the position J Position To oin iE 4 4dv_ odv s4div 0 paiv POSITION key Explanation Moving range The viewing frame can be moved up to 5 00 div from the center of the waveform display frame This range can be travelled using the rotary knob The soft keys allow you to move the viewing frame quickly to either of the positions 4div Odiv 4div Setting resolution The frame can be moved in steps of 0 02 divisions irrespective of the horizontal sensitivity Waveforms which cannot be moved The viewing frame cannot be moved when snapshot waveforms are displayed Indication of the horizontal position The trigger position marker will show the new position In roll mode a bargraph will appear in the upper side of the screen and will show which part of the waveform is shown on the screen Other modes than roll mode Roll mode When the display is in roll mode and data acquisition has been started the horizontal position will automatically be moved to 5 div Horizontal position is 0 div Horizontal position is 5 div si
220. essary to select the waveform of measurement to set the coefficient A and the offset value B and to apply a unit Selecting the waveform of measurement 5 Use the rotary knob to select the desired waveform of measurement 6 Press the SELECT key to turn the Mode setting ON Pressing the SELECT key once more will result in selecting OFF Linear Scale Setup AX B mode A B units CH1 orr 0 000000E 00 o 000000E 00 CH2 Oion 0 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 CH3 Gon o 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 cna GION o 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 LOAD1 Gig on 0 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 LOAD2 Gig on 0 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 LOAD3 Uon 0 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 Loap On o 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 8 16 IM 701530 01E 8 4 Using the Linear Scaling Function Setting the scaling coefficient A and the offset value B 7 Use the rotary knob to select the coefficient A of the measurement waveform and press the SHIFT MISC KEYBOARD key to display the keyboard 8 Use the keyboard to enter the desired value For details concerning operation of the keyboard refer to page 4 8 9 Use the rotary knob to select the coefficient B of the measurement waveform and press the SHIFT MISC KEYBOARD key to display the keyboard 10 Use the keyboard to enter the desired value For details concerning operation of the k
221. ettings and change them 12 Saving and Describes how to save waveform data or set up data to a Loading Data floppy disk how to load saved data how to initialize a floppy from a Floppy Disk disk and how to delete data 13 Saving and Describes how to save the waveform data or set up data to Loading Data from the SCSI device or the internal hard disk Describes how to a SCSI Device or load the saved data initialize the disk delete the data and the Internal Hard Disk other operations 14 Other Operations Describes operations such as those required for trigger output 15 Troubleshooting Describes how to diagnose the cause of trouble and how to Maintenance and correct it as well as describing each message that may Inspection appear on the screen and how to perform a self test 16 Specifications Describes the specifications Appendix Shows a menu map describes the relationship between the time axis sample rate and record length and describes the data format which must be specified when waveform data is saved Index Important terms used in this manual with corresponding reference page numbers are given IM 701530 01E Conventions Used in this Manual Unit I tin Denotes 1000 Example 100kS s Kees Denotes 1024 or 1002 Example of when K indicates 1024 640 KB storage capacity of a floppy disk Example of when K indicates 1002 100 KW record length for acquisition memory Used Character
222. eyboard refer to page 4 8 Applying a unit 11 Use the rotary knob to select the UNIT setting and press the SELECT key to display the keyboard mode A B units CH1 orr mg 1 000000E 00 2 000000E 00 L 1 12 Use the keyboard to enter desired unit The unit will appear at the units setting on the screen For details regarding the usage of the keyboard refer to page 4 8 13 Repeat steps 5 to 12 in case you want to set the linear scaling function for other waveforms Returning to the top menu 14 Press the ESC key to close the linear scaling setting menu 15 Press the To Topmenu soft key to return to the MISC menu Explanation Waveforms which cannot be measured For waveforms which cannot be measured refer to page 8 2 Setting the coefficient A and offset value B If the setting range of A B is within 3 4E38 lt AX Bx3 4E38 the results will be displayed If the setting exceed this range the display will show For an example refer to the next page The default setting is 0 000000E 00 1E38 represents 1x1038 Setting the unit This setting is useful to enter any unit Up to eight characters can be input Note however that only the first three characters will appear on the display Display Example of linear scaling results The results of linear scaling will not appear on the display until data acquisition has been started The scaling coefficient A offset B and new defined
223. f 501 dots horizontal X 401 dots vertical to 601 dots horizontal X 401 dots vertical In the wide screen mode one point out of every six points in the horizontal direction is displayed using interpolation As a result the interpolated points may look discontinuous or distorted depending on the waveform being observed In such case check the waveform in the normal screen mode IM 701530 01E 7 11 SUOIIPUOD Aeldsiq pue uonisinboy BuibueyyD 7 7 Changing the Interpolation Settings Keys and Procedure Royary knob Press the DISPLAY key to display the setting menu 2 Press the Intrpl soft key to display the interpolation selection x Y Accumu OFF ON Interpolation Type 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired interpolation 4 type LINE m PULSE menu r Soft keys ca p T Oto x DISPLAY key Explanation Selecting the interpolation type The following four interpolation types are available The default is SINE OFF No interpolation Displays the sampling data as a horizontal line LINE Interpolates between two dots with a straight line SINE Generates interpolation data using the sin X X function and interpolates between two dots using a sine curve PUL
224. form of measurement e g LOAD1 is shown as L1 In the case of ALL T1 Time difference between position of cursor T1 and trigger position T2 Time difference between position of cursor T2 and trigger position AT Time difference between positions of cursors T1 and T2 1 DT Reciprocal of DT frequency V1 X Voltage at the position where all waveforms intersect cursor T1 The waveform of measurement is indicated between brackets n case of roll mode this is not the trigger position but the center of the acquisition memory record length This position is shown at the Odiv in the figure on page 1 7 Using vertical cursors to only measure time difference AT AT Time difference between positions of cursors T1 and T2 Using horizontal cursors to only measure voltage difference AV AV X V2 V1 where V2 is the position where the waveform intersects cursor H2 and V1 is the position where the waveform intersects cursor H1 IM 701530 01E 8 3 SUJJOJOAeM Duiz euy B 8 1 Measuring a V T Waveform using Cursors R1 cursor 0 y QUus diy IORM 50MS s Cursor orr E Cursor Reference EN E i Base Val 360 Using vertical cursors to measure time difference voltage voltage difference of the acquisition data V T ACQ In contrast to V T cursor which measures the data on the screen V T ACQ cursor makes measurements on the actual data acquired in the
225. function refer to the explanation later on Saving screen image data 4 Press the Format soft key to display the image data setting menu Format FileName AutoFile Setup To HPGL OFF Eo TopMenu 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired format In case you selected HPGL or PS continue with step 6 In case you selected TIFF or BMP continue with step 19 Format T o PS FE BMP TopMenu 6 Press the Setup soft key to display the output setting menu Selecting the paper size 7 After having selected the Paper Size setting using the rotary knob press the the SELECT key to select the desired paper size In case you selected PS at step 5 there is no need to use the rotary knob and you may continue with step 18 Selecting the pen speed 8 After having selected the Pen Speed setting using the rotary knob press the the SELECT key to select from NORMAL or SLOW Selecting the XY Mode 9 After having selected the XY Mode setting using the rotary knob press the the SELECT key to select from DOT or LINE Assigning pens 10 After having selected the Pen Mode setting using the rotary knob press the the SELECT key to select from AUTO or MANUAL In case you selected MANUAL continue with step 14 11 After having selected AUTO and after hav
226. g The hold off time setting range is 0 2 us to 9 999 s The hold off time will be 0 2 us minimum if initialization is performed or if hold off mode has been turned OFF Turning the hold off function ON OFF The hold off time which has been set will be retained even if the hold off function is set to OFF If the hold off function is switched ON again the hold off time which was in effect before the hold off function was switched OFF will be restored Points to note when setting the hold off time f the hold off time has been set to 100 ms or more do not switch the trigger mode to auto mode or auto level mode No trigger can be activated properly as this conflicts with the time out period 100 ms The waveform updating interval may get longer depending on the hold off time In this case switch the hold off function OFF or change the hold off time 6 20 IM 701530 01E Chapter 7 Changing Acquisition and Display Conditions 7 1 Selecting Acquisition Mode Sampling Mode and Record Length for DL1540CL Keys and Procedure Rotary knob m Soft keys 1 Press the ACQ key to display the acquisition mode sampling mode setting menu Length menu is provided with DL1540CL 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired acquisition mode Acquisition Rep Length eee NVELOPE AVERAGE ON 10K I f
227. g the usage of the keyboard refer to page 4 8 Press the EXEC soft key to start saving Functio SETUP FileName ype TO LOAD ccc TopMenu Loading setting parameters 3 4 5 6 Press the SETUP soft key to display the save load setting menu and a list of files Data Type AutoFile P P ACQ SETUP ON Utility Press the LOAD soft key to display the loading menu Function SETUP To Save MUON EXEC TopMenu Use the rotary knob to select the file to be loaded AAA 95 05 03 12 15 36 2 95 05 03 12 16 08 ccc 95 05 03 12 16 34 Press the EXEC soft key to start loading Function SETUP To IM 701530 01E 12 9 ysiq Ajddoj4 wo eyeq Buipeo pue Bui es RI 12 4 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters Explanation CAUTION Auto naming function AutoFile If AutoFile has been set to ON a file name No 3 digits starting from 001 will be assigned to the data automatically when the data is saved It is possible to insert a common file name up to five characters before the assigned file name No by specifying the file name using FileName Setting parameters which can be saved Settings made using the soft key menu and rotary knob as well as the START STOP state and the channel s ON OFF state are saved If a zone waveform has been registered in GO NO GO and the f
228. g mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active At Least One of CH3 CH4 is ON CH3 CH4 are Both OFF When Envelope Mode 1 is Active Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate recordlengih rate recordlength rate recordlength rate record length rate record length T div S s word S s word S s word S s word S s word 50s 20 10K 20k 20 10K 20k 20 10K 20K 20 10K 20K 100M 10 x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 20s 50 10K 20K 50 10K 20k 50 10K 20K 50 10K 20K 100M 25 x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 10s 100 10K 20K 100 10K 20k 100 10K 20K 100 10K 20K 100M 50 x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 amp 5s 200 10K 20k 200 10K 20k 200 10K 20K 200 10K 20K 100M 100 x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 T 2s 500 10K 20K 500 10K 20k 500 10K 20K 500 10K 20K 100M 250 x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 1s 1k 10K 20K 1k 10K 20K 1k 10K 20K 1k 10K 20K 100M 500 x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 500ms 2k 10K 20K 2k 10K 20K 2k 10K 20K 2k 10K 20K 100M 1k x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 x 200ms 5k 10K 20K 5k 10K 20K 5k 10K 20K 5k 10K 20K 100M 2 5k x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 100ms 10k 10K 20K 10k 10K 20K 10k 10K 20K 10k 10K 20K 100M 5k x 2 5K x 2 10K x 2 50ms 20k 10K 20K
229. g signals which rise very fast or display an envelope of a modulating signal I n c I I cs 1 i i be Envelope I L I 1 Averaging mode Averaging is a process in which waveforms are acquired repeatedly to obtain the average of waveform data of the same timing the same time in relation to the trigger point When the trigger mode is not single mode exponential averaging is performed on the waveform data using the following equation then the resultant waveform is stored in the acquisition memory and displayed on screen The attenuation constant can be set between 2 and 256 in steps of 2 Exponential averaging An n N 1 An 14Xn An Value obtained after nth averaging Xn nth measured value N Attenuation constant This averaging process is useful when you want to eliminate random noise Sampling Mode page 7 1 As explained earlier in Relationship between the time axis setting and sampling mode page 1 6 data sampling can be performed either in real time or in repetitive sampling mode depending on the T div setting for DL1540CL the T div and maximum displayable record length If T div is set between 50 ns div and 5 ns div data sampling will be performed in the repetitive sampling mode But for DL1540CL note that these T div settings are not available if maximum displayable record length is set to a high value And if T div is set between 5 us div and 100 ns div data sampling can be performed both
230. g2XY is possible during automated measurement For a description of measurement operations and the measured parameters refer to 8 3 When you want to display a sequentially stored waveform or one stored in history memory as an X Y waveform you turn the rotary knob to select a display number However all the selected waveforms will appear on the screen In order to display one selected waveform only press the CLEAR TRACE key after selection When displaying both the X Y and V T waveforms V T waveforms are also displayed accumulated accumulated display The display area for X Y waveforms is constant regardless of the ON OFF state of the wide screen mode IM 701530 01E 7 15 suomnipuoo f e dsiq pue uonisinboy Buibueuo 7 10 Changing the Graticule Scale and Marker Settings Keys and Procedure 1 Press the SHIFT DISPLAY DISPLAY FORM key to display the display condition setting menu Changing the graticule type 2 Select by pressing the FRAME or the GRID soft key r Soft k T xa DN Turning the scale ON OFF EM 4 2 After step 1 has been completed press the Scale soft key and HHHH l select ON or OFF Turning the Marker ON OFF 2 After step 1 has been completed press the Marker soft key bn M UERNE DS and select ON
231. ge 4 6 Displays the auto setup menu which can be used to execute auto setup SHIFT MISC KEYBOARD key Displays the calibration execution menu FILE MENU START STOP key Page 4 1 Starts or stops acquisition The indicator on this key is lit during acquisition Displays a keyboard which enables you to enter values directly SHIFT key Used to operate functions written in blue over under the operation keys Keys and Rotary Knob used for Setting the Vertical Horizontal Axis r V DIV key Page 5 6 Displays the voltage axis sensitivity setting menu for each channel r CH key Page 5 1 Turns ON OFF display of the waveform for each channel The indicator above the key is lit when the display is ON SNAP SHOT INPUT key Pages 5 2 to 5 5 Sets the input coupling probe attenuation inverted display and acquisition hold Page 5 10 L POSITION key Page 5 7 Displays the vertical position setting menu for each displayed waveform r POSITION lt gt key Page 5 12 C CLEAR Displays the horizontal position setting menu ese FFT DisPLAY Form RESET INITIALIZE FILTER MEASURE CURSOR comno co MATH DISPLAY VERTICAL HORIZONTAL TRIGGER A m ON OFF m TRIG D cg cu2 cH3 cH4 POSITION ZOOM TYPE MODE Rota
232. he waveform to be loaded Destination Function P P LOAD2 LOAD3 SAYE kum LOAD4 TUPWICIU T 13 Use the rotary knob to select the file to be loaded RBC 95 05 03 11 24 26 95 05 03 11 25 24 95 05 03 11 26 00 95 05 03 11 26 34 95 05 03 11 27 26 14 Press the EXEC soft key to start loading Function P P Destn To Save ELEME LOAD BEC TopMenu 12 4 IM 701530 01E 12 3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Moving loaded P P waveforms 15 Press the POSITION key of the channel corresponding to the number of the loaded waveform 16 Press the Knob soft key to select MEM 17 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired position 18 Use the rotary knob to fine adjust the position LOAD1 Position To Knob Position 3div div_ Odiy 1div 3dv cH 0 1 amp div Canceling the display of the loaded waveform 19 Press the CH key of the channel corresponding to the number of the loaded waveform The load ON OFF menu appears Note that by alternately pressing the CH key the acquisition waveform also dis appears 20 Press the MEM soft key to select OFF and the loaded waveform will be canceled Selecting ON results in displaying the loaded waveform Mem ON Saving ACQ waveform data 3 Press the ACQ soft key to display the save load setting menu and
233. he above mentioned relevant keys and the operating procedure in one block Explanation Describes settings and restrictions relating to the operation A detailed description of the function is not provided For a detailed description of the function refer to Chapter 1 IM 701530 01E Contents INTFOGUCTION tines ha tcu REL 1 Checking the Contents of the Package ccsssccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenesesnneeeeeeeeeanaaeseeeeeessaesenseeeeseeesenseeenes 2 Safety Pr cautions DL 5 How to Use this Manual eec erroe cccce ccce Irc eL ID nanna cdveseveessestecsndes setecdee coneeaueectecns 7 Conventions Used in this Manual Leere iier ce eceeeeee esee nenne nante tnn ma nass aaa nenen nnmnnn nnne sanas uaa 8 Chapter 1 Functions 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram ssseseeeeenenen nennen 1 1 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes sssssssssseeeeeeneennee nennen 1 2 1 9 Setting a Wiggers cicada AA na ett cederet d fa We reta e eda 1 8 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions eseeeeeeeneene 1 12 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform sssssseeeeeeneeeneen nennen nennen nnne nennen 1 18 1 6 Other Useful FUNCIONS ur uei oce E rn p Re SRM GR Pb EU Ee Bag en caw dead 1 20 Chapter 2 Name and Use of Each Part 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel Top View sseeseeeeneneeem emere 2 1 2 2 Op
234. he record length and other such factors For DL1540CL if acquisition memory record length is long an ACQ data save may require more than one floppy disk In this case you should be sure to format a sufficient number of floppy disks before beginning the save If you insert an unformatted disk during the save procedure an error message will appear and the save will abort so that you will have to reexecute the save from the beginning The approx 7 K shown below denotes memory used for storage of setting data Values are given in bytes Data format Data size P P 4096 x CH x N approx 300 ACQ record length of acquisition memory x CH x N approx 7 K N indicates the number of trigger repetitions in single N mode for any other mode N21 IM 701530 01E 12 7 ysiq Ajddoj4 wo eyeq Buipeo pue Bunes H 12 3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data CAUTION Checking the free space on a floppy disk Refer to page 12 3 for a description of this procedure Moving loaded P P waveforms Pressing the POSITION key of the channel corresponding to the number of the loaded waveform prompts you to select whether you want to move the input signal waveform or the loaded waveform CH at the Knob setting selects to move input signal waveforms MEM at the Knob setting selects to move loaded P P waveforms Entering a file name The following points must be kept in mind when entering a file name Afile name
235. he screen prompting for verification will appear mem Format Type Fo is i m 5 ACO 2DD 640K 2DD 720K 2HD 1 2M I2HD 1 44 TopMenu Formatting 5 After having selected OK using the rotary knob press the SELECT key When formatting is complete the message Execution completed appears Canceling 5 After having selected CANCEL using the rotary knob press the SELECT key lt lt ROTARY KNOB select SELECT key enter gt gt Are you sure CRNCEL Formatting the floppy disk The following four MS DOS format types are available 2DD 640K 2DD 720K 2HD 1 2M 2HD 1 44M Formats a 2DD floppy disk with 8 sectors to hold 640 KB Formats a 2DD floppy disk with 9 sectors to hold 720 KB Formats a 2HD floppy disk with 8 sectors to hold 1 2 MB Formats a 2HD floppy disk with 18 sectors to hold 1 44 MB Checking the format If the floppy disk has already been formatted select Disk Info after step 2 on the previous page and the following information will be displayed If the floppy disk has not been formatted or if it has been formatted in a format other than one of the above the error message Storage media is defective will be displayed Type of disk Total disk space Used disk space Available on disk Number of Setup data files Number of P P data files Number of ACQ bin data files Number of ACQ ascii data
236. he waveform up to the trigger point the pre trigger section You can also set the trigger position in the range of 5div in steps of 1 50 div The trigger point refers to the point at which a trigger is activated In case the trigger delay to be explained here after is set to Os the trigger point and the trigger position refer to the same location Observation of the waveform up to the trigger position is made possible by constantly storing sampled data in the acquisition memory i e removing the oldest data each time new data is acquired retaining data in the memory and displaying it on the screen each time a trigger is activated Trigger position 5d setting range CN 7 M d Trigger position N 4 S Pre trigger range Post trigger range 0 100 Acquisition memory record length s jac gt Trigger Delay page 6 19 Normally the waveform around the trigger point is displayed However the trigger delay function enables display of a waveform which has been acquired after a specified time called the delay time has elapsed following activation of a trigger T trigger position Delay time x f Trigger point Trigger Hold off page 6 20 The trigger hold off function temporarily stops detection of the next trigger once a trigger has been activated For example when observing a pulse train signal such as a PCM code
237. i K When averaging mode is selected 3 Turn the rotary knob to set the desired averaging count attenuation constant Explanation Average Acquisition Rep Length Count NORMAL ENVELOPE ON 10K 256 Selecting sampling mode 2 After step 1 has been completed press the Rep soft key and select ON for real time sampling mode or OFF for repetitive sampling mode Acquisition Re ENVELOPE AVERAGE OFF Selecting the record length maximum displayable record length for DL1540CL 2 After step 1 has been completed press the Length soft key The screen returns the length selection menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the maximum displayable record length that you want to use Record Length 1K NEL 100K 400K 1M 2M NORMAL NY Ur LYCRA NN Length tOK Selecting acquisition mode Acquisition mode can be selected from the following modes The default setting is NORMAL NORMAL Normal mode Sampled data is stored in the acquisition memory without specific data processing ENVELOPE Envelope mode The data is sampled at 100 MS s Each time data is stored in the acquisition memory the maximum and minimum values are extracted These are then stored in the acquisition memory and used to display the envelope waveform AVERAGE Averaging mode The averaging count can be set to values between 1
238. id scale etc are in black and no background OFF Prints just like the SHORT short copy printing type described on page 10 4 IM 701530 01E 10 11 Jeyoj d 4e1uug eui 0 sJejeurejeg Hues pue suuojo eM pefejdsiq Bumndino 10 7 Printing the Screen Image to an External Printer Points to note when printing the screen image to an external printer With some printers the screen image cannot be printed properly If this problem continues to occur even when the printer has been adjusted contact the printer s manufacturer e Itis possible to print the screen image to a printer connected to a personal computer Save the screen image data to a floppy disk as described in Section 12 5 Saving Screen Image Data then open the data using the computer and print it Note DL1540C DL1540CL doesn t be recognizable errors example the chart end of external printer In case of occuring the errors if DL1540C DL1540CL is executed to output to the external printer aborting the printing by pressing the COPY key Print example ESC P Printed by Canon Buble Jet BJC 440J 1998 11 18 13 19 44 NORMSMS s 20fus div Stopped q 200us div cu ON E 50 mV div 10 1 Fda ue EE FOE VERE Pe Eve OR Renan SEE TEN deeper aris duse sd Q b v CH2 OFF i 200mV div 10 1 bc U 000v CH3 OFF 1vzdiv 10 1 DG Q 00v CHA OFF Widiv 10 1 DC 0 00V Record Length Main 10K Zoom 1K
239. ient temperature and humidity Ambient temperature 5 to 40 C To ensure high measurement accuracy ambient temperature should be 23 2 C Ambient humidity 20 to 8096 RH No condensation should be present To ensure high measurement accuracy ambient humidity should be 55 10 RH Flat horizontal locations Place the instrument in a stable location which is horizontal in each direction Operating the instrument in an unstable location may hinder recording of the printer and accurate measurement Well ventilated location Vent holes are situated on the left side of the instrument In addition vent holes for the cooling fan are also situated in the rear panel To prevent a rise in the internal temperature the vent holes should not be blocked and sufficient clearance should be maintained around them 5 cm or more LE 2 5 cm 5cm or Ecc or 2cm Ss more EEHOEBCE more or ES 0 5 more A S If the instrument is equipped with a built in printer or when the GP IB cable is connected make sure to allow sufficient space for operations in addition to the space for the vent holes Never install the instrument in any of the following places In direct sunlight or near heat sources Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gases are present Near strong magnetic field sources Near high voltage equipment or power lines Where the level of mechanical vibration is high In an unsta
240. ightmost time axis divisions Selection of 400 KW 1 MW and 2 MW record lengths is available only if trigger mode is single e Itis not possible to switch on Channel 3 or Channel 4 while record length is set to 2 MW It is not possible to select 2 MW as the record length while Channel 3 or Channel 4 is on Refer to Appendix 3 for information about the relationship between time axes sampling rates and record lengths Points to note when making acquisition mode and sampling mode settings Normal mode operations are carried out even if envelope mode has been selected e It is not possible to select envelope mode if waveforms are sampled by the external clock f each single mode has been selected as the trigger mode or if the history memory function has been set to ON averaging mode cannot be selected f auto mode or auto level mode has been selected as the trigger mode and T div has been set such that the display is in roll mode averaging will not be performed even if averaging mode is selected In this case waveforms are displayed in roll mode Itis not possible to select envelope mode if input smoothing or FFT has been set to ON 7 2 IM 701530 01E 7 2 Setting the Input Filter Keys and Procedure Rotary knob 1 Press the FILTER key to display the input filter setting menu Applying the bandwidth limit 2 Press the 20 MHZ soft key to apply the bandwidth limit To cancel the bandwidth limit sele
241. igital data The digital data is then stored in the acquisition memory by the data processing circuit at a sample rate which matches the time axis setting The data sent out from the acquisition memory by the data processing circuit is then processed according to the invert waveform and averaging settings then subjected to interpolation and P P compression to obtain the maximum minimum values within each specified intervals then converted into display data by the display control circuit and finally memorized in the waveform display buffer The data read from the waveform display buffer and non waveform display data read from the graphic display buffer are combined and the combined image is displayed on the color LCD display IM 701530 01E suonounJ 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Input coupling page 5 2 When you only want to observe the amplitude of an alternating current signal or when you just want to observe the signal relative to a given reference voltage eliminating the direct current components from the input signal makes observation easier You may also want to check the ground level or observe the input signal waveform with the offset voltage removed In this case you can change the input coupling setting This will switch the coupling method which determines how the input signal is input to the vertical control circuit voltage axis The input coupling method can be chosen from the following AC The
242. ignal Page 14 1 External trigger clock input terminal Description of external trigger gt Page 6 2 Description of external clock Page 5 8 Connector for half pitch interface Vent holes Power connector Connection method Page 3 3 Vent holes Power supply fuse For fuse replacement Page 15 7 Support Use the support to use this instrument with the display facing upwards The following sections of the rear panel on DL1540CL models with the C8 option differ from those of the standard model GP IB EEE488 GO NO GO determination output connector SCSI interface connector IM 701530 01E 2 1 ued U9 3 Jo esf pue eureN 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel Top View Top View Vent holes Rear panel Front panel Built in printer optional How to output data to the printer Chapter 10 Handle Hold the instrument by these handles when you carry it 2 2 IM 701530 01E 2 2 Operation Keys Rotary Knob Keys and Rotary Knob used for Various Functions CLEAR TRACE CLEAR TRACE key Page 4 5 Deletes the snapshot waveform or accumulated waveform Also used to re start averaging and repetitive time sampling Soft keys
243. ime Comm Date Infor Config To Base E Time mation NextMenu r Soft keys 3 i 1 3 Press the Self Test soft key to start selftesting J Self To SS DataOut Scale 58H LOD Te ien J MISC key 15 6 IM 701530 01E 15 4 Replacing the Power Supply Fuse Specifications Procedure Before replacing the fuse make sure to turn OFF the power supply and disconnect the power source Use ony specified fuses which should only be obtained from your sales representative The usage of other fuses might cause fire Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 3 15A Type Time lag Approved standard VDE SEMKO Part No A1351EF 1 Turn the power switch OFF 2 Remove the power cord from the power supply 3 Pull out the fuse holder by placing a screw driver under the tab and pulling the holder forward 4 Remove the blown fuse located at the front of the fuse holder Note that the other fuse is a spare one 5 Make sure the ratings of the new fuses are correct and install them 6 Click the holder back into its place IM 701530 01E 15 7 uonoedsu pue eoueuajure N Punoouse qnou 15 5 Recommended Parts for Replacement The 3 year warranty applies only t
244. ime axis setting should lie within 500 ms div to 50 s div Waveform acquisition should be started During real time printing only the execution abortion operations are valid During real time printing the cursor measurements and waveform parameter measurements will be halted When you press the START STOP key during real time printing data acquisition will stop and therefore real time printing will also stop Pressing the START STOP key again results in resuming data acquisition and therefore real time printing Real time printing is not possible during ZOOM MainZoom display X Y display or when loaded recalled waveforms are being displayed 10 6 IM 701530 01E 10 4 Connecting an External Plotter Compatible Plotters Any plotter which accepts HP GL commands can be used However the plotting range varies according to the model causing loss of output data on some plots Communications Seitings This instrument Initiating output to the plotter will switch this instrument to talk only mode automatically Plotter Set the plotter to listen only mode Note Foradescription of the GP IB interface refer to the Communication Interface User s Manual IM 701530 11E Connecting Procedure 1 Turn OFF the power to both the instrument and the plotter 2 Connect the plotter to the instrument using the GP IB cable After the plotter is connected tighten the screws firmly GP IB connector GP IB cable
245. ing eight types However only one type of output can be selected at a time A5 Upper WAVE and A5 Lower WAVE allow output of two A5 sized screens of information on a sheet of A4 paper Setting Output item Output size Output location A3 WAVE Screen hardcopy A3 Middle A3 SETUP Set up parameters A3 Middle A4 WAVE Screen hardcopy A4 Middle A4 SETUP Set up parameters A4 Middle A5 Upper WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 Lower WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Lower half A5 Upper WAVE amp Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 Lower SETUP Set up parameters A5 Lower half A5 Upper WAVE amp Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 Lower MEASURE waveform measurement data A5 Lower half Selecting the pen speed The pen speed can be selected from the following two speeds NORM Plots at the default speed setting SLOW Plots at a speed of 10 cm s Selecting the pen assignment method Pen Mode The pens can be assigned according to the following two methods AUTO Assigns pens automatically as shown in the table below according to the number of pens Number of GRID TRACE LOAD installed pens 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 5 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 MANUAL A particular pen can be assigned to the graticule to TRACE1 to 4 and to LOAD 1 to 4 The pen numbers that can be assigned are 0 to 12 If 0 is selected no plotting is performed for the correspon
246. ing selected the Auto Pen setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to display the setting frame 12 Use the rotary knob to set the number of pens Press the RESET key to return the default value 13 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting frame Continue with step 18 14 After having selected MANUAL use the rotary knob and the SELECT key to select the Grid Pen setting the TRACE1 Pen TRACE4 Pen setting and the LOAD1 Pen LOAD4 Pen setting 15 Use the rotary knob to set the pen numbers Press the RESET key to return the default value 16 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting frame 17 Repeat steps 14 to 16 to set other items of the MANUAL setting 18 Press the ESC key to close the setting menu IM 701530 01E 12 11 ysiq Ajddoj4 e wo eyeq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes H 12 5 Saving Screen Image Data Explanation Selecting the image color with TIFF or BMP only 19 Press the Color soft key to display the image color selection menu Position Format FileName AutoFile Color Compress To 0 00 TIFF OFF OFF ON TopMenu Do ktiv 20 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired image color For details regarding the explanation of the image color Position Color Format FieName GRAY HALF FULL 0 00 Ktiv wr vj rop T Data compression with TIFF or BMP only 21 Press the Compre
247. ion the loaded ACQ waveform will be canceled When you select ON the loaded ACQ waveform will not be canceled even when you start data acquisition In this case the channel display appears in the left upper side of the screen CH1 CH1 Coupling Probe Invert E Hold uc AC GND 10 t O ON ON 17 The way to display the ACQ waveforms and cancel them is exactly the same as for input signal waveforms For details refer to page 5 1 12 6 IM 701530 01E 12 3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Explanation Auto naming function AutoFile If AutoFile has been set to ON a number 3 digits starting from 001 will be assigned to the waveform data automatically when the data is saved It is possible to insert a common file name up to five characters before the assigned number by specifying the file name using FileName Selecting the data format in which to save data Data Type The data format can be selected from the following P P Converts the displayed waveform data P P compressed data to binary data and saves it ACQ Converts the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory to either binary or ascii data and saves it BIN Converts to binary data ASCII Converts to ascii data Computed waveforms can only be saved in the P P format When the trigger mode is in single N mode displayed P P data will be saved Saving the waveform data ACQ in ASCII data format while displa
248. ion over the time axis direction as described on the next page Zoom position is specified in units of grid division Display record length of 400 KW 1 MW and 2 MW is available on DL1540CL Display in zooming mode As shown below it is possible to select to display a pre zoom waveform MAIN and its expanded waveform ZOOM simultaneously or to display the expanded waveform only In the MainZoom display a box is displayed in the display frame for the pre zoom waveform to indicate the position of the expanded waveform MainZoom display ZOOM display 10ms div expansion zoom box expanded waveform Sequential Store page 7 7 In the real time sampling mode waveform data will be stored to the acquisition memory only a set number of times and all waveforms can be displayed This stops automatically after acquisition This function is operable when the trigger mode is set to single N mode The maximum number of waveforms that can be stored into acqsuisition memory under this mode varies according to model and the maximum displayable record length in the range from 5 to 100 waveforms The acquisition memory record length the number of data points per waveform for a given channel is equivalent to the maximum displayable record length Sequential store operation is not available at maximum displayable record lengths of 400KW or above Once the specified number of waveforms have been stored you can disp
249. irrespective of the data type The header file contains information in ASCII format used when saved waveforms are recalled for analysis The same header file is used by all YOKOGAWA measuring instruments so it may contain some data which is not necessary for this instrument Only a brief description is given in this section Detailed technical information on the header file is available from YOKOGAWA If you need this information contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative YOKOGAWA ASCII FILE FORMAT Publiclnfo Common information label FormatVersion 1 01 Version No of header file format Model 1540CL Model name Endian Big Endian mode Big Ltl 1 for storage DataFormat Trace Storage format Trace Block of binary file waveform data 2 GroupNumber 1 Number of groups for display TraceTotalNumber 1 Total number of selected waveforms DataOffset 0 Start position of waveform data Group1 Group No of displayed waveforms TraceNumber 1 Number of waveforms in the group BlockNumber 3 Maximum number of blocks in the group 3 TraceName Ch2 Waveform No BlockSize 10024 Data size of each block of waveform VResolution 3 05176e 03 Resolution co efficient of Y axis conversion equation for each waveform 4 VOffset 0 00000e 00 Offset co efficient of Y axis conversion equation for each waveform 4 VDataType IS2 Type of waveform data of each waveform 5 VUnit V Units used for Y axis of each waveform no effect on
250. its number 5 6 7 Press the CLEAR TRACE key to clear the displayed waveforms Press the DISPLAY key to display the display selection menu Use the rotary knob to set the number of the data you want to see The corresponding waveform will appear at the same time Display Number 0 Intrpl x Accumu Time All Disp Wide Scrn SINE OFF OFF Stamp EXEC Vd ON Displaying a specific acquired data by selecting its time of acquisition 8 Continuing from step 6 press the Time Stamp soft key to display the list of acquired data with their acquisition times Display Intrpl x v Accumu Time All Disp Wide Scrn iyd SINE OFF OFF Stamp EXEC ON 9 Use the rotary knob to highlight the data you want to see Stopped X Count 90 Time Stamp 000 06 58 54 001 06 58 54 002 06 58 54 003 06 58 54 004 06 58 54 005 06 58 54 006 06 58 54 007 06 58 54 008 06 58 55 009 06 58 55 010 06 58 55 011 06 58 55 012 06 58 55 013 06 58 55 014 06 58 55 015 06 58 55 016 06 58 55 018 06 58 56 019 06 58 56 10 Press the SELECT key The list will disappear and the selected 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 06 58 56 06 58 56 06 58 56 06 58 56 06 58 56 06 58 56 06 58 56 06 58 57 06 58 57 06 58 57 06 58 57 06 58 57 06 58 57 06 58 57 06 58
251. lay any of the waveforms individually or all of them together so that it is possible to derive a time series of the waveform variation The drawings below illustrate how stored data can be displayed assuming sequential storage of 100 waveforms Display example in case N 100 times Displaying all waveforms Displaying newest waveform Displaying oldest waveform ALL Display Number 0 Display Number 99 ome f Oe ux V JVVIINN 1 14 IM 701530 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions History Memory page 7 9 The oscilloscope automatically retains the last N waveforms recorded by real time sampling where N is equivalent to the maximum number of waveforms that can be stored by sequential store The record length for history storage is the same as that for sequential store The oscilloscope retains all waveforms for the first N triggers then for each subsequent trigger the oscilloscope deletes the oldest stored waveform You are free to switch the display from the current newest waveform to any of other N 1 waveforms in the history The illustration below shows how data can be displayed assuming N 100 Saved waveform data of previous 100 triggers od Io lw cu MN iow tot Io Io tod Io M mI Display Number 0 Display Number 25 Wide Screen page 7 11 The area for displaying the waveform can be switched from normal mode at 501 dots horizontal X
252. le of displaying VGA can be used Pin No Signal Name Specification 1 Red 0 7 Vp p 2 Green 0 7 Vp p 3 Blue 0 7 Vp p 4 2 5 am 6 GND 7 GND 8 GND 9 10 GND 11 12 13 Horizontal synchronous signal Approx 31 5 kHz TTL negative 14 Vertical synchronous signal Approx 60 kHz TTL negative 15 Connecting to the monitor 1 Turn of the power to both the monitor and the instrument 2 Connect the monitor to the insrument using an analog RGB cable 3 Turning ON both the monitor and the instrument displays the instrment s screen on the monitor NOTO To redudce the power consumption set Video Out to OFF when not in use The initial val ue of Video Out is OFF The picture on the monitor may become unstable if the instrument or other equipment is broght too close the monitor Some monitors may display a picture from which the sides are missing IM 701530 01E 14 5 suoneJedo 19410 BH 14 6 Setting the Brightness of the LCD Keys and Procedure Rotary knob 1 Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu 2 Press the To Next Menu soft key
253. ll the number of triggers has exceeded N each new waveform acquisition deletes the oldest waveform in the history Displaying acquired data Refer to page 7 8 Selecting the waveform to be displayed Display Number The setting ranges from 0 to 99 The latest data being 0 previous data are being labeled 1 2 3 etc Acquisition period You can extend the acquisition period by setting the hold off time which temporarily halts the trigger detection This feature makes it possible to obtain a history of a periodically occurring waveform Points to note when using the history memory function Data will not be acquired in case of the repetitive sampling mode If data acquisition is aborted while in progress only the waveforms which have been acquired so far will appear on the display Only the acquired waveforms can be selected at the Display Number setting The history memory function cannot be turned ON when the acquisition mode is set to average or when the trigger mode is set to SINGLE SGL S SGL L or N SGL When the history memory function is set to ON the display cannot be in the roll mode The previously acquired waveforms will not appear on the screen while acquisition is in progress Waveforms will be acquired in the memory even if the display of the input signals has been turned OFF To display the acquired waveforms however the display of the input signals should be set to ON Refer to page 5 1
254. lows Format The connector uses a modular jack RJ11 Use the optional accessory 366973 sold separately for the cable If you are using a commercially sold cable 4 contact modular cable for telephone circuits wire the pins according to the following figure Pinarrangement GO NO GO Pin No Signal Name Logic GO OUT GND L 4 1 L 1 1 1 oOuhWOnhd NOGO OUT NC no connection NC no connection Negative logic Negative logic NC no connection DL side connector IM 701530 01E 9 13 uonoy OD ON OD Buruuoped 9 3 Using the GO NO GO Signal Output Function Output Timing Output timing EXEC Y 10ms Acquisition lt gt or more Acquisition I I Determination I l 1 Determination Result Result NOGO OUT GO OUT Remains Low until the system is ready for the next judgement or for longer if the data is to be output to the built in printer or to a floppy disk Connecting to Another Instrument N CAUTION Never apply an external voltage to the NO GO OUT and GO OUT terminals otherwise damage to the instrument may result When connecting the GO NO GO signal output externally make sure not to connect other signal pins by mistake Errors in connection may cause damage to this instrument or to the other connected instrument For models other than
255. m display Pe RTM Re m 2 05ms vi 1 22 00v T2 2 09ms v2 1 22 00v lar 4 14ms av 1 44 00V H aT 241 546Hz Measurement values 52 Measurement lt x Automated Measurements page 8 7 This instrument can automatically measure 22 items of a displayed waveform such as rise time and pulse width Also the delay between channels can be measured Any of the parameters can be selected for any displayed waveform FFTdisplay CHI 1006 T kuz div IF1 1 15 00kHz P1 1 20 16v Measurement F2 1 35 60kHz P2 1 9 7dbV i 0 aee eO aTa values Maximum 24 measurement values can be displayed However if measurement values are displayed simultaneously with the corresponding waveforms the number of measurement values which can be displayed for one channel depends on the number of to be measured waveforms For example in case there are four waveforms to be measured only six measurement values can be displayed for each waveform Under normal settings the oscilloscope calculates measurement values based on the displayed data P P compressed data or interpolated data But you can also opt to perform calculations directly on the data values within the acquisition memory Furthermore use of the MISC Information menu or communications function enables output of all the selected measured values though the measured values cannot be updated by the Information menu T
256. matting functions provided by the instrument For Models without the Internal Hard Disk You will need the SCSI interface unit 700930 sold separately For the procedure to connect the SCSI device see IM700930 01E IM 701530 01E 13 1 ysiq pJer euJeiu eui Jo e91 8q ISOS 9y Wo eyeq Duipeo pue Bunes 13 2 About the Internal Hard Disk for C8 option only N CAUTION When using the instrument in a vibrating environment turn OFF the motor rotation of the internal hard disk Keys and Procedure 1 Press the MISC key to display the MISC top menu 2 Press the To NextMenu soft key DataOut Scale 58 LCD scsi e Menu m Soft keys C3 E 3 Press the SCSI soft key to display the motor ON OFF menu m l J E External R SCSI ID e E Toni 5 O as T 4 Press the Motor Sw soft key to select ON or OFF MISC key Explanation You can turn ON OFF the motor rotation of the internal hard disk on this instrument By turning the motor OFF you can protect the internal hard disk from vibrations 13 2 IM 701530 01E 13 3 Selecting the SCSI Device or the Internal Hard Disk Keys and Procedure r Soft keys 1 Press SHIFT STORE RECALL FILE key to display the data save load set
257. mbols Pressing the or key shifts the entry position cursor to the left or right ESC key Aborts entering file name or comments during setting The keyboard screen will be closed and setting will be ignored Points to note The following number of characters can be entered Filename 1to8 Comment Oto 25 The following character types are available File name Digits letters not case sensitive underline minus Comment All characters and symbols on the keyboard case sensitive and space The following five file names are not available due to MS DOS restrictions AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK IM 701530 01E Chapter 5 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes 5 1 Turning Display of Input Signal Waveforms ON OFF Keys and Procedure 1 The waveform will appear on the display after you have pressed peH key Z the CH key The indicator above the CH key will light up I O 2 If you want to display all waveforms press all the CH keys and L i verify that all the indicators light up eS EX 4 3 In order to turn the display of a waveform off press the CE uem corresponding CH key once more O caso Explanation Maximum display record length and limits on waveform acquisition when 2 MW for DL1540CL is selected The channels which acquire display the waveform are limited to
258. median of the amplitude of the trigger signal is detected and the trigger level is set to the median value automatically if the trigger level is invalidated For a detailed description refer to 6 8 Setting the Trigger Mode page 6 13 Note If the trigger slope is set to up down t no trigger can be activated either at rise f or fall 1 In this case try to set an appropriate hold off time This may cause a trigger to be activated For a description of how to set the hold off time refer to page 6 20 IM 701530 01E 6 3 16u e BuneAnoy H 6 3 Setting the Window Trigger Keys and Procedure 1 Press the TYPE key to display the trigger type selection menu notary Knob 2 Press the WINDOW soft key OR PATTERN and WIDTH menus are optional r Soft keys EDGE Ce Ww DE PATTERN WIDTH J x Y z i Selecting the trigger condition and setting the window m E SS 3 Press the LEVEL SOURCE key to display the trigger condition mum selection menu OQ 4 Press either soft key IN or OUT mm Center i i Zs t indow Condition indow Knol Level TYPE key EN OUT Eu WIDTH oov LEVEL SOURCE key 5 Press the CENTER soft key and set the center level of the window using the
259. mode the minimum maximum values are displayed in a pair For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling mode is active The sample rate given in for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at IM 701530 01E App 7 xipueddy H Appendix 3_ Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length for DL1540L When Maximum Displayable Record Length is set to 400KW Selection of 400KW length is not available if T div is set between 50ns and 5ns or if trigger mode is other than single Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active At Least One of CH3 CH4 is ON CH3 CH4 are Both OFF When proie Mode Rep ON or OFF Rep ON or OFF Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed E rate record length rate record length rate record length T div S s word S s word S s word 50s 1k 400K 8div 1k 400K 8div 100M 500 x 2 200K x 2 gt 20s 2k 400K 2k 400K 100M 1k x2 200K x2 2 10s 5k 400K 8div 5k 400K 8div 100M 2 5k x 2 200K x 2 2 5s 10k 400K 8div 10k 400K 8div 1OOM 5k x2 200K x2 3 2s 20k 400K 20k 400K 100M 10k x 2 200K x 2 5 1s 50k 400K 8div 50k 400K 8div 100M 25k x 2 200K x 2 m 500ms 100k 400K 8div 100k 400K 8div 100M 50k x 2 200K x 2 200ms 200k 400K 200k 400K
260. n changed After the power is turned ON 3 minutes 10 minutes 30 minutes then every half hour 4 6 IM 701530 01E 4 6 Setting Values Keys and Procedure Entry using the keyboard Rotary knob SELECT key 1 Press the SHIFT MISC KEYBOARD key to display the keyboard ESC key Setting by rotary knob and SELECT key co D q 2 Use the rotary knob to select the desired value and press the CN SELECT key This allows setting one by one a 3 Select the SET key and press the SELECT key The keyboard screen will be closed Setting by corresponding panel keys Keys 2 After having performed step 1 press the corresponding panel corresponding SHIFT key keys directly to keyboard key 3 After having entered the new value select the SET key and press the SELECT key The keyboard screen will be closed MISC KEYBOARD key 1 div E NNNM gn geo go en e E E o gen go go go en E isl en v DIV v DIV v DIV v DIV 4 5 SET 4 5 6 m 4 5 6 u aj 5 6 NAN POSITION POSITION POSITION POSITION 1 2 a SET J B3 3 w 1 2 3 n 1 2 s ser z aren A j 3 en ms J a Fr ee j 3
261. n between the two easier Snapshot waveforms are screen image waveforms so they cannot be used for cursor measurement automated measurement or be stored 3 Ny Nr Sa waveform IW NS Clear Trace page 4 5 This function enables you to clear snapshot waveforms and accumulated waveforms and restart the averaging process or repetitive sampling in a single operation GO NO GO Determination Chapter 9 The GO NO GO function is useful when you want to inspect signals and track down abnormal symptoms on a production line making electronic equipment It performs pass fail determinations on whether waveforms are within a specified range or not and takes preset actions in the case of failure NO GO There are two determination methods In the first one a waveform zone is specified on the screen and in the second a range for each waveform parameter is specified Determination can be performed on up to four input signals using AND or OR logic In the case of NO GO various actions can be performed for example waveform data can be saved and screen hardcopy can be output to the built in printer optional In addition the determination results can be output by an external signal Zone waveform Rear the waveform data Outputting hard copy 1 20 IM 701530 01E 1 6 Other Useful Functions Making Hardcopy Print outs of the Screen and Printing Set up Information Chapter 10 Screen hardcopy and setting parameter
262. n of the probe as described in the next section on page 3 7 Failure to do so may result in unstable gain across different frequencies thereby preventing correct measurement Calibration must be performed for each channel f the object to be measured is connected to the instrument directly without using a probe correct measurement cannot be performed due to the load effect Specifications for the probe 700998 supplied with the instrument after calibration Item Specifications Conditions Setting 10 1 Setting 1 1 Input impedance capacitance 10 MQ 2 approx 14 pF 1MQ 1 5 approx 100 pF When used with this instrument Attenuation ratio 10 1 42 5 When used with this instrument Frequency band DC to 150 MHz DC to 6 MHz When used with this instrument Rise time 2 4 ns or less 58 ns or less When used with this instrument Maximum input voltage 600 V DC ACpeak 1 Connector type Total length or 424 Vrms Frequency is 100 kHz or lower BNC BNC 1 5m 1 5 m 1 When the probe s attenuation ratio is 1 1 never input voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage of this instrument When using a probe other than the one supplied with the instrument To measure a signal which contains harmonics of approximately 150 MHz use a probe with a frequency band of 150 MHz or higher Correct measured values cannot be displayed if the probe s attenuation ratio is not 1 1 10 1 100 1 or 1000
263. n the screen 100 times is display in red if the grade width is 4 or in white if the grade width is 32 IM 701530 01E 7 13 SUOIIPUOD Aeldsiq pue uonisinboy Buibueuo 7 8 Displaying an Accumulated Waveform Clearing the accumulated waveform Pressing the CLEAR TRACE key clears all accumulated waveforms except the most recent one Points to note The following operations apply only to the latest waveform s data if they are performed using accumulated waveform display Cursor measurements and automated measurements Saving the waveform data f you want to stop accumulation press the START STOP key to stop measurement Pressing the START STOP key again to restart measurement will clear the previously displayed waveforms and the accumulation time will be reset Waveforms which can be accumulated are Pre zoom waveforms expanded waveforms and X Y waveforms The currently accumulated waveforms will be cleared and accumulation will restart if the following operations are carried out When the display type ZOOM Mode setting is changed during zoom or X Y display When the area for displaying the waveform Wide Screen setting is changed 7 14 IM 701530 01E 7 9 Displaying an X Y Waveform Keys and Procedure 1 Press the DISPLAY key to display the setting menu 2 Press the X Y soft key to display the X Y selection menu Intrpl x Accurmu SINE OFF ON
264. nd the PC 1 Turn OFF the DL1540CL and the PC 2 Connect the DL1540CL and the PC with the SCSI cable 3 Turn ON the DL1540CL first 4 Turn ON the PC Precautions to be taken while the devices are connected Newly created file during connection Sometimes the PC will not recognize a new file that is created on the DL1540CL while the DL1540CL and the PC are connected In such case reconnect the devices according to the procedures given in Connecting the DL1540CL and the PC The files will be recognized by taking the following steps if the PC is running Windows 95 98 1 On Windows 95 98 open the Settings tab in the properties dialog box for the connected drive and check the Removable box 2 Reboot the PC 3 After creating a new file on the DL1540CL select Refresh in the file list window Explorer for example Select My Computer Control Panel System Device Manager gt Disk Drive and select the relevant drive from the drive list The Removable check box is located in the Properties dialog box under the Settings tab You can check the drive number under Current Drive Drive letter If the PC connected to the DL1540CL has two or more hard disks or if the hard disk is partitioned into multiple drives the drive letters D E etc may change when the DL1540CL is connected For details see the instruction manual that came with the PC or the drive The drive letter for the DL1540CL cannot be changed E
265. ne Saving the determination zone 15 Select the field where the determination zone will be saved by pressing any of the ZONE1 ZONE4 soft keys The determination waveforms which have been saved in ZONE1 ZONE2 ZONE3 and ZONE4 can only be applied to trace1 2 3 and 4 respectively 16 Execute saving by pressing the STORE EXEC soft key Store As store out amp ZONE2 ZONES ZONE4 EXEC TopMenu INO1 e The determination waveforms are saved in the internal memory Old determination waveforms which are already present in the internal memory will be overwritten when new ones will be saved An error message will not appear Therefore verify before saving whether or not determination waveforms already exist in the internal memory Refer to steps 18 to 20 17 Return to the GO NO GO top menu by pressing the Quit amp TopMenu soft key Redrawing editing the saved determination zone 18 Press the Edit soft key of the GO NO GO top menu The zone creation menu will appear Mode GO NOGO Type E orr Eg PRMIR Edit Setup EXEC 19 Press the REDRAW soft key and the zone trace menu will appear NEW REDRAW To TopMenu 20 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired zone you want to redraw The saved determination zone will appear Zone Trace NEW ZONE2 ZONES ZONE4 10 TopMenu 21 To edit the redrawn zone repeat steps 7 t
266. ne waveform is being created Soft keys SELECT key RESET key lt gt keys Rotary knob If any other button is being pushed the following message will appear This key cannot be operated when the zone wave edit mode is in progress Creating the Waveform 4 Press the Edit soft key of the GO NO GO top menu The zone creation menu will appear Mode GO NOGO Type g orr Eg PRMIR Edit Setup EXEC 5 Press the NEW soft key and the base trace menu will appear NEW REDRAW To TopMenu 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired base trace To edit the entire waveform continue with step 7 to edit a part of the waveform continue with step 10 Base Trace TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 To TopMenu IM 701530 01E 9 1 uorov OD ON OD Buruuoped 9 1 Judging using a Waveform Zone Editing the whole waveform 7 Press the WHOLE soft key to display the editing menu The default setting is WHOLE 8 After having pressed the Move soft key to select the editing direction use the rotary knob to edit the zone You may also use the or keys Upper Edit Move DONE ht PART joan Oliv Example in case 4 is set at the MOVE setting NINI NN Example in case g is set at the MOVE setting following the previous example AS NI NAIN Example in case 4 is set at the MOVE setting followi
267. ng that this is a computed waveform and the voltage axis information after the computation are not stored or saved Therefore if this data is recalled or loaded and then a measurement is made using the cursors or automated measurement of waveform parameters correct values will not be displayed To display the correct values save the waveform data on CH1 and CH2 from the acquisition memory to the floppy disk SCSI device as binary data Then load the data and redo the waveform computation Waveform data in the acquisition memory cannot be stored in the internal memory If the computed result due to adding or subtracting is larger than 10 24 div or the result due to multiplying is larger than 13 div a chopped waveform will be displayed as in the following diagram This is due to the fact that the computed result exceeds the display range Even if OFF is selected at the waveform math setting menu the phase shift function is still effective To disable the phase shift function set the phase shift to 0 div IM 701530 01E 8 19 SUJJOJOAeM Duiz euy B 8 6 Displaying the Power Spectrum Performing FFT Computation Keys and Procedure 1 Press the SHIFT MATH FFT key to display the FFT computation setting menu 2 Press the FFT soft key and select ON FFT Trace Window Display r Soft keys C3 OFF on t RECT FFT Selecting the waveform of measurement C X J SS
268. ng the previous example WINING S Example in case is set at the MOVE setting following the previous example Ww NM Nf 9 Repeat step 8 until editing the waveform has been completed To edit a part of the waveform continue with step 10 if editing has been completed continue with step 14 Editing a part of the waveform 10 After having completed step 6 or step 9 press the PART soft key to display the editing menu 11 After having pressed the T Range soft key select either T1 or T2 to set either boudary of the setting range Then use the rotary knob to edit the boundary position You may also use the or keys Do this for both the left T1 and right side boundary T2 12 After having pressed the Zone soft key to select the editing direction use the rotary knob to edit the zone You may also use the or keys T2 Edit Zone T Range DONE ant WHOLE 2j n Ziv Example in case 4 is set at the ZONE setting following the previous zone editing example Example in case g is set at the ZONE setting following the previous example 13 Repeat steps 11 and 12 until partial editing of the waveform has been completed Completing editing the waveform 14 After having completed editing the waveform press the DONE soft key to display the saving menu 9 2 IM 701530 01E 9 1 Judging using a Waveform Zo
269. nge in the horizontal direction amp gt 5div from the center of the display setting step is 0 02div Specifying a file name when FD P P FD ACQ FD IMAGE SCSI P P SCSI ACQ SCSI IMAGE HD P P HD ACQ or HD IMAGE has been selected as the trigger action Specifying the file name File Name A file No starting from 0001 is assigned to each waveform data automatically when the data is saved on a floppy disk a SCSI device or the internal hard disk It is possible to insert a common file name character string consisting of up to four characters before the assigned file number for instance NOGOO0000 The entered file name is will be reset when the action becomes NONE or when GO NOGO determination is set to OFF The file name will be reset if the GO NOGO determination is executed aborted using EXEC and ABORT soft keys When saving the screen image data set the image data format You can set the format at the hard copy selection menu that appears by pressing the SHIFT COPY MENU key see page 12 11 Example of data format After GO NO GO determination has been completed the NO GO counts the date time and the results for each trace will be saved automatically in the DL MISC directory at the floppy disc The extension is GNG These files cannot be opened using this instrument use a personal computer for this purpose JudgeCnt NoGoCnt Date Time Trace1
270. nnne nennen nnne nennen nennen 6 13 6 9 Setting the Action On Trigger sesssssesesseseeeeneeneeenen ener nennen nene 6 15 6 10 Setting the Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 6 17 6 11 Changing the Trigger Position sesenta 6 18 6 12 Setting the Trigger Delay ziir a a aea a a aaaea nnne nnne nnns 6 19 6 13 Setting th Hold ffi Titrie o eee tS eO RARE 6 20 Chapter 7 Changing Acquisition and Display Conditions 7 1 Selecting Acquisition Mode Sampling Mode and Record Length for DL1540CL 7 1 7 2 Setting the Input Filter ate e eco ae E dee e da dee rta 7 3 7 3 Zooming the Waveform coii th ta ete a ui eon dain ete tee pride ta 7 4 7 4 Acquiring Waveforms using the Sequential Store Function sseeeeees 7 7 7 5 Using the History Memory Function eesseeseeeeneneeeneeen mener 7 9 7 6 Changing the area for displaying the waveform ssseennm 7 11 7 7 Changing the Interpolation Settings seen 7 12 7 8 Displaying an Accumulated Waveform sssseeeeeennenm emen 7 13 7 9 Displaying an X Y Waveform sssssssesseeeeeneeneeen mener enne nnne nnne nnns 7 15 7 10 Changing the Graticule Scale and Marker Settings ssseees 7 16 7 11 Turning the Waveform Information Display ON OFF seeeeeeeeeenenen 7 17 7 12 Changing the Screen Intensity
271. normal mode However if the ACQ Hold of the INPUT key is ON the trigger mode is not changed automatically In this case change the trigger mode to normal mode before using the frame skip function Points to note when activating a TV trigger e If the trigger type setting is changed the TV trigger setting will be invalidated However selecting the TV trigger again will restore the previous settings Only channel 1 can be used for the video signal Other channels cannot be used ForaTV trigger the trigger coupling HF rejection and trigger hysteresis settings are ignored IM 701530 01E 6 7 JeDBu e BuneAnoy Ey 6 5 Setting the OR Trigger Optional Keys and Procedure Rotary knob r Soft keys X X 1 Press the TYPE key to display the trigger type selection menu 2 Press the OR soft key Trigger Type EDGE WINDOW Tv METNNMN A TERN WIDTH Selecting the trigger source trigger slope and state and setting the trigger level 3 Press the LEVEL SOURCE key to display the trigger source T I selection menu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired signal source and press the corresponding soft key to select the desired trigger slope state selection TYPE key LEVEL SOURCE key Explanation 5 In case yo
272. not possible to use the ALL display during acquisition 7 9 720 Itis not possible to perform the real time printout using the external clock as timebase 10 10 721 Itis not possible to perform this action while averaging or history mode is active 722 CAL OUT is not connected 723 Low temperature error has been detected in printer 724 Itis not possible to execute measurement of acquisition data All Scan EXEC because automatic measurement of waveform parameter is OFF or because data acquisition is in progress 8 11 725 For DL1540CL It is not possible to perform the real time printout since the record length 1K words 10 10 800 For DL1540C It is not possible to set the time range during SGL L N SGL as the trigger mode or history mode For DL1540CL It is not possible to carry out this time range setting because the trigger mode is N SGL the history mode 5 11 6 13 14 is active or the record length is 400K 1M 2M words 7 10 801 Itis not possible to select an external clock in Envelope mode 5 9 802 Delay time was set to Os as an external clock was selected 5 9 803 Itis not possible to set a delay time since an external clock has been selected 5 9 IM 701530 01E 15 3 uonoedsu pue eoueuajure N Punoouse qnou 15 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions No Message Reference Page 804 For DL1540C It is not possible to set SGL
273. nsation If the probe s input capacitance is outside the specified range the gain will not be constant across different frequencies preventing display of the correct waveforms The input capacitance varies depending on the probe used so the variable capacitor trimmer provided on the probe must be adjusted Probe compensation must be performed when the probe is to be used for the first time Moreover the appropriate input capacitance varies according to which channel is used so probe compensation is required when the probe is switched from one channel to another Phase correction signal A phase correction signal square waveform of the following characteristics is output from the COMP terminal on the front panel Frequency Approx 1 kHz Amplitude Approx 1 V Waveform differences Correct waveform Over compensated Under compensated gain is too high at high gain is too low at high frequency frequency HE 3 6 IM 701530 01E 3 7 Setting the Date and Time Keys and Procedure oe ers 1 Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu SELECT key 2 Press the Date Time soft key to display the DATE TIME setting men
274. o 14 in case you want to select measurement items for another trace or loaded waveform Returning to the top menu 16 Press the To Topmenu soft key or the ESC key to return to the automated measurement setting menu 8 9 SUJJOJOAeM Duiz euy B 8 3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically Setting delay measurement between channels The delay between channels is the time difference of the rising or falling edge between traces or loaded waveforms For each trace and loaded waveform the waveform to be used as a reference and the measurement waveform need to be specified Setting the measurement waveform 17 Press the Delay Setup soft key at the automated measurement setting menu to display the delay selection menu 18 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired trace or loaded waveform number which will be subjected to measurement 19 After having selected Mode using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select ON Pressing the SELECT key once more will result in selecting OFF 20 After having selected Edge Polarity of the Measure setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select rising edge or falling edge 21 After having selected Edge Count of the Measure setting using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to display the count setting box 22 Use the rotary knob to set the desired count number Press the RESET key to restore the new value to the default value 23 Press the SELEC
275. o 14 on the previous page 22 To save the edited redrawn zone repeat steps 15 to 17 IM 701530 01E 9 3 uorov OD ON OD Buruuoped 9 1 Judging using a Waveform Zone Setting up the determination conditions 23 Press the Setup soft key of the GO NO GO top menu The condition setup menu will appear 24 After having selected the Mode setting of the trace to be measured using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select ON Pressing the key once again results in selecting OFF and no waveform determination will occur 25 After having selected the Condition setting of the same trace using the rotary knob press the SELECT key to select the desired condition When the condition is met NO GO will result OUT The waveform under measurement protrudes from the determination zone IN The waveform under measurement enters the determination zone 26 Repeat steps 24 and 25 for other traces if necessary Selecting AND or OR determination Logic 27 After having selected the Logic setting on the condition setup menu press the SELECT key to select the desired condition When the condition is met NO GO will result AND All determinations are NO GO IN Any of the determination is NO GO Sequence determination 28 After having selected the Sequence setting on the condition setup menu press the SELECT key to select the desired sequence The
276. o f e dsiq pue uonisinboy Buibueuo 7 12 Changing the Screen Intensity Keys and Procedure Rotary knob m Soft keys zs x x 7 J OQ R DISPLAY DISPLAY FORM key SHIFT key Explanation Intensity Press the SHIFT DISPLAY DISPLAY FORM key to display the display condition setting menu Press the Inten soft key to display intensity selection menu TEXT Graticule Scale XMarker Wavelnfo FRAME OFF ON OFF Intensity 9 Press the soft key corresponding to the item for which the intensity is to be changed Intensity Intensity SCALE CURSOR SNAPSHT WAVE ALL 9 Turn the rotary knob to set the desired intensity Inten TEXT TEXT TEXT Intensity WAVE ALL 15 n Intensity CURSOR SNAPSHT SCALE Repeat step 3 and 4 to adjust the intensity of other items Intensity can be set to one of 15 levels with the darkest intensity 1 and the brightest intensity 15 Items for which the intensity can be adjusted Intensity can be adjusted independently for the following items The value in indicates the default setting TEXT SCALE CURSOR SNAPSHOT WAVE Note 12 Graticule scale marker Cursor
277. o make settings related to the horizontal axis time axis 6 Activating a Trigger Describes trigger setting operations such as those for setting trigger mode trigger type trigger source and trigger level that enable you to determine acquisition timing 7 Changing Describes how to make acquisition condition settings such Acquisition as acquisition mode sampling mode input filter and and Display hysteresis as well as how to make display condition Conditions settings such as waveform expansion interpolation accumulation X Y display and graticule 8 Analyzing Describes how to measure waveforms using cursors Waveforms performautomatic measurement of waveform parameters and waveform math and how to display the power spectrum obtained by FFT computation 9 Performing a Describes how to perform a GO NO GO action by setting the GO NO GO Action waveform zone or setting limits for waveform parameters then detecting whether the input signal waveform is within the specified range zone or limits 10 Outputting Displayed Describes how to output displayed waveforms screen Waveforms and hardcopy and set up information to the built in printer or Setting Parameters plotter connected to the GP IB interface to the Printer Plotter 11 Storing and Recalling Describes how to store displayed waveforms or settings in the Data from the internal memory how to recall stored waveform data and display Internal Memory the waveforms and how to recall s
278. o match the pulse width of the signal being measured Distal line 50 Mesial line 50 Proximal line 50 L Mesurement range Burst Burst width Set the measurement range Brst Time Range to match the pulse width of the signal being measured wi Measurement range E f f fe ff f Distal line epe emo eres Proximal line Burst T1 cursor T2 cursor Other Measurement items INTEG1TY HTY INTEG2TY I2TY INTEG1XY I1XY INTEG2XY I2XY Note Area of positive amplitude Area of positive amplitude Area of negative amplitude Total sum of the triangular areas of the X Y waveform Total sum of the trapezoid areas of the X Y waveform For a detailed description of the area calculation method refer to Appendix 4 Proximal Mesial Distal settings Dpr Mode The Proximal setting ranges from 0 to 49 in 1 steps or the voltage value corresponding to 8 div in 1 V step The Mesial setting ranges from 10 to 89 in 1 96 steps or the voltage value corresponding to 8 div in 1 V step The Distal setting ranges from 50 to 100 in 1 96 steps or the voltage value corresponding to 8 div in 1 V step Delay between channels Delay Setup The delay between channels is the time difference of the rising or falling edge between traces or loaded waveforms For the relation between the channel of measurement and the reference channel refer to page
279. o the main unit of this instrument starting from the day of delivery and doesn t cover any other items nor expendable items items which wear out In order to use the instrument over a prolonged period of time we recommend periodic replacement Contact your nearest Yokogawa sales representative for replacement parts Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Parts name Replacement interval Built in printer LCD back light after printing 120 rolls parts No B9850NX continuously Approx 2500 hours when used continuously Parts Name Warranty Period Internal hard disk One year after purchase data are excluded 15 8 IM 701530 01E Chapter 16 Specifications 16 1 Input Section Item Specifications No of input channels 4 CH1 to CH4 analog input Input coupling AC DC GND Input connector BNC connector Input impedance 1 MQ 1 5 approx 25 pF Voltage axis sensitivity setting range 1 mV div to 5 V div in multiples of 1 2 and 5 Maximum input voltage 250 V DC ACpeak or 177 Vrms when frequency is 1 kHz or lower CAT I and II Maximum DC offset setting range 5 V div to 1 V div 100 V probe attenuation 1 1 500 mV div to 100 mV div 10 V 50 mV div toi mV div 1 V Vertical axis accuracy 2 DC accuracy 1 mv div t 5 of 8 div 1 LSB 100 mv div 1 5 of 8 div 1 LSB others 2 5 of 8 div 1 LSB Offset voltage
280. ob to set the trigger level as well CH2 CHI CH3 CH4 Condtn CikcH pate Lx H x Y H L TRUE CH3 fi 7 Press the Condtn soft key and select the desired conditions using the corresponding soft keys menu in case of activating a trigger by state pattern only CH2 CHI CH3 CH4 TE aT Level LX H xn c EN ne 0 072V menu in case of activating a trigger in synchronization with the clock signal CH3 Condition Level CH1 CH2 CH4 ee en S IM 701530 01E 6 9 JeDBu e BuneAnoy H 6 6 Setting the Pattern Trigger Optional Explanation Seiting the trigger source and trigger state level The trigger state can be selected from the following L The trigger source level is above the preset trigger level H The trigger source level is below the preset trigger level X Not used as the trigger source The setting limit and resolution for the trigger level is the same as for the edge trigger Refer to page 6 2 Selecting the clock channel CIKCH Set the clock channel to X when no trigger in synchronization with the signal is activated and select from CH1 CH4 when a trigger in synchronization with the signal is activated The following trigger slopes can be selected f Slope rising edge changes from a level below the trigger level to one above the trigger level L Slope falling edge changes fr
281. ollowing settings have been made the zone waveform will also be saved Mode ON Type ZONE About saved setting parameters When setting parameters are saved the extension SET is automatically added the DL SETUP directory is created automatically and the data is saved into this directory Data size Approximately 10 K bytes are used for each set of setting parameters However if GO NO GO zone waveforms are included approximately 4 K bytes extra are required for each zone waveform Checking the free space on a floppy disk Refer to page 12 3 for a description of this procedure Entering a file name The following points must be kept in mind when entering a file name Afile name must always be specified Upto eight characters can be entered All the characters on the keyboard can be used However the following file names cannot be used due to MS DOS restrictions AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK The same name cannot be assigned to different data files of the same data type Overwrite inhibit Points to note when saving loading setting parameters Setting parameters can be saved even if acquisition is in progress i e while the START indicator is lit Once the loaded setting parameters have been canceled the original setting parameters cannot be restored f the extension of the setting parameter file is changed using a personal computer it will be impossible to load the data Never remove the floppy disk
282. om a floppy disk that waveform will appear on the screen To turn the display of the P P waveform off press the CH key corresponding to the number of the P P waveform displayed as MEM and select OFF at the appeared menu Refer to page 12 5 step 19 and 20 To turn the display of the acquisition waveform off press the CH key corresponding to the number of the acquisition waveform CH key operation during display of a GO NO GO zone waveform Pressing a CH key turns display of both the corresponding input signal waveform and the zone waveform ON OFF Note Ifthe START STOP key is pressed to start acquisition while loaded waveforms are displayed the displayed waveforms will be cleared from the screen It is possible to retain a desired waveform on screen by stopping acquisition of the corresponding channel For a description of this operation refer to page 12 6 For DL1540CL if you have saved ACQ data to multiple floppy disks you can opt to load all of this data or only part of it for example data from one disk only If you do a partial load the waveform display will not appear over the entire time axis but only over a portion of it Refer to the procedures for saving and loading of ACQ waveform data beginning on page 12 5 Pressing the SNAP SHOT key also keeps the waveform on the screen To clear the snapshot waveform press the CLEAR TRACE key In the following cases erroneous waveforms might appear on channel 3 o
283. om a level above the trigger level to one below the trigger level Selecting the trigger condition Condtn Activating a trigger using only the state pattern Select the trigger condition from the following ENTER Activates a trigger when the combination pattern becomes true EXIT Activates a trigger when the pattern becomes false Setting example CH1 input CHi H O CH2 input CH2 L Pattern Pattern CH3 X becomes false lt becomes true CH4 DX Trigger conditions are met Condition ENTER Activating a trigger in synchronization with the clock signal Select the trigger condition from the following TRUE Activates a trigger on the slope edge riseor fall of the clock channel when the state pattern becomes true FALSE Activates a trigger on the slope edge of the clock channel when the state pattern becomes false Setting example CH1 input CH1 H CH2input CH2 L i RE CH4 X CH3 input NI M1 i Pattern E m t Clock CH CH3 becomes false Pattern gt be somes ene Condition TRUE A false true Trigger conditions are met Points to note when setting the pattern trigger Ifthe trigger type setting is changed the pattern trigger setting will be invalidated However selecting the pattern trigger again will restore the previous settings Auto mode operations are carried out even if the trigger mode is set to auto level mode
284. on function 33 Press the EXEC soft key The name of the soft key will change to ABORT Mode GO NOGO Type OFF PRMTR Edit Setup EXEC Display while GO NO GO judgement is in progress NORMSMRS s Zmn div fms div ea RH A rue 7 T r Number of times GO NO GO judgement is performed ha a 1 Number of times GO NO GO is made QT BAT i ppp Judgement results per trace IUE O GO X NO GO Corresponding to trace 1 2 3 4 Not under measurement Aborting the determination function 34 Press the ABORT soft key The name of the soft key will change to EXEC Mode GO NOGO Type a orr Ez PRTR Edit Setup ABORT IM 701530 01E 9 5 uorov OD ON OD Buruuoped 9 1 Judging using a Waveform Zone Explanation Selecting the reference waveform Base Trace Selects the waveform on which the determination range is to be based The reference waveform can be selected from the following four types which can be displayed as TRACE Input signal waveform ACQ waveform data BIN data loaded from a floppy disk Computed waveform Editing the determination zone Up to four determination zones can be set The determination zone can be specified by expanding the reference waveform vertically and horizontally as follows Setting range in the vertical direction 5 5 8div from the reference waveform setting step is 0 02div Setting ra
285. on rates are used to change the vertical sensitivity which then changes in steps of 1 V div gt 2 V div 5 V div In case of the VAR setting fine adjustment of the sensitivity set under the CAL setting can be performed The setting range is approximately 0 4 to 2 5 times the value of the CAL setting Digital data are taken from the CAL setting and after calculating they will be displayed at the VAR setting The measurement accuracy of the voltage axis using the VAR setting however is the same as the measurement accuracy set at the CAL setting When V div is switched from 1 V div to 500 mV div FNF 1div 1V Note 1div 500mV Vertical sensitivity setting and measurement resolution For accurate voltage measurement set the V div so that the maximum amplitude of the displayed waveform is displayed using the full height of the screen 8 divisions The instrument uses an 8 bit A D converter to sample the input signal with a resolution of 255 levels When displaying a waveform 25 levels are used for each division of the grid Thus in normal display mode not expansion display mode the full range 255 levels of the A D converter is equivalent to 10 24 div From this it can be understood that increasing the V div setting decreases the voltage per div 25 levels thereby increasing the display mea
286. option 2 Applies to the DL1540CL with the C8 option 8 SCSI devices which can send and receive data over the SCSI and which can set the ID number to 5 can be used on models with the C8 option SCSI devices set to an ID other than 5 can also be used There are exceptions as in the case when the media used on the SCSI device is formatted with another equipment such as a PC or when the pin configuration of the connector is different The specifications of each SCSI device are shown above For details contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 16 6 IM 701530 01E 16 8 Built in Printer optional Item Specifications Printing system Thermal line dot method Dot density 6 dots mm Paper width 112mm Real time printout max chart speed of 16 7 mm s speed drops at time axis settings slower than 500ms div 16 9 Built in Floppy Disk Drive Item Specifications Drive size 3 5 inch No of drives 1 Format type 640 KB 720 KB 1 2 MB and 1 44 MB MS DOS compatible 16 10Internal Hard Disk for C8 option Item Specifications No of drives 1 Capacity 2 1 GB IBM format Can be mounted on a PC Windows 95 98 compatible via the SCSI IM 701530 01E 16 7 suoneouioeds a 16 11General Specifications Item Safety standard Specifications Complying standard EN61010 Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 2 Emission Complying Standard EN55011 Class A Group1 This is a Class
287. or greater relative to the threshold level Input impedance Approx 1 MQ Threshold level 1 5Vor0 15 V Minimum pulse width 25 ns or more for both High and Low levels Input signal to CH4 Input frequency range 40 Hz to 40 MHz only for continuous clock Input level 2 divp p or higher Threshold level Set by the trigger level CH4 Minimum pulse width 5 ns or more for both High and Low levels Measured after 30 minute warm up under the standard operating conditions stipulated on page 16 8 16 4 Display Item Specifications Display Size 6 4 display method colored TFT LCD display resolution 640 dots horizontal x 480 dots vertical Display area Voltage axis 8 div Time axis 10 div 501 dots horizontal x 401 dots vertical or 501 dots horizontal x 401 dots vertical Display resolution Voltage axis 50 dots div A D converter resolution equivalent 25 LSB div Time axis 50 dots div compressed Maximum display update interval 60 times s Max No of displayed waveforms 8 waveforms n some cases up to 0 02 of the pixels of the LCD can be defective with respect to the total number of display pixels IM 701530 01E 16 3 suoneouieds a 16 5 Functions Item Specifications Auto set up Makes the voltage axis time axis and trigger settings automatically Initialization Automatically resets settings to the factory settings Snapshot Retains the waveform displayed when the SN
288. orm acquisition is stopped Cursor measurement is also possible on expanded waveforms Even if the display is switched to show the expanded waveform the position of the cursor on the screen does not change If the type selection menu is set to V T and both the pre zoom and the expanded waveform are displayed cursor measurement will be performed on the expanded waveform If the type selection menu is set to V T ACQ and both the pre zoom and the expanded waveform are displayed cursors are displayed on both waveforms Therefore cursor measurements on waveforms outside the zoom box can be performed When the type selection menu is set to V T ACQ cursor measurements on interpolation data cannot be performed When the type selection menu is set to V T ACQ the measurement range is 10 div within the screen when the horizontal position is 0 div 5 div during roll mode display V T ACQ cursor measurements cannot be performed on data outside the measurement range even if the waveform display range is changed by moving the horizontal position such as during the roll mode display V T ACQ cursor measurements cannot be performed on loaded waveforms There might be cases where the displayed waveform is not in synchronization with the measurement values To synchronize stop data acquistion When using waveform computations the displayed unit will become div for waveforms obtained by addition subtraction and V2 for waveforms obtained
289. orms remain on the screen is made longer than the waveform update interval so that new waveforms can be accumulated on top of old waveforms In addition waveforms can be displayed in different colors depending on the frequency of occurrence of the waveforms This function is useful when you want to observe jitters and temporary turbulence in waveforms D X Y Waveform Display page 7 15 The horizontal axis X axis is used as the voltage axis for the input signal to CH1 and the vertical axis Y axis is used as the voltage axis for the input signal to CH2 for observing the relationship between the voltages between the two signals The X Y waveforms for CH1 and CH2 can be displayed simultaneously In addition they can also be displayed simultaneously with a normal V T waveform a waveform displayed using voltage and time axes Use of this X Y waveform display function enables measurement of the phase angle between two sine wave signals For example two X Y sine waveforms are displayed to obtain an X Y waveform called a Lissajous waveform from which the phase angle can be obtained Lissajous waveform 1 16 IM 701530 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Other Display Modes Settings pages 7 16 to 7 18 Graticule scale marker Under the default settings the graticule including the grid and frame scale or marker is displayed on the display as shown below enabling
290. otary knob to their default settings rrr bDisPL Y Form RESET INITIALIZE FILTER measuRE CURSOR GO NO GO MATH DISPLAY VERTICAL HORIZONTAL TRIGGER Rotary knob ie od ls TREP Used to set the number of execution times A cy E cua POSITION zoom TYPE MODE for averaging expansion rate and position 7 n m Rana accumulate time and brightness of the screen V DIV SELECT Lp f 3 ME SS qp 5 posirioN HISTORY TT ud hit f diaitiodn fth sed to shift from one digit to the next of the IG HOLD OFF AC BZ TART STOP 7 G POEM ni value you are setting using the rotary knob 1 2 3 INPUT REMOTEL OCAL CAL MISC HISTORY STORERECALL COPY m 0 A KEYBOARD FILE MENU ACQ key Page 7 1 ZOOM key Page 7 4 Displays the menu used to make acquisition Displays the expansion setting menu mode and sampling mode settings SHIFT ACQ HISTORY key Page 7 9 For DL1520L displays the history memory setting menu For DL1520L HISTORY character indicated over ACQ key HISTORY key Page 7 9 Displays the history memory setting menu Not provided with DL1520 DL1520L 2 4 IM 701530 01E 2 2 Operation Keys Rotary Knob Keys and Rotary Knob used for Analysis of Waveforms r MEASURE key Page 8 6 measurement of waveform parameters CLEAR TRACE Displays the setting menu for automated r CURSOR key Pages 8 1 8 5 and 8 19 Displays the setting menu for cursor measurement RESET key R
291. out changing the distance between them Voltage measurement cursor horizontal H1 Moves cursor H1 only H2 Moves cursor H2 only H1 amp H2 Move both cursors H1 and H2 simultaneously without changing the distance between them Vertical phase measurement cursor D1 Move cursor D1 only D2 Move cursor D2 only D1 amp D2 Move cursors D1 and D2 simultaneously without changing the distance between them Vertical Reference phase selection cursor R1 Move cursor R1 only R2 Move cursor R2 only R1 amp R2 Move cursors R1 and R2 simultaneously without changing the distance between them Cursor movement range Vertical cursor Movement range Each vertical cursor can be moved to 1002 different positions from the left edge 5 00 div to the right edge 5 00 div of the waveform display frame One time position is used for the P P value of the displayed waveform and two points maximum and minimum are measured at this position The default setting 2 50 div for T1 2 50 div for T2 E b lt O 8 4 IM 701530 01E 8 1 Measuring a V T Waveform using Cursors Horizontal cursor Movement range Each horizontal cursor can be 4 00 div moved to 401 different positions from the top 4 00 0 00 div div to the bottom 4 00 div of the waveform display frame 4 00 div The default setting
292. ows Waveform size from the ground level of the computation result Z SENS 2 x XxY 2 SENS set value using rotary knob div X waveform size of channel 1 compared to ground level Y waveform size of channel 2 compared to ground level Setting ranges from 0 50 to 4 00 div Setting step is 0 01 div 8 18 IM 701530 01E 8 5 Performing Waveform Math Addition Subtraction and Multiplication Points to note relating to waveform computation Computation cannot be carried out on snapshot waveforms or recalled waveforms Computation between channels is carried out using the original acquisition data which are then displayed using P P compression In case the input coupling is AC and an offset voltage is applied the offset part will not be included in computation Addition and subtraction computation is carried out regardless of the V DIV setting of the channels Therefore in case of cursor measurement or automated measurement of trace 3 the displayed unit will become div The voltage axis sensitivity of channel 1 and 2 being V1 and V2 respectively the voltage axis sensitivity of the computation result becomes 4 SENS x V1 x V2 div Therefore in case of cursor measurement or automated measurement of trace 3 the displayed unit will become V2 The computed waveform displayed on trace 3 is P P compressed data When this data is stored or saved on the internal memory floppy disk SCSI device information indicati
293. peur eee nde Setting para METES ornare danas desde MuR Tos offset voltage setting Valles rre re rhe neni cens 4 7 options SOME COD 3 5 nene nine erri retener res 10 4 output signal signal TOW E 1 1 single N mode esee 1 10 6 14 P single short mode sess 1 10 6 13 single long mode seeeeeeene 1 10 6 14 PAL acad vec eii ec E ec Fa ve RED EE eva ava ces Smoothiligi mt ented leet cafes ar Aree T 1 13 7 3 PUESE sonrisa Mhaceaathud Saps NO ete RR TUNER 1 20 4 5 paper size SOUICO Tarde anaa Aera e eaa a aaa ae stent sentent aa 11 1 pen spare Parts tete cate reta ea AANTEKEN 4 MOOG ied green quete storing speed setting parameters sese 1 21 11 3 phase correction WAaVelOlms ceret re nm rrr ere 1 21 11 1 phase shift SUFIX COE TEES 2 plotter GE System conditio f a rere rete items 14 3 polarity 3t 36 nei Niet ette cote Mee System configuration sssssseen e 1 1 power cord eoe Tere T suffix code power spectrum Me ETE 5 10 power SWitCh es entente TIMEOUT i aor aut aie a a aai 6 11 Index 2 IM 701530 01E jl E threshold level time axis sei onde PE EC Dr e EN EC re id 1 4 5 10 time stamp nine 7 7 7 9 timebase s nce He e Deed ear 1 4 5 8 trigger action o e Save i een es
294. r 4 Acquiring the waveform once again will result in a correct display For DL1540C when the record length is 120KW the trigger mode is SGL L and waveform acquisitioning has ended and you turn CH3 or CH4 ON while they had been OFF until then After acquiring waveforms at 200 MS s and you stop acquisition and then you switch CH3 or CH4 ON IM 701530 01E 5 1 sexy ejuoziuop pue jeo eui Hues jo 5 2 Setting the Input Coupling Keys and Procedure 1 Press the INPUT key corresponding to the channel for which Rotary nee input coupling is to be selected The input setting menu will be displayed Soft keys 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired coupling type j E l 3 When DC is selected turn the rotary knob to set the desired 5 offset voltage NI LEN CH1 a l pere ane rx deum INPUT key Explanation Input coupling The following three types of input coupling are available The default is DC AC Displays only the AC content of the input signal DC Displays both the DC and AC content of the input signal Only in this case an offset value can be set This setting can also be done pressing the KEYBOARD key refer to page 4 7 GND Used to check the ground level Input coupling and frequency characteristic The frequen
295. racel 18 45V igit 0 0 2 530ms TETZS ST a H 780 0us Fa I P ae zz gari TA P 50 00v Max 22 00V wg 6 386V igh 22 00 11 740 0us d 1 320ms TTY 16 2E 08 12lY 20 2E 03 values IsN 1 Min 28 00V r 0 0 Low 28 00V Freq Ad Measurement Linear Scaling page 8 14 It is possible to append a scaling constant A an offset value B and a unit to the measurement value X of cursor or automated measurements Linear scaling is useful for example when applying a voltage divider ratio to the measurement values or in case of automatically calculating the current value from the voltage measurement results Y UNIT AX B Y result of linear scaling 1 18 IM 701530 01E 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Waveform Math page 8 16 Waveforms obtained by adding the waveform data of CH1 and CH2 addition waveforms obtained by subtracting waveform data CH2 from CH1 subtraction and waveforms obtained by multiplying waveform data CH1 by CH2 f ltiplication can be displayed on CH3 Waveform math can be performed while the phase of CH2 is shifted Addition and subtraction computations are useful when you want to compare data with a reference signal to check the logic of a signal and to make a phase comparison Multiplication computation is useful when you want to input a voltage signal and a current signal to check the power waveform Addition Subtraction Multiplication computed
296. rd 1 Printer connecting cable 1 supplied with DL1520 C3 only 150 MHz probe 10 1 1 1 selectable 2 or 4 if two optional probes are added Power supply fuse in fuse holder 2 including a spare one A1351EF Front cover 1 Roll chart 1 supplied only when the instrument is equipped with a printer User s Manual 1 this manual Operation Guide 1 Communication Interface User s Manual 1 IM 701530 01E 16 9 suoneouioeds a 16 12External Dimensions Unit mm Rear View aS Eum 3 a A O E A S r Q YOKOGAMA C D a Le 216 268 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10mm the tolerance is 0 3mm 16 10 IM 701530 01E Appendix Appendix 1 Menu Map The following menus are displayed when initialization is performed i e when factory settings are
297. rds the drive then insert it into the floppy drive Insert it until the eject button pops up Removing the floppy disk from the drive Make sure that the access indicator is not lit then push the eject button Eject button Access indicator CAUTION Never remove the floppy disk while the access indicator of the floppy disk drive is lit or damage to the magnetic head of the drive or loss of data on the floppy disk may result General Handling Precautions For general handling precautions refer to the instructions supplied with the floppy disk IM 701530 01E 12 1 ysiq Ajddoj4 wo eyeq Bulpeo7 pue Bui es RI 12 2 Formatting a Floppy Disk Keys and Procedure Rotary knob SELECT key m Soft keys I C X J STORE RECALL FILE key SHIFT key Explanation 1 Press the SHIFT STORE RECALL FILE key to display the data save load menu 2 Press the Utility soft key to display the utility selection menu Data Type AutoFile ON P P ACQ 3 Press the Format soft key to display the format selection menu List ACQ Utility SETUP To TopMenu Exec Func Format Protect Delete 2 D 1 2M Disk Info 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired type of format and t
298. ress the EXEC soft key to execute recalling Function SETUP Source EXEC To STORE ESSEN MEM 1 TopMenu Source MEM itt EXEC To TopMenu Parameters that are stored Settings made using the soft key menu and rotary knob as well as the acquisition START STOP state and channel ON OFF state are stored Selecting the destination memory Destn The destination memory can be selected from the four internal memories MEM 1 to MEM 4 Be aware that when storing the data previous data will be overwritten and thus lost Note that the internal memory where the waveforms are stored is a different memory Selecting the setting parameters to be recalled Source Setting parameters can only be recalled from the internal memories MEM 1 to MEM 4 in which setting parameters are present Note Initializing does not result in loss of stored setting parameters IM 701530 01E Asowayy euJe1u eui wou ejeq Buieoen pue Bunos Chapter 12 Saving and Loading Data from a Flopply Disk 12 1 Floppy Disks Types of floppy Disk which can be used The following types of 3 5 inch floppy disks can be used Floppy disks can also be formatted using this instrument 2HD type MS DOS format 1 2 MB or 1 44 MB 2DD type MS DOS format 640 KB or 720 KB Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Drive Hold the floppy disk with the label facing up and the shuttered side facing towa
299. ressed per one division Depending on the time axis settings there will be times when all data of full record length of the acquisition memory can be displayed and times when the data can only be displayed partially The part which does not appear on your screen can be viewed by moving the horizontal position of the waveform refer to page 1 7 When the record length is too short The missing data will be interpolated refer to page 1 15 Record length is expressed in units of words One word refers to one point of sampled data For example 10 KW means 10020 points K represents 1002 Record length of o Sampling data acquisition memory L Display record length E 009 Ci E By os o s H o gt P v 501points B0 Time axis Relationship between the time axis setting sample rate and record length If you change the time axis setting the sample rate and the record length of the acquisition memory changes too This is because a linear relation exists between record length of the acquisition memory and time required for acquisition of all data x sample rate For more detailed information refer to Appendix 2 Appendix 3 IM 701530 01E suonounJ 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Relationship between time axis setting and sampling mode The sampling method sampling mode
300. restored The menus for DL1540C are shown below as examples Key Operation amp First menu Key Operation amp First menu mss AUTOSET Acquisition Rep mama EXEC um Aca OR ENMBENVELOPE AVERAGE il on Page 4 2 Page 7 1 INITIAL Bandwidth Smooth INITIALIZE EXEC FILTER GU oz eid on Page 4 4 Page 7 3 CAL ZOOM Mod mg CAL 2g OFF MAIN 200M Mainzoom m Page 7 4 Page 4 6 V DIV L I f Lj History di Co Imo V DIV CHT V DIV ae i Ex Page 7 9 Page 5 6 POSITION DISPLAY FORM Intrpl x Accumu Wide Scrn SINE OFF OFF ON DISPLAY ON Page 7 11 7 13 7 15 CH Position To peo 9 1 in 3div 1div Odiv 1div 3div T EQ DISPLAY FORM p Intensity Page 5 7 C e arm rose or ER s RD ee Page 7 16 to 7 18 INPUT CH
301. rigger and uses a single trigger source to activate a trigger A trigger is activated when the trigger source exceeds rises above or drops falls below the preset trigger level In addition to input signals CH1 to CH4 the external trigger input signal and the commercial power supply signal can be used as a trigger source A trigger is activated refers to the condition in which trigger conditions are satisfied and a waveform is displayed Triggerisource e m5 69 75 fe Sess a soe Sa sce Trigger level l l l A trigger is activated at this point if Rise 4 is selected Window Trigger page 6 4 A certain voltage range window is set and a trigger is activated when the trigger source level enters this voltage range IN or exits from this voltage range OUT IN OUT trigger is activated li WIDTH Window T WIDTH Jj Window NT CENTER trigger is activated B trigger is activated TV Trigger page 6 5 The TV trigger is used when you are observing a video signal and is compatible with NTSC PAL and HDTV broadcasting systems IM 701530 01E 1 3 Setting a Trigger OR Trigger option page 6 8 Multiple trigger sources are selected and a trigger is activated when one of the trigger conditions set for each trigger source becomes true Trigger conditions are established by setting the trigger slope When CH1 4 CH2 4 CH1 CH2 Trigger Trigger Trigger
302. rotary knob Center indow Condition indow Knol Level m EN EN oT o z H onov 6 Press the WIDTH soft key and set the width of the window using the rotary knob Width Window Condition Window Knob pid OUT CENTER Explanation Selecting the trigger condition and setting the window The window trigger will only be applied to the input signal of channel 1 Trigger conditions can be selected from the following types IN Trigger will be activated when the trigger source level enters a preset voltage range OUT Trigger will be activated when the trigger source level exits from a preset voltage range The center level of the window and the corresponding width can be set The setting limit and resolution for the trigger level is the same as for the edge trigger Refer to page 6 2 The smallest width of the window is the CAL setting of the vertical sensitivity IN OUT Trigger is activated ii WIDTH 3 Window i WIDTH Window NT CENTER Trigger is activated iL Trigger is activated Points to note when setting the window trigger If the trigger type setting is changed the window trigger setting will be invalidated However selecting the window trigger again will restore the previous settings Auto mode operations are carried out even if the trigger mode is set to auto level mode 6 4 IM 701530 01E 6 4 Setting the TV Trigger Keys and Procedure
303. rsors 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the trace you want to measure Ti Trace 1 2 Cursor Cursor OFF ON 2 3 a NextMenu 27 iv 7 After having pressed any of the H1 H2 or H1 amp H2 soft keys use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor H1 Cursor Cursor Type Trace Cursor E or EE a 1 H2 HI amp H2 20 kiv Measuring time difference voltage voltage difference of the acquisition data using the vertical cursors 4 After step 3 press the V T ACQ soft key to display the vertical cursor position selection menu The vertical cursors appear on the screen T1 Type Cursor Cursor 5 or 5 mm EMNRZEMLZE 3E 7 E 5 Press the Trace soft key to display the trace selection menu and select the desired trace with the soft key Ti Cursor Type Trace Cursor Cursor orr E V T 1 T2 TI amp T2 2 7kiv 6 After pressing any of the T1 T2 or T1 amp T2 soft keys use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor You can use the lt gt key to move between digits T1 Cursor Type Trace Cursor Cursor orF E V T 1 T2 TI amp T2 2 7 k iv Measuring phase difference using the vertical cursors Phase Cursor 4 After step 3 press the Degree soft key to display the
304. ry knob d dE v v v M ls RE Used to make vertical axis sensitivity 7 8 9 ACTION j j V DIV SELECT 2 V div waveform vertical horizontal Levey PosmoN position and offset voltage settings SOURCE DELAY gt 4 5 POSITION M COUPLING HOLD OFF ACQ 1 2 3 INPUT REMOTET OCAL CAL MISC HISTORY STORE RECALL COPY wm Rial 0 l KEYBOARD FILE MENU Time axis setting knob TIME DIV Used to change the time axis scale IM 701530 01E 2 3 ued U9e3 Jo esf pue owen 2 2 Operation Keys Rotary Knob Keys and Rotary Knob used for Making Trigger Settings r TRIG D indicator Lights up when a trigger is activated MODE key Page 6 12 Displays the trigger mode selection menu TYPE key SHIFT MODE ACTION key Page 6 14 Displays the trigger type selection Displays the action on trigger selection menu ment SNAP SHOT TRACE Cesc RESET key Resets the settings made using the rotary knob to their default settings FFT DIpPLAY FORM RESET INITIALIZE FILTER MEASURE CURSOR GO NO GO M TH bisha Y VERTICAL HORIZONTAL TRIGGER ON OFF THiG D R k b no cgi cH2 cua cua POSITION ZOOM TYPE M DE otary J x d Y Y bia Used to set the trigger level trigger 5 ww ACTION SELECT position and trigger delay
305. s Alphanumerics enclosed in double quotation marks usually refer to characters and set values that appear on the screen and panel The SHIFT xxx key refers to first pressing the SHIFT key the indicator above the SHIFT key lights and then pressing the xxx key to obtain another specified function Symbols Used The following symbol marks are used in this User s Manual To avoid injury or death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the User s Manual In the User s Manual these symbols appear on the pages to which the operator must refer H gt WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent the danger of serious injury or death to the user CAUTION Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent the danger of minor or moderate injury to the user or the damage to the property Note Provides information that is important for proper operation of the instrument Symbol Marks Used for Descriptions of Operations The following symbol marks are used in Chapters 3 to 14 to distinguish certain feg ures in descriptions Relevant Keys Indicates the relevant panel key which are necessary to carry out the operation Operating Procedure Carry out steps in the order shown The operating procedures are given with the assumption that you are not familiar with the operation Thus it may not be necessary to carry out all the steps when changing settings Keys and Procedure Shows t
306. s illustrated in this manual may differ slightly from what actually appears on your Screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited MS DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation HP GL is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated 1st Edition December 1998 2nd Edition May 2000 All Rights Reserved Copyright 1998 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 701530 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Main Body Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If the wrong instrument or accessories have been delivered if some accessories are missing or if they appear abnormal contact the dealer from which you purchased them Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate of the rear panel match those on your order MODEL Type Name 701530 DL1540C 701540 DL1540CL SUFFIX Suffix Code YOKOGAMA lt gt Made in Japan Suffix Code Specifications
307. s measurement conditions can be printed on the built in printer optional on an external HP GL plotter or an external color printer B S Compatible 9 plotter 5 n Note Entering a comment The instrument provides a function which enables you to use the keyboard displayed on the screen to enter and display a comment If you enter a comment which indicates the contents of the displayed waveforms before printing a hard copy it will help you to distinguish between different print outs The GP IB Centronics adapter is necessary when printing to an external color printer Real time Printing page 10 6 It is possible to print waveforms continuously as a recorder using the built in printer Real time printing can be done when the setting range of the time axis lies within 500 ms div to 50 s div The chart speed is fixed at 16 7 mm s Print Example DL1540C Time corresponding to the point where 50ms amp v Vertical axis sensitivity 756 10 div have elapsed since start of printing Ground level mark r Wai Voltage values corresponding to the cH 140E 01V CH2 8 40E400V CH3 1 24E 01V point where 10 div have elapsed since start of printing Storing Recalling Displayed Waveforms and Setting Parameters page 11 1 11 3 Displayed waveforms P P compressed data not acquisition data and se
308. scratch the surface with pointed objects In addition never apply vibration or shock to the LCD When moving the instrument Disconnect the power cord and connecting cables Always carry the instrument by the handles or carry it with both hands as shown on the right Note that the chart paper might show some discoloration due to friction after the instrument is moved with the roll paper installed In such a case we recommend to remove and re install the chart paper again For details on the procedure refer to page 10 1 Cleaning For cleaning the case and the operation panel unplug the power cord first then gently wipe with a dry soft and clean cloth Do not use chemicals such as benzene or thinner since these may cause discoloration or damage IM 701530 01E 3 1 SUJOJOARAA JO 1ueueJnsee y pue uoneAJesqo Punes 310499 B 3 2 Installing the Main Unit Installation Position Installation Conditions Place the instrument in a flat horizontal position as shown in the figure below To tilt the screen slightly forwards use the support as shown below also When using the support pull it forwards until it is at right angles to the bottom of the instrument and lock it If you are installing the instrument in a slippery place attach the rubber stoppers to all feet to prevent the instrument from sliding Support j ZZ The instrument must be installed in a place where the following conditions are met Amb
309. screen display range Record length of acquisition memory Display range on the screen x 2 Acquisition memory s record length gt Display range on the screen Displayed range 10 div Displayed record length When the length of the waveform data acquired in the acquisition memory located before on the left of the trigger position exceeds 10 div waveform data will be acquired in the acquisition memory located after on the right of the trigger position Waveform data of up to 20 div is acquired The part which is out of the display range on the screen can be displayed by adjusting the horizontal position of the waveform as described earlier Trigger position Displayed range 10 div Displayed record length i 10 div lt 10 div i Record length of acquisition memory IM 701530 01E suonounJ 1 3 Setting a Trigger Trigger Type Trigger Source Trigger Level pages 6 1 to 6 11 Trigger type Selects the type of trigger The following types are available as described below Edge trigger TV trigger and window trigger Furthermore the OR trigger pattern trigger and width trigger are available as an option Trigger source Selects the signal for the selected trigger type Trigger level Sets the voltage level used to judge trigger conditions such as trigger slope rise fall of a signal and trigger state high low level Edge trigger page 6 2 The edge trigger is the simplest type of t
310. se given below is displayed the instrument may be defective In this case inform your nearest YOKOGAWA representative and inform him the number of the message which appears No Message Reference Page 601 Invalid file name 4 8 602 No floppy disk inserted 12 1 603 No SCSI 604 Storage media is defective 12 3 605 File not found 606 Floppy disk is write protected 609 File name already exists 610 Reserved file name or illegal character 4 8 611 Directory is full No more files can be created 12 3 612 Insufficient space for creating a file 12 3 614 File is write protected 12 14 615 Formatting error 646 654 Storage media is defective 12 3 656 File attribute error 659 It is not possible to load the file using this ROM version or this Model 662 It is not possible to load an ASCII type file 15 2 IM 701530 01E 15 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions No Message Reference Page 675 ACQ data BIN ASCII cannnot be saved since insufficient space is available less than 20K 700 Specified operation is currently in progress Execute again after the current operation has been completed 701 Itis not possible to start acquisition since the specified operation is in progress 702 Itis not possible to save X Y waveform data 12 7 703 Designated trac
311. sets the settings made using the rotary knob to their default values SNAP SHOT Ey Esc ia rrr DisPLAY For RESET SELECT key INITIALIZE FILTER MEASURE CURSOR cowo ao MATH DISPLAY Used to input the file name for selection VERTICAL HORIZONTAL IRIGGER and confirmation ON OFF m T TRIG D R k b ry kno cul cu2 cua cu4 POSITION ZOOM TYPE MODE ota 2 v x Y Y a ie Used to select the desired setting items e ww ACTON SELECT D or values POSITION SOURCE DELAY e gt k 5 posiTION COUPLING HOLD OFF ACQ r COPY key Chapter 10 Page 12 11 1 2 3 Used for outputting to internal printer INPUT REMOTELOCAL CAL MISC HISTORY STORE RECALL COPY m EMIA external plotter hard copy of screen image l i data etc 0 KEYBOARD FILE pu L SHIFT COPY MENU MISC key Pages 14 2 to 14 4 15 7 Displays the MISC menu used to make communications date and time settings confirm system condition perform a self test LCD brightness and make system configuration setting Chapter 10 Page 12 11 Displays the setting menu for outputting to the internal printer external plotter and for hard copy of screen image data etc M STORE RECALL key Chapter 11 Displays the store recall menu used to store or recall displayed waveforms and setting parameters from the in
312. setting range is 30 ns Selecting the trigger source state and setting the trigger level The trigger source should be selected from CH1 to CH4 Select the trigger state from the following H The trigger source level is above the preset trigger level L The trigger source level is below the preset trigger level The setting limit and resolution for the trigger level is the same as for the edge trigger Refer to page 6 2 Points to note when setting the width trigger A malfunction may occur if pulse intervals are less than 20 ns or more I 20 ns or more If the trigger type setting is changed the width trigger setting will be invalidated However selecting the width trigger again will restore the previous settings Auto mode operations are carried out even if the trigger mode is set to auto level mode 6 12 IM 701530 01E 6 8 Setting the Trigger Mode Keys and Procedure 1 Press the MODE key to display the trigger mode selection menu 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired trigger mode Menu DL1540C Trigger Mode AUTO AT LYL NORMAL SGL S SGL L N SGL C9 Menu DL1540CL Trigger Mode EDEN AT LVL NORMAL SINGLE N SGL m Soft keys a d I MODE key Explanation
313. sor OFF ON 2 3 4 NextMenu 2 7 iv 7 After having pressed any of the T1 T2 or T1 amp T2 soft keys use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor T1 Cursor Type Trace Cursor Cursor or EE V T t T2 TI amp TZ 27 kiv Measuring only the time difference using the vertical cursors 4 After step 3 has been completed press the AT soft key to display the cursor selection menu Two vertical cursors will appear on the screen T1 Cursor Type Cursor orr tm SOL POE 2n 5 After having pressed any of the T1 T2 or T1 amp T2 soft keys use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor T Cursor Type Cursor a ON IT T2 TI amp T2 725i Measuring only the voltage difference using the horizontal cursors 4 After step 3 has been completed press the AV soft key to display the cursor selection menu Two horizontal cursors will appear on the screen T1 Type Cursor Cursor eer poo pager ode 5 Press the Trace soft key to display the trace selection menu H1 Cursor Type Trace Cursor Cursor av 1 20 kiv OFF ig H2 H1 amp H2 IM 701530 01E 8 1 SUJJOJOAeM Duiz euy B 8 1 Measuring a V T Waveform using Cu
314. sor You may also use the or key D p s F1 Tes mm Cursor Cursor Cursor 1 1 Y 1 1 Y OFF F2 FI amp F2 0 9div CURSOR key n oT J lt gt keys Explanation Waveforms which can be measured Waveforms which can be measured are the same on which FFT computation can be performed Refer to the previous page for more details Measurement items The following items can be measured F1 X Frequency at the position of cursor F1 F2 X Frequency at the position of cursor F2 DF X F2 F1 P1 X Frequency level at the position of cursor F1 P2 X Frequency level at the position of cursor F2 DP X P2 P1 X indicates the waveform of measurement F1 cursor F2 cursor Cursor movement method The cursors can be selected as follows F1 Moves cursor F1 only F2 Moves cursor F2 only F1 amp F2 Moves both cursors F1 and F2 simultaneously without changing the distance between them Cursor movement range i Each vertical cursor can be moved to 501 different positions from the left edge um j 5 00 div to the right edge 5 00 div of the waveform display frame However there Lu DM a is no data at the 501 position of the rigth edge Thus when you move the cursor to this position the display will show The default setting is 2 50 div
315. ssion soft key to set compression ON or OFF Entering the filename 22 Press the FileName soft key to display the keyboard 23 Use the keyboard to enter the filename For details regarding the usage of the keyboard refer to page 4 8 Outputting 24 Press the COPY key Auto naming function AutoFile If AutoFile has been set to ON a number 3 digits starting from 001 will be assigned to the data automatically when the data is saved It is possible to insert a common file name up to five characters before the assigned number by specifying the file name using FileName Selecting the data output format Format The data output format can be selected from the following formats HP GL Saves image data in HP GL format PS Saves image data in PostScript format TIFF Saves image data in TIFF format BMP Saves image data in BMP format About saved image data When saving image data extensions are automatically added The DL MISC directory is created automatically and the data is saved into this directory The extensions are as follows HPGL HGL TIFF TIF PS PS BMP BMP Selecting the paper size These Setup settings are necessary for printing out image data from a PC or such to a plotter The contents of printing paper size printing size and printing location depend on the format of the data and can be selected from the following types Also refer to p
316. surement resolution A D converter full range 255 levels Display range 200 levels 25 levels IM 701530 01E 1 3 suonounJ 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Vertical Position of the Waveform page 5 7 Since a total of four input waveforms can be displayed they may overlap each other making observation difficult In this case the waveforms can be moved in the vertical direction so that they can be observed more easily Furthermore full scale in the vertical direction is eight divisions of the grid as mentioned earlier and the voltage display range is eight times the vertical sensitivity setting voltage value per division Thus increasing the vertical sensitivity results in a narrower voltage display range However this function allows the ground level 0 V level to be shifted up and down up to four divisions from the center of the waveform frame so that observation of waveforms is possible over the entire voltage display range V div value x 16 divisions This is because the input voltage range of the A D converter shifts due to the change in the frame position However when acquisition is stopped and displayed waveforms are not updated the input voltage range does not shift even if the frame position is moved As a result acquisition within a voltage display range exceeding 10 24 divisions that is equivalent to the full range of the
317. t items The following items can be measured Using X Y cursors to measure time difference voltage X Y T Time difference between position of vertical cursor and trigger position the vertical cursor is also displayed on the T Y waveform in case the T Y and X Y waveform are being displayed on the same screen X X axis voltage at the position of the X Y cursor Voltage at the position where waveform CH1 intersects the vertical cursor of the T Y waveform Y Y axis voltage at the position of the X Y cursor Voltage at the position where waveform CH2 intersects the vertical cursor of the T Y waveform T Y waveform Vertical cursor T T5 800ms X D 4 BU Measurement values X Y waveform P X Y cursor Using vertical cursors to measure only voltage difference of the X axis dX AX V2 V1 where V1 is the voltage at the X axis where cursor T1 intersects and V2 is the voltage at the X axis where cursor T2 intersects Using horizontal cursors to measure only voltage difference of the Y axis dY AY V2 V1 where V1 is the voltage at the Y axis where cursor H1 intersects and V2 is the voltage at the Y axis where cursor H2 intersects Cursor movement method The cursors can be selected as follows X Y cursor The X Y cursor is indicated by a symbol and moves over the X Y waveform In case the display shows both the X Y and the T Y waveform there will be only one v
318. t key while a snapshot waveform display is being displayed the snapshot waveform will disappear 7 6 IM 701530 01E 7 4 Acquiring Waveforms using the Sequential Keys and Procedure Rotary knob Store Function CLEAR TRACE key r Soft keys Y MODE key START STOP key Acquiring the waveform data only a specified number of times 1 2 4 Press the MODE key to display the trigger mode setting menu Press the N SGL soft key When a trigger is activated at the time the N SGL soft key is pressed waveform acquisition starts For DL1540CL SINGLE menu will be displayed instead of SGL S and SGL L menus e E Acquisition Count N SGL L lt Turn the rotary knob to set the number of acquisitions at Acquisition Count N When waveform acquisition is already in progress and you change the number of acquisitions make sure to restart to get the specified number of acquisitions msc Acquisition Count N SGL L lt If no trigger has been activated already press the START STOP key or once more the N SGL soft key to start data acquisition Trigger Mode AUTO AT LVL NORMAL SGL S Trigger Mode AUTO AT LVL NORMAL SGL S Displaying a specific acquired data by selecting
319. tate neil 1 10 6 15 COUPIUING i c ei eroe e treten 1 10 6 17 oV EE 1 11 6 18 6 19 EXT Anu eee eani 6 2 COCs PEERS aa 1 8 6 2 hold o o a S 1 11 EINE siii ihe Dee ue iii 6 3 5 p 1 8 6 1 mode 4 etm E ram Mery 1 10 6 13 o PEE 1 9 6 8 outp t signal ener rrr een rrr 14 1 pattern oreet eti eene d 1 9 6 9 pOoIDLa zie E 6 18 position 1 11 6 18 Setting eno ine trae RR RONDE IE o Da aes 1 8 SOUICE 1 8 6 1 TV sess 1 8 6 5 type 1 8 6 1 width 1 9 6 11 WID OW vedi ss tuin couronne de Rott need 1 8 6 4 troubleshooting rentre 15 1 type name 5 aure dcn eret edente rer 2 U unit CONVENTIONS 3 ics cocos t enero ben re er Ra asas ERR HER KE Pa cots of linear scaling pie M ans 9 1 ZOOMING LAE EPOR 7 4 Life Xe zo p e inaina 7 11 X Y waveform display sees 1 16 7 15 X Y waveform measurement sse 8 6 ZOOM display 25 dea ed ea e 1 14 ZOOMING waveforms sess 7 4 VAR PEN variable VOTSION HA DI EE vertical position ssessseseeeeeeeeennn 1 4 5 7 vertical sensitivity seeeseeeeseeeeese 1 3 5 2 5 6 WwW Wde Oe a a a a 7 11 waveform accumulation a reete ret ia 7 18 Computation essen 8 20 COMPUTATION seen e nha a e e E Vez EE ERE 8 18 display ON OFF eret meet iandae rainne reana tains 5
320. tect a sudden abnormality in a waveform 1st acquisition 2nd acquisition Nth acquisition msi P Action On Trigger page 6 15 The displayed waveform can be output to the optional built in printer or saved to a floppy disk each time a trigger is activated Trigger Coupling page 6 17 Input coupling can also be switched for trigger sources as it is for input signals Select the type of input coupling which is most suitable for the trigger source signal The following two types of input coupling are available for trigger source signals DC The trigger source signal is used as the trigger source without any process AC The trigger source signal is used as the trigger source after DC the content has been removed from it A trigger can always be activated if the trigger level is set to 0 V as long as the signal s amplitude is one division or more 1 10 IM 701530 01E 1 3 Setting a Trigger HF Rejection page 6 17 Set HF rejection to ON when you want to remove high frequencies exceeding 15 kHz from the trigger source This prevents a trigger from being activated unexpectedly due to high frequency noise Trigger Position page 6 18 The trigger position indicates which position of the waveform in the acquisition memory will actually be displayed on the screen The trigger position can be moved on the display from the center 0 div to 4 div which enables observation of t
321. tective grounding terminal Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 180 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption 240 VA 300 VA when the built in printer is used Typical power consumption 150 VA at 100 VAC when the built in printer is not used 190 VA at 200 VAC 3 pin AC outlet Power cord supplied with instrument IM 701530 01E 3 3 SUJJOJOAEM JO 1ueueJnsee y pue uoneAJesqo Punes eJojeg B 3 4 Turning the Power Switch ON OFF Points to be Checked before Turning ON the Power Check that the instrument is correctly installed as described in Section 3 2 Installing the Main Unit page 3 2 Check that the power cord is correctly connected as shown in Section 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord page 3 3 Location of the Power Switch The power switch is located on the front panel in the lower left corner Turning the Power Switch ON OFF The power switch is a push button type switch and the power is turned ON and OFF alternately as the switch is pressed RS OF ON S T TL xm L L F My The Order in Turning the Power Switches ON OFF When peripheral devices are connected to the half pitch interface connector of the this instrument turn ON the power switches on all peripheral devices first then turn
322. ternal memory L SHIFT STORE RECALL FILE key Chapter 12 and 13 Displays the setting menu used to save load data to from the floppy disk or the SCSI device IM 701530 01E 2 5 ued U9e3 jo esf pue owen 2 3 Display Normal Waveform Display Information concerning waveform acquisiton No display acquisition in progress Stopped Waiting for trigger Date and time Page 3 7 Trigger position Acquisition mode Page NORM Normal mode ENV Envelope mode AVG Averaging mode 7 1 Sample rate App 2 App 3 In case of the repetitive sampling mode NORM 500kS s 2ms div y E ins div REP is added CH1 ON i ed AT i Time axis setting Page 5 10 i CH2 ON Information concerning waveforms Page 7 15 7 EUM ie CH2 Signal waveform of channel 2 Trigger level mark Ts T CH3 OFF 20 0V Voltage axis sensitivity is 20 0V div i be ty y DC gt Input coupling CH4 ON 10 1 Probe attenuation i 2 00V div 10 1 DC 0 00V Trace No Record Length Main 10K Zoom 10K Filter ac E BW FULL P i Trigger H tmd avro QGraticule Page 7 14 d Type EDGE Ground level mark i Saure ete i CH2 Level Rotary knob menu CH1 nz a Um cna EXT LINE 0 8v Shows values and settings which can a J be adjusted by rotary knob v Soft key menu Press the corresponding key below wh
323. the CH3 and CH4 are both OFF 7 2 830 For DL1540CL Since the record length is 400K 1M 2M words the trigger mode can only be set to SINGLE 6 13 831 For DL1540CL Since the record length is 2M words CH3 and CH4 cannot be set ON 7 2 835 Itis not possible to set GO NO GO gone type in color accumulation mode Chapter 9 836 No keys can be operated since GO NO GO operation is in progress except the GO NO GO Mode Chapter 9 and ABORT key 837 No keys can be operated since trigger action operation is in progress except the START STOP 6 15 and ABORT key 838 This key cannot be operated when the zone wave edit mode is in progress 9 1 842 Turn On the internal hard disk motor 13 2 900 The back up lithium battery has run out The back up function is no longer valid To have the battery replaced contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual 3 4 901 Cooling fan has stopped Turn OFF the power immediately 905 Isolator cannot be used IM 701530 01E 15 5 uonoedsu pue eoueuajure N Punoouse qnou 15 3 Self Test The self test function is available in the MISC menu This function can be used when the instrument seems to be defective Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative and proceed according to his instructions Do not use this function unless the instrument is defective Keys and Procedure 1 Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu 2 Press the To NextMenu soft key T
324. the easy observation of waveforms The type of graticule can be changed and scale display and marker can be turned ON OFF Graticule Grid Scale ON Marker ON Graticule Frame Scale OFF Marker OFF Intensity The intensity for items displayed on the LCD display such as characters graticule and so on can be adjusted Adjust the intensity according to your needs IM 701530 01E 1 17 suonounJ 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Cursor Measurements pages 8 1 8 5 and 8 19 The vertical dotted lines shown in the figure below are called cursors Moving the cursors enables measurement of the voltage at various points on the waveform the voltage difference between two points the time interval from the trigger point or delay point and the time difference between two displayed points They also enable the frequency to be calculated The measured values are displayed in the waveform display frame as shown below The following types of cursor are available In case of V T display Vertical and horizontal cursors When using the V T waveform display use the V T cursor to measure thedata on screen Using the V T ACQ cursor it is possible to make measurements with the actual data acquired in the acquisition memory In case of X Y display Vertical horizontal and X Y cursors are available In case of FFT power spectrum display Vertical cursors V T waveform display vertical cursor X Y wavefor
325. the instrument The probe attenuates the input signal by 1 10 When a probe is used the probe attenuation must match the instrument s attenuation setting so that the input voltage can be measured directly Set the instrument s attenuation to 10 1 if the supplied probe is to be used In addition to 10 1 attenuations of 1 1 100 1 and 1000 1 are provided When you use a probe other than the one supplied with the instrument set the instrument s attenuation so that it matches the probe s attenuation IM 701530 01E 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Inverted Waveform Display page 5 5 The voltage axis is inverted about the ground as shown below and the waveform is displayed In other words voltage is converted to voltage and voltage to voltage Original waveform not inverted Inverted waveform Ground level Vertical sensitivity page 5 6 The V div vertical sensitivity setting is used to adjust the amplitude of the displayed waveform so that the waveform can be observed easily The V div setting is made by setting the voltage value per division on the screen grid The set up value for the vertical sensitivity is displayed according to the probe s attenuation setting The V div setting can be either VAR or CAL In case of the CAL setting attenuators with different attenuati
326. the power supply before turning on the power Power Cord and Plug To prevent an electric shock or fire be sure to use the power supply cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged in an outlet with protective grounding terminal Do not invalidate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent an electric shock before turning on the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding and Fuse Do not operate the instrument when protective grounding or fuse might be defective Fuse To prevent a fire make sure to use fuses with specified standard current voltage type Before replacing the fuses turn off the power and disconnect the power source Do not use a different fuse or short circuit the fuse holder Do not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Do not Remove any Covers There are some areas with high voltage Do not remove any cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by qualified personnel only External Connection To ground securely
327. the short copy Refer to page 10 4 for more details Data size when saving In case of saving a V T Waveform with two waveforms and grid displayed HPGL approx 25Kbyte TIFF approx 300Kbyte PS approx 7OKbyte BMP approx 300Kbyte Checking the free space on a medium Refer to page 13 5 for a description of this procedure Image color type with TIFF or BMP only OFF Same image as the SHORT short copy printing type described on page 10 4 GRAY 4 bit gray scale image HALF Image using the same colors as the screen except grid scale etc are in black and no background FULL Image using the same colors as the screen Data compression with TIFF or BMP only Data of TIFF and BMP formats can be output by compression using respectively LZW and RLE IM 701530 01E 13 15 ysiq pJer euJeiu eui Jo e91 eq ISOS 9y w014 eyeq Duipeo pue Burnes 13 7 Saving Screen Image Data Entering a file name The following points must be kept in mind when entering a file name A file name must always be specified Up to eight characters can be entered All the characters on the keyboard can be used However the following file names cannot be used due to MS DOS restrictions AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK The same name cannot be assigned to different data files of the same data type Overwrite inhibit Points to not when using data saved in Post Script format There is no problem printing out data saved
328. this manual Price information can be obtained from them Part No B9850NX Specification Thermo sensible 30 m Minimum quantity 5 rolls Handling the Roll Chart Thermo sensible roll charts generate color using a thermal reaction therefore the following precautions must be taken Storage precautions The roll chart begins to develop color at approximately 70 C It is very sensitive to heat damp light and chemicals both before and after use e Keep roll charts in a dry cool and dark place Once the package is opened use the roll chart as soon as possible If the roll chart is left in contact with plastic films containing plasticizer for instance vinyl chloride film cellophane tape etc for a long period of time discoloration will occur on the recording area of the chart due to the plasticizer If you are going to keep the roll chart in a holder for instance use a polypropylene holder When you use adhesive on the roll chart never use adhesive which contains an organic solvent such as alcohol or ether otherwise color may develop on the chart When you are going to store recorded roll charts for a long period of time we suggest you make a copy of the charts since discoloration of the originals may occur Usage precautions Use only YOKOGAWA s genuine roll charts Do not touch the roll chart with sweaty hands Do not rub the surface of the roll chart hard with a solid object color development may occur due to
329. tically measured waveform parameters Screen hardcopy and additional information print out Outputs screen hardcopy and additional information setup and waveform parameters to the built in printer optional or to an external HP GL plotter via the GP IB interface Real time printing Prints out waveforms similar to a recorder Action on trigger Records data automatically when a trigger is activated Selectable whether a hardcopy is printed out on the built in printer or whether the data will be stored to a floppy disk Data Storage Recall Stores and recalls waveform data and set ups from the internal memory and floppy disk DL1540C DL1540CL can use a SCSI device through the SCSI interface unit 700930 sold Separately Calibration signal Approx 1 kHz 1 V 16 4 IM 701530 01E 16 6 Rear Panel Input Output Section Item External trigger input EXT TRIG IN Specifications Connector type Input band Input impedance Maximum input voltage Trigger level Input amplitude Input pulse width BNC DC to 15 MHz Approx 1 MQ t6V 1 5Vor0 15 V TTL CMOS level recommended 0 3 Vp p or greater at the end of the connector 0 15 V or greater relative to the threshold level 25 ns or more for both High and Low levels Trigger output TRIG OUT Connector type Output level Output logic Output delay time Output hold time BNC TTL Negative trailing edge
330. ting location depend on the format of the data and can be selected from the following types Also refer to page 10 4 For HPGL format Setting Output item Output size Output location A3 WAVE Screen hardcopy A3 Middle A3 SETUP Set up parameters A3 Middle A4 WAVE Screen hardcopy A4 Middle A4 SETUP Set up parameters A4 Middle A5 Upper WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 Lower WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Lower half A5 UpperWAVE amp Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 LowerSETUP Set up parameters A5 Lower half A5 UpperWAVE amp Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 LowerMEASURE waveform measurement data A5 Lower half For PS format Setting Output item Output size Output location A4 WAVE Screen hardcopy A4 Middle A4 SETUP Set up parameters A4 Middle A5 Upper WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 Lower WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Lower half A5 UpperWAVE amp Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 LowerSETUP Set up parameters A5 Lower half A5 UpperWAVE amp Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half A5 LowerMEASURE waveform measurement data A5 Lower half For TIFF BMP format No selections are possible the output size is approx 12 x 8 cm Contents to be saved In the HP GL and PS format the following types of screen image data are not saved Snapshot waveforms Soft key menu and rotary knob menu Messages except Stopped and RUNNING In the TIFF and BMP format data will be saved exactly as in case of
331. tings menu 2 Press the Media soft key to display the media selection menu J STORE RECALL FILE key Explanation Media Data Type AutoFile m Cz Floppy P P ACQ SETUP Ea on Utility 1 I 3 Press the SCSI or HD soft key to select the SCSI device or the internal hard disk as the media LI z Modia Type ata Type AutoFile Utilit ltt ACQ SETUP OFF ON s i E Y a SHIFT key Selecting the Media Select from the following Floppy Floppy disk e SCSI SCSI device Refer to Section 16 1 for information on the different types of SCSI devices HD Internal hard disk Note When this instrument and the SCSI device are not connected properly the media selection menu does not appear On models with the internal hard disk DL1540CL C8 option you can select not only the SCSI device but also the internal hard disk as the data save and load destination IM 701530 01E 13 3 ysiq pJer euJeiu eui Jo e91 eq ISOS 9y Woy eyeq Duipeo pue Bunes 13 4 Formatting the Media Keys and Procedure Rotary knob SELECT key m Soft keys C3 X J 7 ia a Od a nee Q
332. tion refer to the explanation later on Saving screen image data 6 Press the Format soft key to display the image data setting menu Format FileName AutoFile HPGL OFF fe Setup To TopMenu 7 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired format In case you selected HPGL or PS continue with step 6 In case you selected TIFF or BMP continue with step 19 Format To PS or FF BMP TopMenu 8 Press the Setup soft key to display the output setting menu Selecting the paper size 9 After having selected the Paper Size setting using the rotary knob press the the SELECT key to select the desired paper size In case you selected PS at step 5 there is no need to use the rotary knob and you may continue with step 18 Selecting the pen speed 10 After having selected the Pen Speed setting using the rotary knob press the the SELECT key to select from NORMAL or SLOW Selecting the XY Mode 11 After having selected the XY Mode setting using the rotary knob press the the SELECT key to select from DOT or LINE Assigning pens 12 After having selected the Pen Mode setting using the rotary knob press the the SELECT key to select from AUTO or MANUAL In case you selected MANUAL continue with step 14 13 After having selected AUTO and after
333. to 500 ms div Real time Roll mode 200 ms to 100 ns div Real time Update mode If maximum displayable record length is set to 2 M available if trigger mode is single and display channel is 1 or 2 DL1540CL Time axis setting Sampling mode Display mode 1 50 s to 1 s div Real time Roll mode 500 ms to 100 ns div Real time Update mode 1 Indicates the display mode which is in effect when the trigger mode is auto mode or auto level mode and hysterisis is set off For a description of how to set the trigger mode refer to 6 8 Setting the Trigger Mode page 6 13 2 Either real time or repetitive mode is possible For a description of how to switch modes refer to 7 1 Selecting Acquisition Mode Sampling Mode and Record Length page 7 1 5 10 IM 701530 01E 5 8 Setting the Time Axis Relationship between sampling rate and record length Reducing the time per division setting T div time axis setting increases the sampling rate If T div is set below some specific level the displayed record length will be shorter than the maximum displayable record length For details refer to Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Changing T div while acquisition is in progress T div can still be changed when acquisition has been stopped with the START STOP key The newly set T div will come into effect when acquisition is restarted When T div is changed while acquisition is in progress the new T div value will be displayed below the T di
334. to be using a model with the internal disk DL1540CL C8 option or the SCSI interface unit 700930 sold separately 2 Selectable only on models with the internal hard disk DL1540CL C8 option 9 4 IM 701530 01E 9 1 Judging using a Waveform Zone 30 After having selected either FD P P or FD ACQ move to the FileName setting and press the SELECT key The keyboard will be displayed After having selected either NONE or PRINT continue with step 32 31 Use the keyboard to enter the name of the file The entered filename will be displayed at the FileName setting For details how to operate the keyboard refer to page 4 8 Returning to the top menu 32 Return to the GO NO GO top menu by pressing the ESC key Tracel Setup Trace3 Setup Mode ON Mode ame ON Condition IN Condition IN i TN Sets determination conditions for each trace Trace2 Setup Trace4 Setup Mode ON Mode Mad ON Condition IN Condition RALE IN Common Items Setup Logic EN oo Selects logic Sequence ENS CONTINUE Selects sequence Action TENZphiwT ro P roaco ro weoE Selects action after determination FileName C Buzzer US on __ Selects buzzer ON OFF action when determination is NG Enters the file name using the keyboard Executing the determinati
335. to interpolation the X Y display and accumulate display remain unchanged Settings related to graticule scale Ymarker and Waveform information remain unchanged Auto set up settings related to waveform analysis MEASURE CURSOR MATH Settings related to automated measurements remain unchanged Settings related to cursor measurements remain unchanged Waveform computation and phase shift are set to OFF Other Auto set up related settings STORE RECALL SAVE LOAD Display of recalled waveforms is set to OFF Display of loaded waveforms is set to OFF UNDO Cancellation of auto set up After auto set up has been completed this function allows you to restore the settings which were in effect before the auto set up was performed However if the power is turned OFF the settings which were in effect before the auto set up will be lost Thus it is not possible to perform an UNDO before an auto set up Note It is not possible to perform auto set up while GO NO GO determination is in progress The snapshot waveform will be deleted if auto set up is performed The auto set up function may not operate correctly in certain cases such as when the waveform contains DC components or high frequency components IM 701530 01E 4 3 suoneJedo UOWWOD B 4 3 Initializing Settings Keys and Procedure 1 Press the INITIALIZE key to display the initialization execution menu 2 Press the INIT
336. tored in memory and ranges from 1 to 100 100 is default setting For DL1540CL the record length per iteration for a given channel and the number of allowable iterations are determined by the selected maximum displayable record length see page 7 2 as indicated below Under default settings the record length is 10 KW and 100 iterations are stored Maximum Displayable Supported Iteration Record Length per Record Length Settings Waveform Iteration per channel DL1540CL 1 KW 1 to 100 Same as displayed record length in App 3 page App 5 10 KW 1 to 100 Same as displayed record length in App 3 page App 6 100 KW 1 to 10 Same as displayed record length in App 3 page App 7 For DL1540CL 400 KW or above Function is not supported The number of acquired data can be viewed in the upper side of the screen where the indication such as Count 9 appears Displaying acquired data Display Trace The way of displaying the acquired data can be selected from the following Displaying the selected waveform only Selecting the waveform can be done by setting the Display Number or by highlighting data from the Time Stamp list Displaying all waveforms When all waveforms are displayed you can easily spot the waveform which is selected by the Display Number since it is displayed more brightly Selecting the waveform to be displayed Display Number The setting ranges from 0 to the acquisition count number
337. ts of 5 data points Input filter 20 MHz Accumulation Time for performing accumulation can be selected from 100 ms to 60 s and INFINITE X Y waveform display Two waveforms CH1 X axis CH2 Y axis can be displayed simultaneously Graticule Scale Allows selection of scale from frame and grid turns display of the scale ON OFF turns the marker ON OFF Intensity adjustment Intensity can be adjusted for each displayed item Cursor measurements Uses the vertical and horizontal cursors to measure the voltage and time at the cursor position as well as the difference in voltage and time between the cursor positions Automated measurements All 21 items of one channel or any selected item at each channel can be displayed Displayble items depend at the number of displayed waveforms In addition to measurement of displayed data measurement of actual data within acquisition memory is also supported Waveform computation Performs subtraction addition and multiplication between channels CH1 and CH2 Phase shift Performs waveform computation with the phase of CH2 shifted FFT computation Displays the power spectrum after having selected the time frame from rectangular or hanning GO NO GO judgment The following two types of GO NO GO are available Judgment is made using the zone on the screen simultaneous judgment of four waveforms is possible Judgment is made using the automa
338. tting menu and a list of files Media Data Type AutoFile P P ACQ SETUP fac unity SCSI 9 Press the LOAD soft key to display the loading menu ee EXEC TEVEN 10 Use the rotary knob to select the file to be loaded AAA 96705703 12 15 36 2 96705703 12 16 08 ccc 96 05 03 12 16 34 11 Press the EXEC soft key to start loading Function SETUP To IM 701530 01E 13 11 ysiq pJer euJeiu eui Jo e91 eq ISOS 9y w014 eyeq Duipeo pue Burnes 13 6 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters Explanation Auto naming function AutoFile If AutoFile has been set to ON a file name No 3 digits starting from 001 will be assigned to the data automatically when the data is saved It is possible to insert a common file name up to five characters before the assigned file name No by specifying the file name using FileName Setting parameters which can be saved Settings made using the soft key menu and rotary knob as well as the START STOP state and the channel s ON OFF state are saved If a zone waveform has been registered in GO NO GO and the following settings have been made the zone waveform will also be saved Mode ON Type ZONE About saved setting parameters When setting parameters are saved the extension SET is automatically added the DL SETUP directory is created automatically and the data is saved into this
339. tting parameters can be stored in the internal memories It is also possible to recall and display stored waveforms and to recall and modify stored set up data This function is useful when you want to compare the previously acquired waveform with a newly acquired waveform Recalled waveform q MEM 1 5Sms div 20 00 NORM 200kS s EN ar 1 21 IM 701530 01E 1 6 Other Useful Functions Saving Loading Data from a Floppy Disk Chapter 12 The instrument is equipped with a floppy disk drive as standard This enables you to save setting parameters on a floppy disk and load it when you need it Furthermore it is also possible to save screen image data in HP GL PostScript TIFF or BMP format and import these into documents created by DTP application software Personal computer Saving Loading Data from the SCSI Device Chapter 13 DL1540C DL1540CL can save load data from the SCSI device through the separately sold SCSI interface unit in the same way as saving loading from the floppy disk as described above SCSI device ELA DL1540C 1540CL needs a SCSI nu SOE unit m SS eo oo o a LI LI GP IB RS 232 C Communications Interface User s Manual IM 701530 11E The instrument is equipped with a GP IB interface as standard whereas a RS 232
340. tting parameters Points to note when protecting or deleting data Protection setting cannot be performed if the floppy disk is write protected An error message will appear if an attempt is made to protect or delete files e Itis not possible to delete more than one file at once This protection setting is effective against deletion of data but not against initialization formatting Take care not to accidentally delete files by reformatting a floppy file Never remove the floppy disk while the access indicator of the floppy disk drive is lit or damage to the magnetic head of the drive or loss of data on the floppy disk may result IM 701530 01E 12 15 ysiq Ajddoj4 wo eyeq Buipeo pue Bui es RI Chapter 13 Saving and Loading Data from the SCSI Device or the Internal Hard Disk 13 1 Connecting a SCSI Device The method for connecting a SCSI device to the DL1540CL varies depending on whether or not the internal hard disk option is installed See below For Models with the Internal Hard Disk SCSI specifications C8 option Item Specifications Interface standard SCSI Small Computer System Interface ANSI X3 131 1986 Connector type Half pitch 50 pins pin type Electrical specifications Single end See the figure below for pin configuration Terminator is built in Pin No Signal Name Pin No Signal Name 1to 12 GND 38 TERMPWR 13 NC 39 40 GND 141025 GND 41 ATN 26 DBO 42 GND 27 DB1 43 BSY
341. u ey r Soft keys C3 irs euh pom pe dies NES J 1 Turning the Date Time ON OFF VET 3 Turn the rotary knob to select Mode and select ON or OFF SS using the SELECT key C Setting the Date Time cu 4 Turn the rotary knob to select Year Month Day Hour MISC key Explanation Minute or Second Press the SELECT key to display the setting screen Set the required value using the rotary knob 6 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting screen Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all necessary items are set 8 Turn the rotary knob to select SET and press the SELECT key to confirm the settings 9 Press the ESC key to close the menu DATE TIME pi 5 Mode DATE Year 1995 Month 2 Day 1 TIME Hour w Minute 3 Second 2 SET Setting the Date Time ON or OFF When you set the mode to ON the date and time will appear in the upper left corner of the screen And when making a hard copy of the screen to the built in printer or external plotter the date and time will be printed together with the waveform 1998 11 18 18 35 33 The current date and time are saved together with the waveform data or set up data when the data is saved to a floppy disk Setting values of Date Time DATE TIME Year 1980 to 2079 Hour 00 to 23 Month 1 to 12 Minute 00 to 59 Day
342. u selected f or t use the rotary knob to set the desired trigger level Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the trigger slope state and level for each trigger source CH4 CHI CH2 CH3 Level Y v x Pax Yx d Types of trigger sources and setting the trigger slope state and level CH1 CH2 CH3 CHA Selects which of the input signals CH1 to CH4 will be used as the trigger source Select the trigger slope state from the following f Activates a trigger when the trigger source changes from a level below the trigger level to one above the trigger level l Activates a trigger when the trigger source changes from the level above the trigger level to the one below the trigger level X This channel will be skipped as a trigger source The setting limit and resolution for the trigger level is the same as for the edge trigger Refer to page 6 2 Points to note when setting the OR trigger e f the trigger type setting is changed the OR trigger setting will be invalidated However selecting the OR trigger again will restore the previous settings Auto mode operations are carried out even if the trigger mode is set auto level mode 6 8 IM 701530 01E 6 6 Setting the Pattern Trigger Optional 1 Press the TYPE key to display the trigger type selection menu Key s and Procedure and press the PATTERN soft key Rotary knob Trigger Type EDGE WINDOW TV I OR anlaki WIDTH 2
343. ue is The displayed waveform will not be updated if the trigger condition does not become true In this mode it is not possible to judge whether the signal is input or the trigger level is correct unless a trigger is activated Furthermore the ground level is not displayed even if the input coupling is set to GND Furthermore in this mode roll mode display is never activated whatever the T div setting and waveforms are displayed only when a trigger is activated SGL S Single short mode for DL1540C SINGLE Single mode for DL1540CL When the START STOP key is pressed and the trigger condition becomes true waveform is updated once only and acquisition stops the If the time axis setting corresponds to roll mode the oscilloscope generates a roll mode display When the trigger occurs the oscilloscope obtains data for the set record length and then stops the displayed waveform For details about record length refer to Appendix 2 Appendix 3 IM 701530 01E 6 13 JeDBu e BuneAnoy H 6 8 Setting the Trigger Mode SGL L Single long mode for DL1540C This mode is the same as the aboved mentioned SGL S mode except that the record length here is longer The maximum record length is 120 K words For more details about the relation between time axis setting sample rate and record length refer to Appendix 2 N SGL Single N mode Each time the trigger condition becomes true after the
344. uilt in printer FD P P Saves all the displayed waveforms as P P compressed data on a floppy disk when a trigger is activated FD ACQ Saves all the displayed acquisition data binary data on a floppy disk when a trigger is activated FD IMG Saves the current screen image data to the floppy disk SCSI IMG Saves the current screen image data to the SCSI device SCSI P P Saves the entire displayed waveform P P compressed data to the SCSI device SCSI ACQ Saves the acquisition data binary data of the entire displayed waveform to the SCSI device HD IMG Saves the current screen image data to the internal hard disk HD P P Saves all the displayed waveforms as P P compressed data to the internal hard disk HD ACQ Saves all the displayed acquisition data binary data to the internal hard disk 1 You need to be using a model with the internal hard disk DL1540CL C8 option or the SCSI interface unit 700930 sold separately 2 Selectable only on models with the internal hard disk DL1540CL C8 option When the action on trigger starts the trigger mode will change automatically to the single short mode or single mode IM 701530 01E 6 15 JeDBu e BuneAnoy H 6 9 Setting the Action On Trigger Specifying a file name when FD P P FD ACQ FD IMG SCSI P P SCSI ACQ SCSI IMG HD P P HD ACQ or HD IMG has been selected as the trigger action A file
345. ut setting menu Soft keys Y o PRNTR am TE GP IB Ed red L d Selecting the external printer C I II IL 3 After step 2 has been completed press the Format soft key to T display the external printer selection menu O ez posed C ITem Format Color To E T ESC P 0 ON TopMenu f I Y Jsf Y Y J COPY MENU key j SHIFT key 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the external printer to be selected hm ESC P2 BJ er PCL LIPS PR201 Selecting the resolution 5 If you selected BJ in step 4 press the Resolution soft key to display the resolution selection menu 6 Press the 180dpi 300dpi or 360dpi soft key Selecting the print type 7 After step 2 has been completed press the Color soft key to select OFF or ON Outputting to the external printer 8 Press the COPY key Aborting the printing 9 After having performed step6 press the COPY key again to abort the printing Explanation Centronics interface Centronics interface is a typical interface used to transfer print data and is employed in many printers DL1540C DL1540CL can print screen image to a printer which supports the following print formats If you need the information of the GP IB Centronics converter contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative External printer type Format Select from ESC P ESC P2 BJ PCL5 LIPS or PR201 Print type Select from the following ON Print using the same colors as the screen except gr
346. v for the displayed waveform as shown below NORM MS s 1ms div l div for the currently displayed waveform 20ms div T div just after acquisition has started 3 Points to note T div can be changed irrespective of the displayed menu since a T div setting knob is available But for DL1540CL note that it is not possible to select a short time axis 50ns div or less if maximum displayable record length has been set to 400 KW 1 MW or 2 MW for DL1540CL only See page 7 1 The T div setting has no effect if the external clock signal is selected as the timebase During expansion mode the T div obtained by dividing the normal display T div by the expansion ratio is displayed f T div is set so that roll mode is activated averaging will not be performed on the waveform data even if the acquisition mode has been set to averaging mode NORM will be displayed instead of AVG Evenif the trigger mode is single mode if T div is set to a value within a certain range roll mode will still be activated However when a trigger is activated and acquisition of data of the specified record length ends waveform display will be stopped Pressing the CLEAR TRACE key while waveforms are displayed in repetitive sampling mode will restart sampling IM 701530 01E 5 11 sexy ejuoziuop pue jeo eui Hues jo 5 9 Changing the Waveform s Horizontal Position Keys and Procedure Rotary knob 1 Pr
347. veforms 11 2 IM 701530 01E 11 2 Storing and Recalling Setting Parameters Keys and Procedure 1 Press the STORE RECALL key to display the data type selection menu 2 Press the SETUP soft key to display the store recall setting menu Data Type m Soft keys WAVE SETUP I N Storing setting parameters 3 Press the STORE soft key to display the setting parameters storing menu The default setting is STORE oor ion Function UT Destn EXEC Le STORE RECALL key 4 Press the Destn soft key to display the memory selection Explanation menu 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the memory in which the setting parameters are to be stored Function SETUP Destination at EDJE RECALL MEM 2 MEM 3 MEM 4 6 Press the EXEC soft key to execute storing Recalling setting parameters 3 After step 2 has been completed press the RECALL soft key to display the setting parameters recalling menu Function SETUP STORE 4 Press the Source soft key to display the recall memory selection menu 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the memory No from which the setting parameters are to be recalled Function SETUP Source STORE MEM 2 MEM 3 MEM 4 6 P
348. ven if initialization is performed Date and time Displayed waveforms setting parameters stored in the internal memory GO NO GO zone waveforms Communications addresses Points to note when initializing Snapshot waveforms will be deleted when initialization is performed Operations such as measurements computations etc will be halted Initialization cannot be performed during GO NO GO 4 4 IM 701530 01E 4 4 Halting a Waveform and Erasing the Halted Waveform Snapshot and Clear Trace Keys and Procedure ind TRACE key SNAP SHOT key 1 Press the SNAP SHOT key to halt the waveform 2 Press the CLEAR TRACE key to erase the halting waveform i I Explanation Snap Shot Function A snapshot waveform is displayed each time the SNAP SHOT key is pressed and will be deleted when you switch between MAIN ZOOM or MainZoom display or when initialization of settings is performed A snapshot cannot be performed during X Y waveform display In order to view snapshot waveforms only you can either turn off the input signal by pressing the CH key or move the vertical position of the displayed channel Snapshot waveforms will remain on the screen even if calibration is performed The following operations are not possible on snapshot waveforms Position movement Cursor measurem
349. vertical cursor position selection menu The vertical cursors appear on the screen Ti Type Cursor Cursor 5 OFF AS N m rA E 5 Press the Ref Val soft key to display the reference phase selection menu and press the soft key corresponding to the desired phase D1 Cursor Type IR Reference Ref Val Cursor or Ef Degree IGS R2 360 727i 6 Press the Reference soft key to select either R1 or R2 Then use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor reference phase selection cursor Pressing the Reference Soft key each time toggles through the items controlled by the rotary knob as follows R1 gt R2 gt R1 amp R2 gt R1 7 Press the Cursor soft key to select either D1 or D2 Then use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor Pressing the Cursor soft key each time toggles through the items controlled by the rotary knob as follows D1 gt D2 gt D1 amp D2 gt D1 Di L Item controlled by the rotary Cursor vp Cursor Reference Ref Val Cursor knob is currently R1 OFF Degree D2 R2 350 77K To change to D2 press the Cursor soft key 8 2 IM 701530 01E 8 1 Measuring a V T Waveform using Cursors Explanation T1 eed T2 ee H2 cursor 1H1 cursor
350. w to Calculate the Area of a Waveform IntegiTY Total area for positive side only S1 S2 I 7 S2 i PAX ZZ i Integ2TY Total area for both positive and negative sides Si S3 S2 77 S3 1 S2 Integ1XY 1 Multiplc loops 2 Non closed curve Area S So Area enclosed by a curve connecting the start and stop points Mcr MR SS AD SS Start point Stop point Sa asetomi Stop peint 3 Loop tracing the shape of 8 4 Spiral loop Uf Area Sz So S1 Area Sz Sox2 S1 S 2 Number of overlaps Z varies according to gt the number of loops Start point 3 Stop point Stop point Integ2XY 1 When only one Y data corresponds to X data 1 3 X axis Y 0 Start point Stop point Se Area S So Area S So i So Start point Stop point X axis Yz0 2 4 X axis Y 0 Stop point Start point So Area SzSo Area Sz So 7 So Stop point Start point X axis Y 0 2 When the waveform extends into the negative side Start point i J X axis Y 0 Area SzSo S1 Stop point 2 When two or more Y data correspond to X data Start point Area S So Start point So Area S S0 2xS1 S2 Stop point X axis Y 0 X axis Y 0 IM 701530 01E App 11 xipueddy H Appendix 5 Output Data Format used when Saving Waveform Data Example DL1540CL Header Files Files with the identifier of HDR The header file is always saved with the data
351. waveform upper waveform waveform X Y expanded waveform lower MainZoom V T pre zoom X Y expanded V T pre zoom waveform waveform waveform zoom box upper Zoom box upper X Y expanded waveform lower V T expanded waveform lower Selecting the display type in case of FFT mode power spectrum The type of display depends on the settings in the expansion menu For more details on the power spectrum refer to page 8 20 ZOOM mode FFT Mode FFT OFF FFT VT amp FFT OFF V T pre zoom FFT pre zoom V T pre zoom waveform upper waveform waveform FFT pre zoom waveform lower MAIN V T pre zoom FFT pre zoom V T pre zoom waveform waveform waveform zoom box upper Zoom box FFT pre zoom waveform lower ZOOM V T expanded FFT expanded V T expanded waveform upper waveform waveform FFT expanded waveform lower MainZoom V T pre zoom FFT expanded V T pre zoom waveform waveform waveform zoom box upper zoom box upper V T expanded waveform lower FFT expanded waveform lower SUOIIPUOD e dsiq pue uonisinboy Buibueuo 7 3 Zooming the Waveform Points to note when displaying an expanded waveform The waveform zone cannot be edited during GO NO GO if both pre zoom waveform and its expanded waveform are displayed at the same time If you press the ZOOM Mode soft key while accumulated waveform display is in progress accumulated waveform display will be reset f you press the ZOOM Mode sof
352. wen Sains sae Record Length Es Main 10K expanded waveform Zoom 1K Filter Expanded waveform Smoothing OFF ap meii Eie BW FULL zi Trigger Mode AUTO Type EDGE Source CH1 4 Hi H ZOOM ZOOM Mode ZOOM Knob EE E t OFF MAIN ZOOM POS x 10 Expansion rate V v L Expansion setting menu Recalled Waveform Refer to page 11 1 r Channel No switches to MEM when a recalled waveform is displayed The voltage axis sensitivity of the recalled waveform is displayed as well 1998 11 19 20 14 26 NORM 500kS s 2ms div Stopped d 2ms div MEM 1 i H CH1 OFF 364V H 50 0V div 10 1 DC 0 0 i CH2 ON 1j 36 4V div 10 1 DC 0 0v CH3 OFF 50V div 10 1 DC 0 0v CH4 OFF 2 00V div 10 1 DC 0 00V Iu s Record Length Main 10K i i E oss Zoom 10K Input signal Destination Filter a EEH selection menu Smcothing OFF br daca i i Zr BW FULL i D Trigger 1 Mode RUTO Type EDGE I Source CH4 4 C i H N Function WAVE Destination meem OAD LOAD2 LOAD3 LOAD4 V J v G Recall menu IM 701530 01E 2 7 Chapter 3 Before Starting Observation and Measurement of Waveforms 3 1 Precautions During Use Safety Precautions When using this instrument thoroughly read the Safety Precautions given on page 5 and 6 In addition pay attention to the follo
353. while the access indicator of the floppy disk drive is lit or damage to the magnetic head of the drive or loss of data on the floppy disk may result 12 10 IM 701530 01E 12 5 Saving Screen Image Data Keys and Procedure Rotary knob SELECT key RESET key ESC key r Soft keys EC T I zer peor Y Y Y ji I J COPY MENU key SHIFT key Output setting menu in case PS is selected File Setup Paper Size CCEUTNTSIAa SETUP A5 UpperWAVE A5 LowerWAVE AS UpperWAVE amp AS LowerSETUP AS UpperWAVE amp AS LowerMEASURE Output setting menu in case HPGL is selected File Setup Paper Size A3 WAVE A3 SETUP au miad aA 4 SETUP 7 AS UpperWAVE AS Lower WAVE A5 UpperWAVE amp AS LowerSETUP AS UpperWAVE amp AS LowerMEASURE Pen Speed SLOW XY Mode LINE Pen Mode CHE Manuva Auto Pen i 1 Press the SHIFT COPY MENU key to display the hard copy setting menu 2 Press the FILE soft key to display the image setting menu Copy To Comment Keyboard PRNTR PLTR FILE GP IB Ka ON Turning ON OFF the auto naming function 3 Press the AutoFile soft key to select ON or OFF For more details concerning this
354. wing example shows how the display position is moved in roll mode Center of the waveform display moves to 5 div waveform display Center of the moves to 0 div Displayed range Displayed range Displayed range before after B to 5 div after moving to 0 div moving 5 div pn a s 1 Record length of acquisition memory Note I Display record length gt Relationship between the display range on the screen and the display record length acquisition memory s record length and trigger position see page 1 11 is given below Display range on the screen Acquisition memory s record length The entire waveform data saved in the acquisition memory can be displayed without the need for moving the horizontal position of the waveform Trigger position Displayed range 10 div i Displayed record length CA aAa ONT RI IASG Record length of acquisition memory Display range on the screen x 2 gt Acquisition memory s record length gt Display range on the screen Waveform datas which are out of the display range on the screen are acquired in the acquisition memory up to 10 div located before on the left of the trigger position The part which is out of the display range on the screen can be displayed by adjusting the horizontal position of the waveform as described earlier Trigger position Waveform data exceeding the
355. wing points Do not remove the cover from the instrument Some parts of the instrument use high voltages which are extremely dangerous When the instrument needs internal inspection or adjustment contact your dealer or nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual Unusual occurrences If you notice smoke or unusual odors coming from the instrument turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord immediately Contact your dealer or the nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual Power cord Nothing should be placed on the power cord also it should be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet never pull the cord itself Always hold the plug and pull it If the power cord is damaged contact your dealer Refer to page 3 for the part number to quote when placing an order General Handling Precautions Never place anything on top of the instrument Never place another instrument or any objects containing water on top of the instrument otherwise a breakdown may occur Do not subject the input terminals or connecting cables to shock Shock to the input terminals or connecting cables may turn into electrical noise and enter the instrument via the signal lines When the instrument is not going to be used for a long period Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet Do not scratch the LCD The LCD is very susceptible to scratches Make sure not to
356. xamples The PC uses one hard disk as a single drive Before connection C HDD After connection C HDD D DL1540CL C8 The PC uses one hard disk as two drives partitions Before connection C HDD D HDD After connection C HDD D DL1540CL C8 E HDD In the actual case this will vary depending on how the hard disk is partitioned and the type of interface IDE SCSI etc and drive NOD eee The DL1540CL can only be connected at the end of the SCSI chain The internal hard disk has a built in terminator Do not format the internal hard disk using the PC IM 701530 01E 13 21 ysiq pJeH euJeiu eui Jo e91 eq ISOS 9y Woy eyeq Duipeo pue Bunes Chapter 14 Other Operations 14 1 Using a Trigger Output Signal Trigger Output Circuit Output level TTL Output logic Negative trailing edge Output delay time 150 ns max Output hold time 2 us min for low level 2 us min for high level Output Circuit 5V 5V L ai 2 2 ko 5120 Trigger Output Terminal The TRIG OUT terminal is situated on the rear panel TRIG OUT TTL LI Output timing A trigger is activated Trigger signal 150ns max t H Trigger output 4 Hold Time for Low and High Level A trigger is activated A trigger is activated H Trigger output 2 Post trigger time Internal process time gt lt gt a Q Pre trigger e Internal process tim Repeat interval for trigger output
357. ximum and minimum voltage respectively ae Peak to peak value MAX MIN V UNDERSHOOT Undershoot value Ovr LOW MIN HIGH LOW x 100 MAX Maximum voltage V OVERSHOOT Overshoot value Max Ovr MAX HIGH HIGH LOW x 100 MIN Minimum voltage V HIGH High level voltage V Min High RMS _ Root mean square value LOW Low level voltage V Rms 14m E xi 2 2 v Low AVG shows the corresponding name at the Avg Average voltage 1 n Y xi V measurement item setting screen HIGH F LOW Measurement items related to the time axis RISE Rise time s WIDTH Width s greater than the mesial value Rise Wd FALL Falltime s WIDTH Width s smaller than the mesial value Fall Wd FREQ Frequency Hz 1 PERIOD DUTY Duty ratio WITHDTH PERIOD x 100 Freq Duty PERIOD Period s shows the corresponding neme at the measurement item Prod setting screen PERIOD gt H I I WIDTH WIDTH I I REESE RS RRR oe ee a HIGH 100 SSeS Se NP a a ee Se Distal line 90 moms lees DP eS see ce Mesial line 50 S Sapp ane aot Poe Ape eee Proximal line 10 LOW 0 IM 701530 01E 8 3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically Pulse Pulse Count PIsN When Pulse 3 Set the measurement range Time Range t
358. xplanation key 4 Turn the rotary knob to shift the phase Step 3 is not required if a MATH function other than multiplication is selected Phase ion lath Knol Shift cr Ciera T 1257 sees PU Changing the display sensitivity of the computation result of multiplication 3 After step 2 has been completed press the SENS soft key 4 Turn the rotary knob to adjust the sensitivity Sensi Math Operation Math Knob bd OFF 1 2 gt 3 1 253 PHASE DTdiv Types of computation The following types can be selected The default value is OFF OFF computation will not be carried out 1 2 3 The result of adding waveform data of CH1 and CH2 will be displayed as trace 3 1 2 3 The result of subtracting waveform data of CH1 and CH2 will be displayed as trace 3 1x2 3 The result of multiplying waveform data of CH1 and CH2 will be displayed as trace 3 Phase shift Math can be performed with the phase of CH2 shifted The setting range and steps are as follows Setting range 5div Setting steps depending on the display record length Refer to page 7 4 for more details Changing the display sensitivity of the computation result of multiplication In order to observe the computation result better the waveform size from the ground level display sensitivity can be changed The display sensitivity of the computation result of multiplication is specified as foll
359. xternal plotter o n 10 7 10 8 block diagram is us suere rrr thee 1 1 broadcasting system occ eee eeeeeeneeseeeeeeeseneeaes 6 5 F C FD AGQ A een eee PERRA 6 15 9 4 MEME 5 6 FOMNUNGED ignia ptt motum 94 eel 6 9 FINIS eie epi indies aidgic bonsai 6 15 GOED E E T E R 6 9 PDIF sainn asninariaianiis Pi us Calibration rcc ree t Dti nt EC E scena 4 6 PPT ee Set eR Eat ae lee Eon en chart Nie KEI EEE A A TE 6 5 Her 10 1 filter LER MENAKUA UIEGR UAR RUNE RIT veu 7 8 Speo d t irae ate Mim e eerie ise dna dd n HU 10 6 floppy disk E tts Mate eae oe on MUN ded CIBANING 5i tte cer Htec e OPERE nk ete 3 1 formatting TIODpy cssquisieapulisqupeu fetu EQUUM Tes ML igici c aads 1 20 4 5 Honk pane A 6 10 TUSC O comment displaylhg 2 rrt aia 10 10 G LU 10 10 GNDG S D E TREE eet 1 2 5 2 contents of the package israr 2 GO NO GO Determination e 1 20 coupling GO NO GO Signal Output ssee 9 13 D 5 2 gralicule 522 22 Meet atta beet etos eo 1 17 7 16 Irigger cess S erae npe a ce eate era ds 6 17 CUISOF sess 8 1 8 6 8 21 H cursor measurements sssssssseeseeeneeenneenns 1 18 AP ETT E AE E ENA 6 5 D HE Rejection cere ce pce tec 1 11 6 17 halting a waveform eene 4 5 jc atin 1 2 hanning window 1 19 8 20 DCCOUDlihg x4 Ee ERSETRROETRRE 5 2 hardcopy 1 21
360. y corresponding to the desired polarity 9 Turn the rotary knob to set the desired trigger level NTSC CH1 Polarity Level Selecting the polarity and setting the frame skip 7 After step 6 press the Frame soft key to display the frame skip selection menu NTSC Line Broadcasting Type Field Frame To NTSC PAL Horv 1 Eli D TopMenu 5 8 Press the desired frame skip soft key NTSC Line Broadcasting Ty mem roadcasting Ty 1 4 8 NTSC PAL mT Y 5 Explanation Broadcasting systems with which the TV trigger can be used NTSC PAL HDTV Selecting the field No Field 1 Detects a field in which the vertical synchronizing pulse and the line start at the same time 2 Detects a field in which the vertical synchronizing pulse starts 1 2H H horizontal scan time after the line starts X Detects both of the above types of field IM 701530 01E 6 5 JebBu e BuneAnoy H 6 4 Setting the TV Trigger Selecting the line No Line A trigger is activated at the beginning of the selected line e NTSC 5 to 1054 Field 1 starts at line No 5 Field 2 starts at line No 268 Line Nos in cannot be set Fed F mmm RAPP 1 2yl ayl ay 5 e 1718 9 40144142113 14 15 16117 18 19120 21 22 23 Line No gt 524525526 548 1049 1050 1051 gt 1052
361. yed by data type and data format and are grouped as follows P P Displayed waveform data P P compressed ACQ Binary data being saved in the acquisition memory ACQ ASC ASCII data of the data residing in the acquisition memory 12C Data consisting of the I C bus analysis results HPGL Screen image data saved using the HP GL command PS Screen image data saved in PS format TIFF Screen image data saved in TIFF format BMP Screen image data saved in BMP format SETUP Setting parameters Points to note when protecting or deleting data Protection setting cannot be performed if the medium is write protected An error message will appear if an attempt is made to protect or delete files e Itis not possible to delete more than one file at once This protection setting is effective against deletion of data but not against initialization formatting Take care not to accidentally delete files by reformatting a medium file Never turn OFF the SCSI device or remove the disk media such as a MO or a PD while the access indicator of the SCSI device is lit Otherwise damage to the SCSI device or the disk may result 13 18 IM 701530 01E 13 9 Changing the SCSI ID Number on Models with the Internal Hard Disk Keys and Procedure Rotary knob 1 Press the MISC key to display the MISC top menu 2 Press the To NextMenu soft key SET LCD scs Ie DataOut Scale Test eee PryMenu
362. ying the power spectrum FFT also saves the computed result of the power spectrum FFT Selecting the waveform to be saved Source When P P is selected as the data type the waveform to be saved can be selected from the following X Y waveforms cannot be saved TRACE1 to 4 One of the input signal waveforms and computed waveforms displayed as trace Nos 1 to 4 is output ALL TRACE AII displayed waveforms are output When ACQ is selected as the data type the waveforms to be saved are the input signal waveforms displayed as trace About the saved data For a description of the format of the data to be saved refer to Appendix 5 Output Data Format used When Saving Waveform Data App 12 Data is saved in the directory which corresponds to the data s format type with one of the following extensions added The directory is created automatically when the floppy disk is formatted by the instrument or when data is saved Data format Directory name Extension P P DL_MISC WVF ACQ BIN DL WAVE WVF ACQ ASCII DL WAVE CSV When saving data a header file which contains information in ASCII format necessary for analysis of the saved data is also saved The file name used for the data is also assigned to the header file and a HDR extension is added The header file is saved in the same directory as the corresponding data Data size Data size will vary according to the save format the number of waveforms channels t
363. ysiq pJeH euJeiu eui Jo e91 eq ISOS 9y Woy eyeq Duipeo pue Bunes 13 5 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Loading ACQ waveform data Note that only BIN data can be loaded 11 Press the LOAD soft key to display the loading menu Function ACQ To sc MEI EXEC TopMenu 12 Use the rotary knob to select the file to be loaded POR 96 05 03 11 33 36 2 STU 96705703 11 34 40 13 Press the EXEC soft key to start loading Function ACQ To If you have saved ACQ data to multiple media you can opt to load all of this data or only part of it for example data from one disk only If you do a partial load the waveform display will not appear over the entire time axis but only over a portion of it If you want to display waveforms over the full span of the time axis insert the medium media with the remaining ACQ data and repeat Steps 11 to 13 as necessary selecting the same filename at Step 12 Moving loaded ACQ waveforms 14 The way to move these waveforms is exactly the same as for input signal waveforms For details refer to page 5 7 Canceling holding the display of the loaded waveform 15 Press the INPUT key of the channel corresponding to the number of the loaded waveform The acquisition hold menu appears 16 Press the ACQ Hold soft key to select OFF Then when you press the START STOP key to start data acquisition the loaded ACQ waveform will be canceled When you select ON

"service manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;service manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"service manual"